Parameter B11

Alcatel-Lucent GSM
Telecom Parameters Dictionary
OMC Document
Reference Guide
Release B11
3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30
BLANK PAGE BREAK
Status
RELEASED
Short title
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use
and communication of its contents not permitted without written
authorization from Alcatel.
2 / 1436
Contents
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1
2
3
8
9
10
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1
Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2
Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
VGCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
IP Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
GSM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
5.3
System (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
6.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
6.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
E-GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
7.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
7.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
DTM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
8.1
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
2G-LTE Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
9.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
9.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
2G-3G Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
10.1
Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
10.2
Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
3 / 1436
Contents
4 / 1436
Preface
Preface
Purpose
Whats New
The BSS Parameter Dictionary lists all of the Telecom Parameters for GSM
and GPRS.
In Edition 30
First official release of document.
Audience
Assumed Knowledge
This manual is designed for OMC-R users, O&M technicians and system
designers.
Not applicable.
5 / 1436
Preface
6 / 1436
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
7 / 1436
1 Introduction
1.1 Parameter Classification

The GSM and GPRS parameters are classified into three categories:
Network: customer dependent parameters, related to the network topology,
defined by the customer and valid for the complete network (e.g. BTS name,
Cell ID, LAC number ...). They can be adjusted by CDE scripts.
Site: adjustable parameters from one cell to the next or from one BSC to the
next. They are set to a default value. They can be adjusted from the OMC-R.
System: fixed parameters, i.e. BSS system mandatory rules or
automatically populated in the DLS skeleton and let unchanged because
not customer dependent. Some of them are coded in BTS Software and
configuration files.
1.2 Parameter Description

To each parameter are associated the following characteristics:
Logical Parameter Name: Mnemonic conventionally used in Alcatel
documentation.
Definition: definition/purpose of the parameter.
Coding rules:, Rules of coding, when necessary.
Mandatory rules: Mandatory relationships or inter-dependence of some
data.
Recommended rules: Recommended relationships or inter-dependence
of some data.
Feature: Indicates to which feature the parameter is linked.
Category: Category into which the parameter is classified.
Instance: Possible instance of the parameter.
Value
Min/Max values: Possible range of the parameter values.
Default value: Parameter value in release B9 for a generic configuration.
Modifiable: Indicates if the parameter is modifiable at the OMC-R.
Parameter Access: Indicates where the parameter is accessible at the
OMC-R.
External Comments: Specific information, when necessary, related
to the parameter.
8 / 1436
2 VGCS Telecom Parameters
9 / 1436
2.1 Site (CAE)

2.1.1 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)) (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)
Definition
Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in
a different location area.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
10 / 1436
2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC)
Definition
Permanent offset to C2 criterion.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB)
Mandatory rules
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
126
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
11 / 1436
2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INBAND_NOTIF
Logical Name
EN_INBAND_NOTIF
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification
Coding rules
0: disabled, 1:enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
12 / 1436
2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INBAND_PAGING
Logical Name
EN_INBAND_PAGING
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging
Coding rules
0: disabled, 1: enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
13 / 1436
2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_UPLINK_REPLY
Logical Name
EN_UPLINK_REPLY
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
14 / 1436
2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_VGCS
Logical Name
EN_VGCS
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the VGCS in the cell
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended

to
- include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED
message (RESP_REQ).
- to configure, at least, one TRX with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 in the
cell.
- to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value
of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
15 / 1436
2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
INBAND_PAGING_THR
Logical Name
INBAND_PAGING_THR
Definition
If the eMLPP priority included in the Paging message from the MSC
is higher than or equal to this parameter, then the BSS shall trigger
in-band paging within cells, that are identified to be paged from the
PAGING message, and that have existing VGC active.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits

000 : deactivation of inband paging
001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)
010 : call priority level 3
110 : call priority level B
111 : call priority level A (highest priority)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
16 / 1436
2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_VGCS_TS
Logical Name
MAX_VGCS_TS
Definition
Maximum number of radio timeslots that can be used by the VGCS

calls in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS

If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) <
Total number of TCHs of the cell".
If EN_VGCS= disabled, then" MAX_VGCS_TS = 0"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
External Comment
127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.

To support VGCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_VGCS_TS
>0
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
17 / 1436
2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_VGCS_TS
Logical Name
MIN_VGCS_TS
Definition
Minimum number of radio timeslots that are reserved for the VGCS
calls in the cell in normal situation (point-to-point CS call can NOT
use these timeslots).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS
Recommended rules
- The following rules about the upper limit are recommended :

i) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:
CCCH combined"
ii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) 3 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0:
CCCH not combined"
iii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX.
- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set
EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of
MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
18 / 1436
2.1.10 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC)
Definition
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when

accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH
for CS service establishment.
Coding rules
P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.

GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm,
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment
According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is

P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase
2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted
differently:
- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS;
interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);
- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS
and the Phase 2/onwards MS).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
19 / 1436
2.1.11 (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR) (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR
Logical Name
NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR
Definition
If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the

Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all other on-going
VGCS call.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits

000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of other on-going VGCS
calls
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
20 / 1436
2.1.12 (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR) (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR
Logical Name
NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR
Definition
If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the

Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all on-going point
to point call whose MS is VGCS capable.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits

000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of all on going point to
point calls in the cell
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
21 / 1436
2.1.13 (NOTIF_PCH_THR) - (NOTIF_PCH_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NOTIF_PCH_THR
Logical Name
NOTIF_PCH_THR
Definition
The priority threshold for notification over PCH.

The BSS shall consider, for Notification/PCH, only VGCS-Calls which
have a priority (eMLPP priority) not below this parameter. If more
than one is selected, all these voice group calls shall be notified on
PCH and all with the same frequency of occurrence.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits

000 : deactivation of notification on PCH in the cell
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
22 / 1436
2.1.14 (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS) - (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Logical Name
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Definition
This parameter defines the maximum number of blocks usable for

NCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
if EN_VGCS is enabled :
- BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
- if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The parameter is significant when EN_VGCS is enabled
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
23 / 1436
2.1.15 (NY2) - (NY2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NY2
Logical Name
NY2
Definition
Maximum number of repetitions for the VGCS UPLINK GRANT

message during an uplink access procedure
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
24 / 1436
2.1.16 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name
PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC)
Definition
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2

criterion.
Coding rules
step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY
OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative
value
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
620
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
inhibited (31)
Umbrella
inhibited (31)
Concentric
inhibited (31)
Concentric Umbrella
inhibited (31)
Microcell
20 s (0)
Minicell
20 s (0)
Extended inner cell
inhibited (31)
Extended outer cell
inhibited (31)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
25 / 1436
2.1.17 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Definition
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the

cell.
Coding rules
Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm.
Mandatory rules
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
26 / 1436
2.1.18 (START_UPLINK_REPLY) - (START_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
START_UPLINK_REPLY
Logical Name
START_UPLINK_REPLY
Definition
Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (with

the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) during the initial part of the
uplink access procedure (i.e. before sending the first UPLINK FREE
message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1024
256
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
27 / 1436
2.1.19 (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY) - (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY
Logical Name
T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY
Definition
This Timer is used to delay the Multiple SACCH Info Modify and
the VGCS_ADD_INFO in order to give the MS a chance to receive
the immediately transmitted VGCS_ADD_INFO/FACCH and SI6
messages
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
100
1000
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
28 / 1436
2.1.20 (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE) (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE
Logical Name
T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE
Definition
This parameter defines the repetition period of CHANNEL RELEASE

message sent on FACCH
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
200
1000
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
29 / 1436
2.1.21 (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE) - (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Logical Name
T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Definition
Delay between consecutive repetitions of the UPLINK FREE

message, sent to the mobile station. The UPLINK FREE messages
shall be repeated as long as no uplink is granted to a mobile station.
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
20
480
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
30 / 1436
2.1.22 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Logical Name
T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Definition
Guard timer to wait for an Uplink Access. If no such bursts are

received at this timer expiry, the BSC releases the voice group call
channel in that cell and provide notifications containing no channel
description.
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_Wait_Uplink_Access >= [START_UPLINK_REPLY + (10 *

WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)] * T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
60
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
31 / 1436
2.1.23 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK) (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK
Logical Name
T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK
Definition
Guard timer to wait for UPLINK REQUEST ACK or UPLINK

REQUEST REJECT message from the MSC.
Coding rules
step size = 500 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
500
5000
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
32 / 1436
2.1.24 (T14) - (T14)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T14
Logical Name
T14
Definition
Maximum queuing time for the VGCS Assignment Requests
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
19
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
33 / 1436
2.1.25 (T3115) - (T3115)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3115
Logical Name
T3115
Definition
This timer is used for the repetition of the VGCS UPLINK GRANT
message during the uplink access procedure. If the timer expires
before the reception of a correctly decoded frame from MS, the BTS
repeats the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to the requesting MS
Coding rules
step size = 20ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
100
480
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
34 / 1436
2.1.26 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Logical Name
TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Definition
Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME.
Coding rules
step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
infinity
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
0 dB (0)
Umbrella
0 dB (0)
Concentric
0 dB (0)
Concentric Umbrella
0 dB (0)
Microcell
infinity (7)
Minicell
infinity (7)
Extended inner cell
0 dB (0)
Extended outer cell
0 dB (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
35 / 1436
2.1.27 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC
Logical Name
VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC
Definition
This parameter defines the type of FR AMR codec used in the

network.
Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
36 / 1436
AMR Full Rate Codec 12,2 kbit/s;

AMR Full Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/st;
2.1.28 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC
Logical Name
VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC
Definition
This parameter defines the type of HR AMR codec used in the

network.
Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
AMR Half Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s;

External Comment
AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,95 kb/s is not supported by Alcatel
BSS.
AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,4kb/s is not supported as a
"stand-alone" codec
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
37 / 1436
2.1.29 (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Logical Name
WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Definition
Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message

(with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) per cycle, during the
non-initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. after sending the
first UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set
to H).
Each time the value of this counter becomes zero, the BTS send one
UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
32
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
38 / 1436
3 LCS Telecom Parameters
39 / 1436
3.1 Network (CDE)

3.1.1 (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN) - (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN
Logical Name
CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN
Definition
Confidence origin used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence

of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference
location to the A-GPS server.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
50.7
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
40 / 1436
3.1.2 (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE) (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE
Logical Name
CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE
Definition
Slope ratio between the confidence and the arc factor used in the 3D
linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by
the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
25
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
41 / 1436
3.1.3 (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE) (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE
Logical Name
CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE
Definition
Slope ratio between the confidence and the sum of minimum radius
factor and maximum radius factor used in the 3D linear regression
of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when
providing the reference location to the A-GPS server.
Coding rules
step size = 0.01
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
15.28
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
42 / 1436
3.1.4 (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST) (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST
Logical Name
MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST
Definition
Bitmap (8 bits) defining the types of optional assistance data to be

retrieved from the A-GPS server when using the MS based A-GPS
positioning method. The following optional assistance data type are
considered: Almanac, UTC model, DGPS corrections, reference
time, acquisition assistance, real-time integrity.
Coding rules
bit 8 (most significant) and bit 7 are not used (i.e. always set to 0); bit
6=1: real-time integrity is retrieived; bit 5=1: acquisition assistance
is retrieived; bit 4=1: reference time is retrieived; bit 3=1: DGPS
corrections is retrieived; bit 2=1: UTC model is retrieived; bit 1 (least
significant)=1: Almanac is retrieived.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
43 / 1436
3.1.5 (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1) - (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1
Logical Name
Definition
The most preferred GPS positioning method.
Coding rules
It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS,

2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different
priorities
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
44 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
The second preferred GPS positioning method.
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
priorities.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
45 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
The third preferred GPS positioning method.
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
priorities.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
46 / 1436
3.1.8 (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT) - (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT
Logical Name
SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT
Definition
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on

TCP keep alive mechanism. This timer controls the retransmission
timeout for the sending of the individual data segments.
Coding rules
step size = 1 second
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
47 / 1436
3.1.9 (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL) (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
Logical Name
SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
Definition
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP

keep alive mechanism. This timer determines the interval separating
keep alive retransmissions until a response is received. Once a
response is received, the delay until the next keep alive transmission
is again controlled by the value of this timer. The connection
will be aborted after the number of retransmissions specified by
SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS have gone unanswered.
Coding rules
step size = 1 second
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
48 / 1436
3.1.10 (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS) (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS
Logical Name
SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS
Definition
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP

keep alive mechanism. This parameter controls the number of times
TCP will retransmit an individual data segment before aborting the
connection. The retransmission timeout is given by the parameter
SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
49 / 1436
3.1.11 (T_i_LB) - (T_i_LB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_i_LB
Logical Name
T_i_LB
Definition
Duration of SMLC unreachability condition that triggers an internal

LCS Reset procedure on the Lb interface.
When unreachable, the location service requests, received from the
MSC, are rejected with a system failure" cause.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
22
External Comment
- Lb interface is available on BSC Evolution only.

- Significant if EN_LB is enabled
- Some "slow" SMLC (e.g. legacy SMLC) may take time to reply the
BSC request (e.g. the SST message sent by the BSC). If the BSC
is connected to such kind of "slow" SMLC, increasing the T_i_LB
value may be necessary.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
50 / 1436
3.1.12 (T_SAGI_GUARD) - (T_SAGI_GUARD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_SAGI_GUARD
Logical Name
T_SAGI_GUARD
Definition
Timer to guard the response from the A-GPS server (on SAGI:
interface with A-GPS server).
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
60
External Comment
The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_SAGI=1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
51 / 1436
3.2 Site (CAE)

3.2.1 (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR) - (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
Logical Name
ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
Definition
Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid

arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on
TA positionning method.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1.5
1.2
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
52 / 1436
3.2.2 (AZIMUTH) - (LCS_AZIMUTH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AZIMUTH
Logical Name
LCS_AZIMUTH
Definition
Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (used
by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning
method).
Coding rules
0: 0 degree,..., 359: 359 degree, 360: omnidirectional cell
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
360
External Comment
0 corresponds to the North orientation and is counted clockwise.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
53 / 1436
3.2.3 (EN_CONV_GPS) - (EN_CONV_GPS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_CONV_GPS
Logical Name
EN_CONV_GPS
Definition
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method Conventional GPS.
Coding rules
0 = disabled; 1 = enabled
Mandatory rules
EN_CONV_GPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- The activation of this positioning method is meaningful when

EN_LCS=1.
- Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
54 / 1436
3.2.4 (EN_LB) - (EN_LB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_LB
Logical Name
EN_LB
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the Lb interface (in the CS domain)

in the BSC.
This interface allows a BSS to be connected to a single external
SMLC.
When enabled, the Timing Advance positioning method (also called
CellId + TA) is used.
The Lb interface is natively carried over SIGTRAN
(SCCP/M3UA/SCTP/IP).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Only one SMLC can be connected to one BSC

- EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time
- When EN_LB is disabled, then EN_LB_NMR cannot be enabled.
- EN_LB can be enabled if, at least, one SCTP endpoint has been
configured in the associated SMLC.
- EN_LB can be disabled if all the Lb signalling links of the associated
SMLC have been locked.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going
traffic is not disrupted. This flag is taken into account immediately
by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
55 / 1436
3.2.5 (EN_LB_NMR) - (EN_LB_NMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_LB_NMR
Logical Name
EN_LB_NMR
Definition
When the Lb interface (in the CS domain) is supported by the BSC,

this flag allow to use the TA positioning + NMR method (with radio
measurements report of neighbour cells), instead of the default
(CellId + TA) positioning method.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_LB_NMR can be enabled only if EN_LB is already enabled
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
56 / 1436
3.2.6 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_LCS
Logical Name
EN_LCS (BSC)
Definition
Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Equal to EN_LCS (MFS)

- EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3).

- Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
57 / 1436
3.2.7 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_LCS
Logical Name
EN_LCS (MFS)
Definition
Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Equal to EN_LCS (BSC)

- EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3).

- Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
58 / 1436
3.2.8 (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
Logical Name
EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
Definition
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method MS Assisted

A-GPS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

EN_LCS=1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
59 / 1436
3.2.9 (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
Logical Name
EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
Definition
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method MS Based A-GPS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_MS_BASED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

EN_LCS=1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
60 / 1436
3.2.10 (EN_RESET_LB) - (EN_RESET_LB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RESET_LB
Logical Name
EN_RESET_LB
Definition
Enables/disables the handling of the RESET procedure, initiated

by the BSC towards the SMLC, on the Lb interface. During this
procedure, all the on-going LCS procedures related to the BSC are
cancelled.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
61 / 1436
3.2.11 (EN_SAGI) - (EN_SAGI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_SAGI
Logical Name
EN_SAGI
Definition
Flag indicating whether SAGI (interface with the A-GPS server) is

configured or not for this BSS.
Coding rules
0: disabled; 1: enabled
Mandatory rules
- EN_SAGI = 0 (from B11 MR3)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
62 / 1436
3.2.12 (Geographical Coordinates) (GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Geographical Coordinates
Logical Name
GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG
Definition
Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not.
Coding rules
0: not significant, 1: significant
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
63 / 1436
3.2.13 (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH) - (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
Logical Name
HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
Definition
Antenna half power beam for the sector supporting the cell (used by
the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning
method).
Coding rules
0: half power beam width unknown, 1: 1 degree,..., 360: 360 degree

(omnidirectional cell)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
360
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
64 / 1436
3.2.14 (LATITUDE) - (LCS_LATITUDE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LATITUDE
Logical Name
LCS_LATITUDE
Definition
Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute
location estimate based on TA positionning method).
Coding rules
Sequence of:
- number of degrees (from 0 to 90)
- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)
- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)
- direction (boolean, true for South and false for North)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
None
0,0,0,false
90,59,9999,true #
Default
External Comment
1) 0 latitude corresponds to the Equator;

2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M
Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Latitude".
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
65 / 1436
3.2.15 (LONGITUDE) - (LCS_LONGITUDE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LONGITUDE
Logical Name
LCS_LONGITUDE
Definition
Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to

compute location estimate based on TA positionning method).
Coding rules
Sequence of:
- number of degrees (from 0 to 180)
- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)
- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)
- direction (boolean, true for West and false for East)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
None
0,0,0,false
180,59,9999,true #
Default
External Comment
1) 0 longitude corresponds to the Greenwich Meridian;

2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M
Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Longitude".
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
66 / 1436
3.2.16 (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
Logical Name
MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
Definition
Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid

Coding rules
step size = 0.05
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
0.6
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
67 / 1436
3.2.17 (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
Logical Name
MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
Definition
Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid

Coding rules
step size = 0.05
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
0.85
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
68 / 1436
3.2.18 (NB_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK) - (NB_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK
Logical Name
NB_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK
Definition
Maximum number of consecutive attempts for the RESET procedure

on the Lb interface (for sending the TS 49.031 RESET message
to the SMLC).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- Significant if EN_RESET_LB is enabled
by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
69 / 1436
3.2.19 (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant
Logical Name
T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant
Definition
SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the

RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Delay
Tolerant Location Request.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >=

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
10
External Comment
The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_LCS=1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
70 / 1436
3.2.20 (T_LCS_Low_Delay) - (T_LCS_Low_Delay)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_LCS_Low_Delay
Logical Name
T_LCS_Low_Delay
Definition
SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including

the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Low
Delay Location Request.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
180
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
71 / 1436
3.2.21 (T_Loc_abort) - (T_Loc_abort)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_Loc_abort
Logical Name
T_Loc_abort
Definition
BSC timer supervising the response from the SMLC in case of

Location Abort.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_Loc_abort < T_Location
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
External Comment
The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
72 / 1436
3.2.22 (T_Loc_abort_LB) - (T_Loc_abort_LB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_Loc_abort_LB
Logical Name
T_Loc_abort_LB
Definition
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising athe response from the
SMLC in case of Location Abort on Lb interface
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
External Comment

traffic is not disrupted. Change applied on new locations procedures
initiated after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
73 / 1436
3.2.23 (T_Location) - (T_Location)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_Location
Logical Name
T_Location
Definition
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the
SMLC in case of Location request, when no RRLP exchange is
triggered with the MS.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
15
External Comment
The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
74 / 1436
3.2.24 (T_Location_LB) - (T_Location_LB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_Location_LB
Logical Name
T_Location_LB
Definition
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising any response from the
SMLC on Lb interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
10
External Comment

traffic is not disrupted. Change applied on new locations procedures
initiated after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
75 / 1436
3.2.25 (T_Location_Longer) - (T_Location_Longer)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_Location_Longer
Logical Name
T_Location_Longer
Definition
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the
SMLC in case of Location request, when a RRLP exchange is
triggered with the MS.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules

T_LCS_Low_Delay
Recommended rules
T_Location_Longer > T_Location
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
30
External Comment
The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1, and replaces

T_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS Assisted A-GPS
and MS Based A-GPS positioning methods.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
76 / 1436
3.2.26 (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant
Logical Name
T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant
Definition
SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the

SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Delay Tolerant Location
Request.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant > T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant

T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
77 / 1436
3.2.27 (T_RRLP_Low_Delay) - (T_RRLP_Low_Delay)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Logical Name
T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Definition
SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the

SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Low Delay Location Request.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
T_Low_Delay > T_RRLP_Low_Delay

T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
120
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
78 / 1436
3.2.28 (T_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK) - (T_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK
Logical Name
T_WAIT_SMLC_RESET_ACK
Definition
Timer monitoring the receipt of the TS 49.031 RESET

ACKNOWLEDGE message from the SMLC during the RESET
procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
15
External Comment

- Significant if EN_RESET_LB is enabled
by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
79 / 1436
80 / 1436
4 IP Telecom Parameters
81 / 1436
4.1 Network (CDE)

4.1.1 (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS_SOURCE) (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS_SOURCE)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS_SOURCE
Logical Name
CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS_SOURCE
Definition
Indicates the method used by the BSC for reporting the cell capacity
to the RNC, on the Iur-g interface.
Coding rules
1: the BSC reports the number of equipped TRXs, configured in the

cell
2: the BSC reports the value of the CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
parameter
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Significant if EN_IURG is enabled
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
82 / 1436
4.1.2 (Estimated_Speed_CS_FAMILY_0) (Estimated_Speed_CS_FAMILY_0)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Estimated_Speed_CS_FAMILY_0
Logical Name
Definition
Factor used for coding (resp. decoding) of the RLC buffer size on
IPGCH interface, according to the estimated speed indication.
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
12
External Comment
Values of Estimated_Speed_CS_FAMILY_i parameters have been

determined to keep a trend as close as possible as the one of (M)CS
raw bitrates.
The default value corresponds to the factor used for CS1, CS2,
MCS1 and MCS2 bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
83 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
14.4
External Comment

raw bitrates.
The default value corresponds to the factor used for CS3 and MCS3
bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
84 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
20
External Comment

raw bitrates.
The default value corresponds to the factor used for CS4 and MCS4
bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
85 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
22.4
External Comment

raw bitrates.
The default value corresponds to the factor used for MCS5 bitrate.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
86 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
27.2
External Comment

raw bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
87 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
44.8
External Comment

raw bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
88 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
54.4
External Comment

raw bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
89 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
100
59.2
External Comment

raw bitrates.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
90 / 1436
4.1.10 (FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_EDGE) (FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_EDGE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_EDGE
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_EDGE
Definition
Edge value of mean gradient to speed up OCXO correction in the

BTS when mean gradient is large.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ppb
50
10
External Comment
The BTS will use the Max (FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_THRES,

FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV _THRES * mean gradient/
FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV _EDGE) as threshold value.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
91 / 1436
4.1.11 (FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_THRES) (FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_THRES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_THRES
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_THRES
Definition
Threshold of mean gradient delta to trigger an OCXO correction in

the BTS. This threshold is needed to be sure there is a convergence
in the frequency synchro evaluations: if the delta is smaller than this
threshold and this is true 4 times one after another, then an OCXO
tuning will be done.
Notes:
- The mean gradient is the calculated frequency offset.
- The mean gradient delta is the difference between the mean
gradient of the current and the mean gradient of the last frequency
synchro evaluation.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ppb
0.1
0.3
External Comment
The BTS will use the Max (FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV_THRES,

FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV _THRES * mean gradient/
FREQ_SYNC_GRAD_CONV _EDGE) as threshold value.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
92 / 1436
4.1.12 (FREQ_SYNC_MAX_INITIAL_EVAL) (FREQ_SYNC_MAX_INITIAL_EVAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_MAX_INITIAL_EVAL
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_MAX_INITIAL_EVAL
Definition
Maximum number of initial frequency synchro evaluations performed

by the BTS. After this number of evaluations, the BTS goes to
sustained phase (even if no OCXO correction has been triggered).
Coding rules
step size = 10
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
1000
70
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
93 / 1436
4.1.13 (FREQ_SYNC_MIN_NBR_EVAL) - (FREQ_SYNC_MIN_NBR_EVAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_MIN_NBR_EVAL
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_MIN_NBR_EVAL
Definition
Minimum number of successful frequency synchro evaluations

performed by the BTS before allowing an OCXO correction. It is used
during initial and sustained phases.
Successful evaluation means that FREQ_SYNC_SUCCESS_RATIO
is fulfilled and no outlier is detected.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
94 / 1436
4.1.14 (FREQ_SYNC_POLL_PER_EVAL) (FREQ_SYNC_POLL_PER_EVAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_POLL_PER_EVAL
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_POLL_PER_EVAL
Definition
Number of times the frequency synchro polling is performed by the

BTS for measuring the minimum clock difference between the BTS
and the frequency synchro time server. It is used during initial and
sustained phases.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
250
96
External Comment
With the default values of FREQ_SYNC_POLL_PER_EVAL and

FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED, the evaluation task
(in sustained phase) will be started once time per day (96x900sec
= 24h): This allows typically to get one low-traffic period on the IP
network (with low delays to the time server) during one evaluation
period
Note: Significant change should be obtained with modifications
multiple of 10.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
95 / 1436
4.1.15 (FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_INITIAL) (FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_INITIAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_INITIAL
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_INITIAL
Definition
Time between two pollings performed by the BTS to the frequency

synchro time server. This timer is used during the initial phase,
i.e. until the frequency synchro algorithm triggers the first OCXO
correction or until FREQ_SYNC_MAX_INITIAL_EVAL initial
frequency synchro evaluations.
Coding rules
step size = 10 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Alcatel-Lucent recommends to set a value large enough to avoid the

overload of the frequency synchro time server.
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_INITIAL should not be larger than
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED.
Anyway, the BTS will use the
Min(FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_INITIAL,
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED) value.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
900
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
96 / 1436
4.1.16 (FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED) (FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED
Definition
Time between two pollings performed by the BTS to the frequency

synchro time server. This timer is used during the sustained
phase, i.e. after the first OCXO correction in the BTS or after
FREQ_SYNC_MAX_INITIAL_EVAL initial frequency synchro
evaluations.
Coding rules
step size = 10 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Alcatel-Lucent recommends to set a value large enough to avoid the

overload of the frequency synchro time server.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
900
900
External Comment
With the default values of FREQ_SYNC_POLL_PER_EVAL and

FREQ_SYNC_POLLING_TIME_SUSTAINED, the evaluation task
(in sustained phase) will be started once time per day (96x900sec
= 24h): This allows typically to get one low-traffic period on the IP
network (with low delays to the time server) during one evaluation
period.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
97 / 1436
4.1.17 (FREQ_SYNC_SUCCESS_RATIO) (FREQ_SYNC_SUCCESS_RATIO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQ_SYNC_SUCCESS_RATIO
Logical Name
FREQ_SYNC_SUCCESS_RATIO
Definition
Ratio of successful pollings performed by the BTS to the frequency

synchro time server before accepting an evaluation.
Remark: Successful means that there is a response from the
frequency synchro time server and the response is usable by the
BTS.
Coding rules
step size = 10
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
10
90
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
98 / 1436
4.1.18 (IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS) - (IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS
Logical Name
IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS
Definition
This parameter is used by the detection mechanism of CS IP

congestion situation on the Abis interface, which relies on the BTS
to measure the UL and DL delays of the IP packets sent to/received
from the TC. This parameter corresponds to the duration of the
observation, during which the BTS will count the "excessive jitter"
events (ie the number of UL or DL packets for which the delay is
IP_CONGESTION_JITTER_THRESHOLD higher than the overall
measured minimum delay).
If during that duration, the number of "excessive jitter"
events measured in one direction is greater than
IP_CONGESTION_PREVENTIVE_THRESHOLD, then a
first level of CS IP congestion case is detected by the BTS.
Only one case of CS IP congestion can be notified per
IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS seconds.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
100
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
99 / 1436
4.1.19 (IP_CONGESTION_JITTER_THRESHOLD) (IP_CONGESTION_JITTER_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IP_CONGESTION_JITTER_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IP_CONGESTION_JITTER_THRESHOLD
Definition

congestion situation on the Abis interface, which relies on the
BTS to measure the UL and DL delays of the IP packets sent
to/received from the TC. This parameter corresponds to the
"excessive jitter" event criteria, ie such event is identified and counted
when the UL or DL delay of the current packet is greater than
IP_CONGESTION_JITTER_THRESHOLD milliseconds from the
overall measured minimum delay.
If during IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS, the number of
"excessive jitter" events measured in one direction is greater than
IP_CONGESTION_PREVENTIVE_THRESHOLD, then a first level of
CS IP congestion case is detected by the BTS
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
40
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
100 / 1436
4.1.20 (IP_CONGESTION_PREVENTIVE_THRESHOLD) (IP_CONGESTION_PREVENTIVE_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IP_CONGESTION_PREVENTIVE_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IP_CONGESTION_PREVENTIVE_THRESHOLD
Definition

congestion situation on the Abis interface, which relies on the BTS
to measure the UL and DL delays of the IP packets sent to/received
from the TC. This parameter corresponds to the minimum number of
UL or DL IP packets, which have an "excessive jitter".
If during IP_CONGESTION_FILTER_WS, the number of "excessive
jitter" events measured in one direction is greater than this minimum
threshold, then a first level of CS IP congestion case is detected
by the BTS.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
101 / 1436
4.1.21 (IP_CONGESTION_TIMER) - (IP_CONGESTION_TIMER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IP_CONGESTION_TIMER
Logical Name
IP_CONGESTION_TIMER
Definition
Duration during which the BSC considers the Abis interface suffers
from CS IP congestion situation. After the reception of the message
IP_Congestion_Indication from a given BTS, the BSC refuses any
new TCH establishments on any TRX linked to that BTS, as long
as IP_CONGESTION_TIMER is running. At timer expiry, the BSC
considers that the BTS has left IP congestion state.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
External Comment
This timer is not relevant when EN_IP_CONGESTION_1ST_LEVEL

is disabled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
102 / 1436
4.1.22 (IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE) (IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE
Logical Name
IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE
Definition
Parameter to control the repetition rate of the delay measurements

performed in DL by IPGCH.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
The operator must control that 6 x

IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL > round trip delay between MFS and BTS. If
that rule is not respected (typically in case of BTS to MFS transport
over satellite (round_trip_delay >= 500ms)), the PS traffic can be
totally blocked.
Recommended rules
- 6 x IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL >= IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL
(because there are 6 polling request contexts per PTU for IPGCHU
at MFS side).
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL >= round trip delay between MFS and BTS
(because there are 3 polling request contexts per PTU for IPGCHC
at MFS side). If that recommendation were not followed (typically in
case of BTS to MFS transport over satellite (round_trip_delay >=
500ms)), the IPGCHC shaping would be less efficient.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
12
External Comment
Delay measurement will be done every

IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE *
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL
Measurements are done on an Abis basis.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
103 / 1436
4.1.23 (IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE) (IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE
Logical Name
IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE
Definition
Parameter to control the repetition rate of the delay measurements in

UL for IPGCH.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules

IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL > round trip delay between MFS and BTS. If
totally blocked.
Recommended rules
- 6 x IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL >= IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL
(because there are 6 polling request contexts per TRE for IPGCHU
at BTS side).
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL >= round trip delay between MFS and BTS
(because there are 3 polling request contexts per TRE for IPGCHC
at BTS side). If that recommendation were not followed (typically in
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
12
External Comment
Delay measurement will be done every

IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE *
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL. Measurements are done on a TRE basis.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
104 / 1436
4.1.24 (IPGCHU_ACK_SEND_THRESHOLD) (IPGCHU_ACK_SEND_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_ACK_SEND_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IPGCHU_ACK_SEND_THRESHOLD
Definition
Threshold on the IPGCHU BE/GBR receive window size above

which an uplink acknowledgement for IPGCHU uplink data is sent
by the MFS to the BTS / a downlink acknowledgement for IPGCHU
downlink data is sent by the BTS to the MFS.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
75
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
105 / 1436
4.1.25 (IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_DL) - (IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_DL
Logical Name
Definition
Percentage of the total Abis bandwidth (cf. the ABIS_BANDWIDTH

parameter) indicating the maximum Abis bandwidth usable by the
Best-Effort IPGCHU in downlink when in "congested" operation, for
a given Abis BTS group.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_Nominal_Abis_BW_Factor >=
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL <= IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_DL
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
106 / 1436
4.1.26 (IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_UL) - (IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_UL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_UL
Definition
Maximum Abis bandwidth usable by the Best-Effort IPGCHU in uplink

when in "congested" operation, for a given TRE with 8 active PDCHs.
Coding rules
Step size = 10 kbit/s
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL <= IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_UL
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
10
1000
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
107 / 1436
4.1.27 (IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL) - (IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL
Definition

parameter) indicating the minimum Abis bandwidth usable by the
Best-Effort IPGCHU in downlink when in "congested" operation, for
a given Abis BTS group.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL <= IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_DL
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
108 / 1436
4.1.28 (IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL) - (IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL
Definition
Minimum Abis bandwidth usable by the Best-Effort IPGCHU in uplink

when in "congested" operation, for a given TRE with 8 active PDCHs.
Coding rules
Step size = 10 kbit/s
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL <= IPGCHU_BW_MAX_CONG_UL
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
10
1000
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
109 / 1436
4.1.29 (IPGCHU_MAX_PATTERN_MEAS_THROUGHPUT_DL) (IPGCHU_MAX_PATTERN_MEAS_THROUGHPUT_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_MAX_PATTERN_MEAS_THROUGHPUT_DL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_MAX_PATTERN_MEAS_THROUGHPUT_DL
Definition
Maximum number of "patterns" used to compute the current Abis BE

throughput used by IPGCHU in DL.
Coding rules
step size = 1 pattern
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
110 / 1436
4.1.30 (IPGCHU_Nominal_Abis_BW_Factor) (IPGCHU_Nominal_Abis_BW_Factor)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_Nominal_Abis_BW_Factor
Logical Name
IPGCHU_Nominal_Abis_BW_Factor
Definition

parameter) indicating the maximum Abis bandwidth usable by the
Best-Effort IPGCHU in downlink, for a given Abis BTS group.
Coding rules
Step size = 10
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_Nominal_Abis_BW_Factor >=
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
400
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
111 / 1436
4.1.31 (IPGCHU_PATTERN_LIFETIME_DL) (IPGCHU_PATTERN_LIFETIME_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_PATTERN_LIFETIME_DL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_PATTERN_LIFETIME_DL
Definition
Lifetime of a "pattern" (i.e. time to switch from one pattern to the

next one) used to compute the current Abis BE throughput used
by IPGCHU in DL.
Coding rules
Step size = 50
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
50
500
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
112 / 1436
4.1.32 (IPGCHU_XOFF_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD) (IPGCHU_XOFF_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_XOFF_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IPGCHU_XOFF_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Definition
Threshold on the BE queue filling level to trigger an Xoff state for

the BE DL flow of a given PTU (back pressure mechanism between
RRM-PCC and IPGCH for the BE DL flow).
Coding rules
Step size = 1 LLC PDU
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
80
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
113 / 1436
4.1.33 (IPGCHU_XOFF_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD) (IPGCHU_XOFF_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_XOFF_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IPGCHU_XOFF_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Definition
Threshold on the GBR queue filling level to trigger an Xoff state for
the GBR DL flow of a given PTU (back pressure mechanism between
RRM-PCC and IPGCH for the strict GBR DL flow).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
80
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
114 / 1436
4.1.34 (IPGCHU_XON_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD) (IPGCHU_XON_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_XON_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IPGCHU_XON_BE_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Definition
Threshold on the BE queue filling level to trigger an Xon state for

the BE DL flow of a given PTU (back pressure mechanism between
RRM-PCC and IPGCH for the BE DL flow).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
115 / 1436
4.1.35 (IPGCHU_XON_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD) (IPGCHU_XON_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_XON_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
IPGCHU_XON_GBR_FIFO_DL_THRESHOLD
Definition
Threshold on the GBR queue filling level to trigger an Xon state for
the GBR DL flow of a given PTU (back pressure mechanism between
RRM-PCC and IPGCH for the strict GBR DL flow).
Coding rules
Step size = 1 LLC PDU.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
116 / 1436
4.1.36 (P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC) - (P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC
Logical Name
Definition
Defines, for BSC, BTS and TC, the priority indicated in L2 protocol
(e.g. ethernet), corresponding to the flows having the P0 internal
priority (the highest).
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC >= P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC
Recommended rules
The operator shall ensure that it is equal to

P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Each internal priority can be mapped to a L2 priority using the

parameter Px_layer2_mapping and mapped to a L3 priority using the
parameter Px_layer3_mapping.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
117 / 1436
4.1.37 (P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS) - (P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Defines, for the MFS, the priority indicated in L2 protocol (e.g.

ethernet), corresponding to the flows having the P0 internal priority
(the highest).
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
118 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Defines the Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by BSC,

BTS or TC flows having the P0 internal BSS priority(P0 is the highest
priority).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Only a subset of the possible values are defined in the standard:
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
46
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
119 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Defines the Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by MFS

flows having the P0 internal BSS priority (P0 is the highest priority).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
46
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
120 / 1436
4.1.40 (P0_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING) - (P0_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
P0_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Logical Name
P0_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Definition
Defines which queue is used in the TP board by the flows having the
P0 internal priority (the highest priority).
Coding rules
step size = 1; queue 3 is the highest priority queue
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Queue 3 (highest priority queue) shall not be used (it is reserved to

NE1oE traffic)
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
121 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
priority.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC >= P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC >=

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
122 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

ethernet), corresponding to the flows having the P1 internal priority.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >=

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
123 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

BTS or TC flows having the P1 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest
priority).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
34
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
124 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

flows having the P1 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest priority).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
34
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
125 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
P1_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Logical Name
P1_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Definition
P1 internal priority.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

NE1oE traffic)
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
126 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
priority.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
127 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

ethernet), corresponding to the flows having the P2 internal priority.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
128 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

BTS or TC flows having the P2 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest
priority).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
26
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
129 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
26
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
130 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
P2_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Logical Name
P2_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Definition
P2 internal priority.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

NE1oE traffic)
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
131 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
priority (the lowest).
Coding rules
step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
132 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

ethernet), corresponding to the flows having the P3 internal priority
(the lowest).
Coding rules
step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
133 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Defines Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by BSC, BTS or

TC flows having the P3 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest priority).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
134 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
Step size = 1.
00 for BE,
10,12,14 for AF1;
18,20,22 for AF2;
26, 28,30 for AF3;
34, 36, 38 for AF4
and 46 for EF.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
135 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
P3_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Logical Name
P3_TP_QUEUE_MAPPING
Definition
P3 internal priority (the lowest priority).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

NE1oE traffic)
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
136 / 1436
4.1.56 (RLC_FC1_BUFFER_SEND_THRES) (RLC_FC1_BUFFER_SEND_THRES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RLC_FC1_BUFFER_SEND_THRES
Logical Name
RLC_FC1_BUFFER_SEND_THRES
Definition
Threshold in RLC to request IPGCH to send DL FC1 flow control

message to PCC, in case of low level of the RLC buffer. It is
expressed as a number of 20 msec periods.
Coding rules
Step size = 1, coded on 1 byte.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
137 / 1436
4.1.57 (RLC_FC1_THROUGHPUT_CHANGE_THRES) (RLC_FC1_THROUGHPUT_CHANGE_THRES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RLC_FC1_THROUGHPUT_CHANGE_THRES
Logical Name
RLC_FC1_THROUGHPUT_CHANGE_THRES
Definition
Threshold in RLC to request IPGCH to send downlink FC1 flow

control message to PCC, in case of important change of the expected
throughput (through an increase or decrease of ther (M)CS and/or
number of allocated PDCHs)
Coding rules
Step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
138 / 1436
4.1.58 (RLC_TARGET_BUFFER) - (RLC_TARGET_BUFFER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RLC_TARGET_BUFFER
Logical Name
RLC_TARGET_BUFFER
Definition
Target filling level of the RLC buffer associated to each DL TBF. This
parameter is used by the FC1 downlink flow control mechanism
between RRM-PCC and RLC layers.
This parameter is expressed as a number of 20 msec periods.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- T_IPGCH_ACK_DL/20 <= 31 - RLC_TARGET_BUFFER (linked

to the max. value of 31 for the Buffer Filling Level IEs on IPGCH
interface).
- RLC_TARGET_BUFFER <= 27
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
block period
30
12
External Comment
Corresponds to number of time-periods (20 ms) worth of data.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
139 / 1436
4.1.59 (Round trip delay BTS-MS) - (round_trip_delay_bts_ms)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Round trip delay BTS-MS
Logical Name
round_trip_delay_bts_ms
Definition
Round trip delay between the PTU and a MS, in IP mode.
Coding rules
step size=10 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In IP mode, the operator shall ensure that T3192 +

T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
40
280
140
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
140 / 1436
4.1.60 (T_IPGCH_ACK_DL) - (T_IPGCH_ACK_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL
Logical Name
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL
Definition
Timer controlling in the BTS the sending of acknowledgements on

IPGCH interface (sending of "DL acknowledgement" messages from
the BTS to the MFS).
Coding rules
Step size = 10
Mandatory rules

IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL > round trip delay between MFS and BTS. If
totally blocked.
Recommended rules
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL >= IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL
(because there are 6 polling request contexts per TRE for IPGCHU
at BTS side).
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL >= round trip delay between MFS and BTS
(because there are 3 polling request contexts per TRE for IPGCHC
at BTS side). If that recommendation were not followed (typically in
- T_IPGCH_ACK_DL/20 <= 31 - RLC_TARGET_BUFFER (linked
to the max. value of 31 for the Buffer Filling Level IEs on IPGCH
interface).
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
40
200
120
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
141 / 1436
4.1.61 (T_IPGCH_ACK_UL) - (T_IPGCH_ACK_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL
Logical Name
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL
Definition
Timer controlling in the MFS the sending of acknowledgements on

IPGCH interface (sending of "UL acknowledgement" messages from
the MFS to the BTS).
Coding rules
Step size = 50
Mandatory rules

IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL > round trip delay between MFS and BTS. If
totally blocked.
Recommended rules
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL => IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL
(because there are 6 polling request contexts per PTU for IPGCHU
at MFS side).
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL >= round trip delay between MFS and BTS
(because there are 3 polling request contexts per PTU for IPGCHC
at MFS side). If that recommendation were not followed (typically in
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
50
200
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
142 / 1436
4.1.62 (T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT) - (T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT
Logical Name
T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT
Definition
Timer after which the IPGCH connection is released in case of

IPGCHU BE/GBR sending window "blocked" for a long time.
Coding rules
Step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
In IP mode: PCC_UL_TBF_GUARD_TIMER <

T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT, because T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT
offers a defence at a higher level (IPGCH flow level) than
PCC_UL_TBF_GUARD_TIMER (TBF level).
Recommended rules
T_IPGCHU_TIMEOUT > Abort interval in the MFS (set by

TCP_MAX_RETRANS (MFS)
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
60
10
External Comment
The purpose of the recommended rule is to ensure that failure at

TCP level will be detected before failure at IPGCH level.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
143 / 1436
4.1.63 (TP_QUEUE0_WEIGHT) - (TP_QUEUE0_WEIGHT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TP_QUEUE0_WEIGHT
Logical Name
TP_QUEUE0_WEIGHT
Definition
Weight used by the "weighted round robin" algorithm to handle the

TP queue 0.
Coding rules
Coded on 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
The weight gives the number of packets that are sent from this queue
every round over the queue before next queue is scheduled. This is
the lowest priority queue.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
144 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TP_QUEUE1_WEIGHT
Logical Name
TP_QUEUE1_WEIGHT
Definition

TP queue 1.
Coding rules
Coded on 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
every round over the queue before next queue is scheduled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
145 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TP_QUEUE2_WEIGHT
Logical Name
TP_QUEUE2_WEIGHT
Definition

TP queue 2.
Coding rules
Coded on 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
16
External Comment
every round over the queue before next queue is scheduled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
146 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TP_QUEUE3_WEIGHT
Logical Name
TP_QUEUE3_WEIGHT
Definition

TP queue 3.
Coding rules
Coded on 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
255
External Comment
Queue 3 is the highest priority queue. It handles only the NE1oE

internal traffic (strong time synchronization constraints linked to the
NE1oE protocol). The weight gives the number of packets that are
sent from this queue every round over the queue before next queue
is scheduled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
147 / 1436
4.2 Site (CAE)

4.2.1 () - (MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE
Definition
State assigned to a given MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature),

for the load redistribution function. That function removes the "off
loaded" MSC from the list of candidate MSCs on BSS side.
Coding rules
0: off loaded
1: on loaded
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled.

- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.
- If a MSC server is in high load situation, the operator can avoid
the MSC to enter the overload situation through the update of that
parameter to "off loaded" for the concerned MSC.
Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied
immediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MS
requires the same change done on Core Network side too.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
148 / 1436
4.2.2 () - (SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE
Definition
State assigned to a given SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex

feature), for the load redistribution function. That function removes
the "off loaded" SGSN from the list of candidate SGSNs on BSS side.
Coding rules
0: off loaded
1: on loaded
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour

of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN,
must have the same SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled.

- If a SGSN server is in high load situation, the operator can avoid
the SGSN to enter the overload situation through the update of that
parameter to "off loaded" for all the NSEs of all the BSSs connected
to the concerned SGSN.
Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied
immediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MS
requires the same change done on Core Network side too.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
149 / 1436
4.2.3 (ABIS_BANDWIDTH) - (ABIS_BANDWIDTH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ABIS_BANDWIDTH
Logical Name
ABIS_BANDWIDTH
Definition
Total Abis bandwidth available (for the Abis BTS group if

Abis-Transport-Mode = "IP Ethernet", or for one E1 link if
Abis-Transport-Mode = "IP framed" or "IP unframed").
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; this
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any Abis
bandwidth yet.
Mandatory rules
The Abis bandwidth can be defined / negotiated with a transport

network operator through SLA (Service Level Agreement). Such
a SLA should define the needed bandwidth per QoS level (i.e.
P0/CS, P1/SIG, P2/GBR, P3/BE). Thus, the ABIS_BANDWIDTH
parameter shall be positioned to the minimum value between the
SLA values (e.g. CIR (Committed Information Rate) and/or EIR
(Excess Information Rate) values) and other inputs or calculation
results. The value of the TCH_TS_ACTIVITY_FACTOR parameter
may also be constrained by SLA.
Recommended rules
In case of variable Abis bandwidth (e.g. micro-wave), the

ABIS_BANDWIDTH parameter shall be positioned to the minimum
guaranteed bandwidth.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
A-bis link
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
65535
None
External Comment
150 / 1436
If Abis-Transport-Mode = "IP framed", the ABIS_BANDWIDTH

parameter is CAE/"Virtual changeable" and shall be computed
according to the Usable_TSs parameter value (so no input is needed
from the operator in this case).
In the case of a BTS linked to the BSC through 2 E1 links, then the
total bandwidth is twice ABIS_BANDWIDTH value.
If Abis-Transport-Mode = "IP Ethernet", the ABIS_BANDWIDTH
parameter shall be mandatorily set by the operator (the default value
(=None) is indeed not relevant because out of the range of possible
values)". To be noted that the Abis should be the bottleneck of
the transmission bandwidth in a well-engineered BSS IP transport
network (the available transmission bandwidth on the Abis last mile is
considered to be the bottleneck with respect to the radio bandwidth
between RRM and RLC/MAC).
Bandwidth used by OML is neglected.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
151 / 1436
4.2.4 (ADD_FUNC_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC) (IURG_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ADD_FUNC_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Logical Name
IURG_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Definition
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of BSC addresses

used for telecom protocols for the feature "support of the Iur-g+
interface".
Coding rules
coded on 15 characters string
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Parameter change: Changing the IP configuration (e.g. subnet

mask, and so routing table) of any IP equipment of the network
(BSC included) may impact the ongoing traffic. Usually, the change
is also to be done accordingly in the gateway(s). As consequence,
Alcatel-Lucent recommends to shut down the traffic before any
change.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
152 / 1436
4.2.5 (ADD_FUNC_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC) (LB_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ADD_FUNC_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Logical Name
LB_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Definition

used for telecom protocols for the feature "support of the Lb
interface".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

change.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
153 / 1436
4.2.6 (Asig Subnet Mask) - (ASIG_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Asig Subnet Mask
Logical Name
ASIG_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Definition

used for telecom protocols for the feature "A signalling over IP"
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

change.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
154 / 1436
4.2.7 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Logical Name
Definition
Primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on

the MSC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside one MSC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lock

the associated A Signalling Link (ASL).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
155 / 1436
4.2.8 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2) (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Secondary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol)

on the MSC side.
It is an optional address used in case of SCTP multihoming in MSC
side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
156 / 1436
4.2.9 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Logical Name
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Definition
List of the SCTP endpoints (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC

side.
Up to 4 endpoints can be defined in that list.
Coding rules
coded as an array of 4 entries

Each entry is an SCTP endpoint, composed
of ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1,
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT and
Mandatory rules
When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of

SCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

the associated A Signalling Link(s) (ASL).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
157 / 1436
4.2.10 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition
Port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and
ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a
SCTP endpoint inside one MSC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
158 / 1436
4.2.11 (BANDWIDTH_PER_SIG_LINK) - (BANDWIDTH_PER_SIG_LINK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BANDWIDTH_PER_SIG_LINK
Logical Name
BANDWIDTH_PER_SIG_LINK
Definition
Bandwidth consumed by the RSL signalling link associated to a TRX

on Abis interface. The bandwidth, used by the OML link associated
to a BTS, is also included in that bandwidth (as the global OML
bandwidth is assumed very low or very sporadic).
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
In case of a BTS with 2 Abis (2 E1 links),

BANDWIDTH_PER_SIG_LINK shall take the same value for both
Abis.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
A-bis link
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
32
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
159 / 1436
4.2.12 (BANDWIDTH_PER_TCH_TS) - (BANDWIDTH_PER_TCH_TS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BANDWIDTH_PER_TCH_TS
Logical Name
BANDWIDTH_PER_TCH_TS
Definition
Abis bandwidth consumed by a RTS supporting some TCH(s) (one

FR TCH or two HR TCHs).
The RTSs supporting only one HR TCH are supposed to consume
half this bandwidth.
The statistical bandwidth gain brought by DTX (when DTX is
activated) shall be taken into account in this value.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
In case of a BTS with 2 Abis (2 E1 links), BANDWIDTH_PER_TCH_TS

shall take the same value for both Abis.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
A-bis link
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
16
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
160 / 1436
4.2.13 (BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS) - (BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS
Logical Name
BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS
Definition
This parameter is the specific IP address used in the BTS for the
BFD protocol (Bidirectional Forwarding Detection).
Coding rules
Coded on 4 octets string

The coded default value 0.0.0.0 means BFD is not activated on this
BFD IP address; that dummy value indicates that the operator does
not provide any IP address yet. It is not displayed on the OMC.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- 255.255.255.255 is forbidden
- The gateway address (see BTS_ROUTING_SUBGROUP defined
in the BOP) shall be different to the BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BTS
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
- Meaningful only for BTS in IP transport mode

- This parameter is configurable from the BTS terminal (BTS-NEM)
- Note: BFD is always active on the BTS_IP_Address. There is no
need to configure BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS (different of BTS_IP
address) if in the router a host route to the BTS_IP_address is
defined, which is bound to a BFD session. It is needed to configure
BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS if a network route is defined in the router
(the BFD_IP_ADDRESS_BTS is next hop for the BTS_IP_address).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
161 / 1436
4.2.14 (BSC_RSL_TID) - (BSC_RSL_TID)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSC_RSL_TID
Logical Name
BSC_RSL_TID
Definition
RSL termination identifier on BSC side.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Inside a BSC, each BSC_RSL_TID is unique
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
162 / 1436
4.2.15 (Bss Subnet Mask) - (BSS_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Bss Subnet Mask
Logical Name
BSS_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC
Definition

used for telecom protocols for the feature "Ip transport in the BSS".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

change.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
163 / 1436
4.2.16 (BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE) - (BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE
Logical Name
BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE (BSC)
Definition
IP Transport mode for Ater level signalling links (GSL, Qmux/TCSL,

N7, knowing only GSL applies to the MFS): TDM or IP
Coding rules
0 : TDM, 1 :IP
Mandatory rules
- Can be set to IP if all the atermuxes, connected to the MFS,

are pure PS atermuxes (AterMux-GPRS-Usage=dedicated and
GPRS-capacity=100) and if all the atermuxes, connected to the
TC, are pure CS atermuxes (AterMux-GPRS-Usage=mixed and
GPRS-capacity=0).
- Can be set to IP if at least one TCSL link (on TC side) has been
configured in the BSC.
- When set to IP on BSC side, then can be set to IP on MFS side
for the BSS.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- IP transport in BSS is available on BSC Evolution only.

- Parameter change: a BSC reset procedure is needed, after
modification. This BSC reset leads to a total outage of several
minutes. No telecom service is provided during this procedure.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
164 / 1436
4.2.17 (BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE) - (BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE
Logical Name
BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE (MFS)
Definition
IP Transport mode for Ater level signalling links (GSL, Qmux/TCSL,

N7, knowing only GSL applies to the MFS): TDM or IP
Coding rules
0 : TDM, 1 :IP
Mandatory rules
- Can be set to IP on MFS side for the BSS, only if, before, it has
been set to IP on BSC side.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- IP transport in BSS is available on MFS Evolution only.

- Parameter change: Any modification of the parameter leads the
MFS to reset autonomously all the GPs connected to this BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
165 / 1436
4.2.18 (BTS_IP_Address) - (BTS_IP_Address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BTS_IP_Address
Logical Name
BTS_IP_Address
Definition
IP address of the BTS, used by all protocols (IPTCH, IPGCH, RSL,

OML,...).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Meaningful only for BTS in IP transport mode.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
166 / 1436
4.2.19 (BTS_RSL_TID) - (BTS_RSL_TID)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BTS_RSL_TID
Logical Name
BTS_RSL_TID
Definition
RSL termination identifier of one TRX (inside a TRE HW module)

on BTS side
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Inside a TRE HW module, each BTS_RSL_TID is unique
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
167 / 1436
4.2.20 (BTS_VLAN_ID) - (BTS_VLAN_ID)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BTS_VLAN_ID
Logical Name
BTS_VLAN_ID
Definition
Virtual LAN identifier used to tag the BTS traffic.
Coding rules
Coded on 32 bits.
0 means there is no VLAN_ID (only "priority tagging": Cf 802.1Q).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The VLAN_ID value shall be consistent in all the VLAN-aware

switches of the IP network.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BTS
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4094
External Comment
- This parameter is configurable from the BTS terminal (BTS-NEM).

- Meaningful only for BTS in IP transport mode.
- Parameter change: Change of the VLAN_ID used by the BTS
will impact the traffic of the BTS. As consequence, Alcatel-Lucent
recommends to shut down the traffic before any change.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
168 / 1436
4.2.21 (E1_MTU) - (E1_MTU)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
E1_MTU
Logical Name
E1_MTU
Definition
MTU used in DL by the TP board of the BSC and in UL by the BTS

(SUM) for IPoverE1 link.
Coding rules
Step size = 100 bytes
Mandatory rules
E1_MTU >= IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
600
1500
600
External Comment
This parameter is not used because IPoE1 is not supported in B11
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
169 / 1436
4.2.22 (EN_A_FLEX) - (EN_A_FLEX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_A_FLEX
Logical Name
EN_A_FLEX
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the "Aflex" feature (for signaling

traffic). The Aflex feature allows a BSS to be connected to more
than one MSC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled

When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, up to 16 MSCs can be connected to
one BSC.
When EN_A_FLEX is disabled, only one MSC can be connected
to one BSC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- Support of A-Flex by the MSC server is mandatory.
- Support of Virtual MGW feature by the Media Gateway is mandatory.
Parameter change: Before disabling the feature from the BSC side,
the operator must delete all the excessive MSCs (except one, ie no
more than one MSC connected to the BSC).
Before enabling the feature, the operator must have configured the
NULL_NRI and NRI_LENGTH parameters. Then the Aflex feature
deals with the unlocked MSC(s).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
170 / 1436
4.2.23 (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP) - (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_ASIG_OVER_IP
Logical Name
EN_ASIG_OVER_IP
Definition
Enables/disables the support of "A signalling over IP"
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled.

- EN_ASIG_OVER_IP can be enabled if, at least, one MSC SCTP
endpoint has been configured.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only.

- Parameter change: A BSC reset procedure is needed, after
modification, to resynchronize all the channels of the A interface.
This BSC reset leads to a total outage of several minutes. No
telecom service is provided during this procedure.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
171 / 1436
4.2.24 (EN_GB_FLEX) - (EN_GB_FLEX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_GB_FLEX
Logical Name
EN_GB_FLEX
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the "Gbflex" feature (for data and

signaling traffic). The GbFlex feature allows a BSS to be connected
to more than one SGSN.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP

- If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled
- EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1
- When EN_GB_FLEX is enabled, up to 8 SGSNs can be connected
to one BSS.
- When EN_GB_FLEX is disabled, only one SGSN can be connected
to one BSS.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Support of Gb-Flex by the SGSN is mandatory.

Parameter change: no impact on the on going telecom service.
Before disabling the feature from the MFS side, the operator shall
delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE per GPU, ie
no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
172 / 1436
4.2.25 (EN_IP_CONGESTION_1ST_LEVEL) (EN_IP_CONGESTION_1ST_LEVEL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_IP_CONGESTION_1ST_LEVEL
Logical Name
EN_IP_CONGESTION_1ST_LEVEL
Definition
Enables/disables the defence mechanism related to CS IP

congestion situation on the Abis interface.
When a CS IP congestion is detected by a given BTS, then no new
call can be established on any TRX linked to that BTS as long as
IP_CONGESTION_TIMER is running (the on going CS calls are kept
established).
This first level of detection, also called preventive congestion
detection, is based on the UL and DL transmission delays measured
to transfer IP packets between the BTS and the TC. It aims at
avoiding that the congestion situation gets worse.
Coding rules
0: 1st level of CS IP congestion is disabled

1: 1st level of CS IP congestion is enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going

by the BSC: if a congestion situation is already detected by the BTS
when this flag is activated (indeed, the detection in the BTS is always
active), then the first level of defence applies immediately in the BSC.
If this flag is disabled when the first level of defence applies in the
BSC then all new calls are immediately accepted by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
173 / 1436
4.2.26 (EN_IURG) - (EN_IURG)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_IURG
Logical Name
EN_IURG
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the Iur-g+ (Iur-g with enhanced

control plane) interface.
This interface allows a BSS to be connected to one or several RNCs.
The enhanced RNSAP control plane is carried over
SCCP/M3UA/SCTP/IP.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Up to 16 RNCs can be connected to one BSC.

- EN_IURG can be enabled if, at least, one RNC SCTP endpoint has
been configured.
- EN_IURG can be disabled if all the Iur-g signalling links of all the
RNCs have been locked.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- Parameter change:No impact on the telecom service, on going
traffic is not disrupted. This flag is taken into account
immediately by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
174 / 1436
4.2.27 (Gb_Configuration_Type) - (Gb_Configuration_Type)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Gb_Configuration_Type
Logical Name
Gb_Configuration_Type
Definition
Configuration type used with Gb over IP.

In case of static configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are given by
O&M.
In case of dynamic configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are
sent dynamically by the SGSN. For that exchange, at least one
pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint is previously given by O&M.
Coding rules
0 : Static configuration
1: Dynamic configuration
Mandatory rules
In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration where Gb_Transport_Mode

is IP, all the NSEs connected to the same SGSN, having children
SGSN IPendpoint(s), must have the same Gb_Configuration_Type.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Gb_Configuration type is significant only when Gb_Transport mode

is IP.
Parameter change: before any parameter modification, the operator
has to delete the children SGSN IP endpoint(s).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
175 / 1436
4.2.28 (GPU_Gb_Base_IP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_IP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPU_Gb_Base_IP
Logical Name
GPU_Gb_Base_IP
Definition
Base address of the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used to

define the GPU_Gb_IP_Address of each GPU board (for Gb over IP
interface).
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
The last group is set to 000 (base address)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Parameter change: if Gb_transport_Mode is already in IP mode, a

change of this parameter must be followed by a manual reset of the
associated GP/GPU (during the IP settings preparation phase, no
manual reset is needed since the reset is automatically performed by
the MFS at the feature activation time).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
176 / 1436
4.2.29 (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPU_Gb_Base_UDP
Logical Name
GPU_Gb_Base_UDP
Definition
Base port number of the UDP port number of the local Gb IP

endpoint, used to define the GPU_Gb_UDP_port of each GPU board
(for Gb over IP interface).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63488
64512
64512
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
177 / 1436
4.2.30 (GPU_Gb_IP_Address) - (GPU_Gb_IP_Address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPU_Gb_IP_Address
Logical Name
GPU_Gb_IP_Address
Definition
Allows to display the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used by

a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface)
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
coded default value is for implementation purposes only
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
GPU
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Calculated by the MFS from the GPU_Gb_Base_IP value.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
178 / 1436
4.2.31 (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port) - (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPU_Gb_UDP_Port
Logical Name
GPU_Gb_UDP_Port
Definition
Allows to display the UDP port number of the local Gb IP endpoint,

used by a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
GPU
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
63488
64512
64512
External Comment
equal to GPU_Gb_base_UDP.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
179 / 1436
4.2.32 (IP_Address) - (SGSN_IP_Address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IP_Address
Logical Name
SGSN_IP_Address
Definition
IP address of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static configuration

of Gb over IP interface.
IP address of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in case of
dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface.
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
- Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port)

must be unique per NSE.
- in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can be
defined per NSE.
- In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configured
SGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
SGSN-IPEndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
180 / 1436
4.2.33 (IPBSS_SUBNET_MASK_MFS) - (IPBSS_SUBNET_MASK_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPBSS_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Logical Name
IPBSS_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Definition
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of MFS addresses

used for
IPGCH / IPGSL protocol
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Parameter change: if BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE is already in IP

mode, a change of this parameter must be followed by a manual
reset of all the GPs connected to the IP BSS (during the IP settings
preparation phase, no manual reset is needed since the reset is
automatically performed by the MFS at the feature activation time).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
181 / 1436
4.2.34 (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS) - (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Logical Name
IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Definition
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of MFS addresses

used for
Gb telecom protocols
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
182 / 1436
4.2.35 (IPGCH_Base_Address_MFS) - (IPGCH_Base_Address_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCH_Base_Address_MFS
Logical Name
IPGCH_Base_Address_MFS
Definition
Base address of the local IP address used by the MFS to define the
IP address used by the IPGCH protocol on each GP board
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
- Operator must take care that a MFS will reserve 30 GP address

max from this base.
- Parameter change: if BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE is already in IP
reset of the GPs connected to the IP BSS (during the IP settings
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
183 / 1436
4.2.36 (IPGCH_IP_Address_MFS) - (IPGCH_IP_Address_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCH_IP_Address_MFS
Logical Name
IPGCH_IP_Address_MFS
Definition
Allow to display the IP address of the IPGCH link used by a GP

board on the MFS side.
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
GPU
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Calculated by the MFS from IPGCH_Base_Address_MFS
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
184 / 1436
4.2.37 (IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE) - (IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE
Logical Name
IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE
Definition
Maximum IPGCH packet size (including TCP/UDP/IP headers) used

by IPGCHC and IPGCHU.
Coding rules
Step size =100
Mandatory rules
IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE <= E1_MTU in case of IPoE1
Recommended rules
- IPGCH sending window size (ie 112 on G3 TRE / 496 on higher

TRE) x IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE / round trip delay between MFS
and BTS >= maximum theoretical throughput possible on the TRE
(ex: CS-4 throughput on 8 PDCHs = 160 kbps / MCS-9 throughput
on 16 PDCHs = 947 kbps). If that recommendation were not
followed (typically in case of BTS to MFS transport over satellite
(round_trip_delay >= 500ms)), the PS throughput would be degraded
due to stalled IPGCH sending window.
- The operator must ensure that the MTU in its network is greater than
IPGCH_PACKET_SIZE. If it is not the case, IPGCH does not work.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
Abis group
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
300
1500
300
External Comment
The value of this parameter is only indicative: it is not applied directly

because some TRE hardware constraints have to be taken into
account when computing the TCP MSS (Maximum Segment Size)
and the IPGCHU MISS (Maximum IPGCHU Segment Size) values.
This parameter shall be set like a Network MTU (Maximum
Transmission Unit), i.e. by taking into account the size of the TCP/IP
headers (for the TCP MSS) and the size of the UDP/IP/IPGCH
headers (for the IPGCHU MISS).
Change on this parameter applies only after a TCP connection
reestablishment.
This parameter impacts the jitter experienced by the CS traffic.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
185 / 1436
4.2.38 (IPGCHC_Base_TCP_MFS) - (IPGCHC_Base_TCP_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHC_Base_TCP_MFS
Logical Name
IPGCHC_Base_TCP_MFS
Definition
Base for the TCP port number used by each GP board of the MFS
for IPGCHC protocol. This base is used to define the TCP ports for
each PTU access. The same base is used by each GP board (they
have different IP addresses to be distinguished).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
53504
53568
53504
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
186 / 1436
4.2.39 (IPGCHU_Base_UDP_MFS) - (IPGCHU_Base_UDP_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_Base_UDP_MFS
Logical Name
IPGCHU_Base_UDP_MFS
Definition
Base for the UDP port number used by each GP board of the MFS
for IPGCHU protocol.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
53248
53502
53248
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
187 / 1436
4.2.40 (IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL) (IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL
Definition
For IPGCHU, threshold on measured differential delay in downlink for

a given Abis group (second congestion threshold).
When the measured differential delay exceeds this threshold,
a very pessimistic BE shaping is applied in downlink (cf. the
IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_DL parameter).
Coding rules
Step size = 10.
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL >=
IPGCHU_DELAY_LOW_THRES_DL
Recommended rules
6 x IPGCH_DL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_UL => IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL
(because there are 6 IPGCH polling request contexts for each PTU
at MFS side).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
Abis group
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
10
500
150
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
188 / 1436
4.2.41 (IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL) (IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL
Logical Name
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL
Definition
For IPGCHU, threshold on measured differential delay in uplink for a

given Abis group (second congestion threshold).
When the measured differential delay exceeds this threshold, a very
pessimistic BE shaping is applied in uplink on the concerned TRE(s)
(cf. the IPGCHU_BW_MIN_CONG_UL parameter.
Coding rules
Step size = 10.
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL >=
IPGCHU_DELAY_LOW_THRES_UL
Recommended rules
6 x IPGCH_UL_BW_CONTROL_REPEAT_RATE x
T_IPGCH_ACK_DL => IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL
(because there are 6 IPGCH polling request contexts for each TRE
at BTS side).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
Abis group
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
10
500
150
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
189 / 1436
4.2.42 (IPGCHU_DELAY_LOW_THRES_DL) (IPGCHU_DELAY_LOW_THRES_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
For IPGCHU, threshold on measured differential delay in downlink for

a given Abis group (first congestion threshold).
Below this threshold, the system is in nominal mode without any
regulation (no BE shaping in downlink).
Coding rules
Step size = 10.
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_DL >=
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
Abis group
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
10
500
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
190 / 1436
4.2.43 (IPGCHU_DELAY_LOW_THRES_UL) (IPGCHU_DELAY_LOW_THRES_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
For IPGCHU, threshold on measured differential delay in uplink for a

given Abis group (first congestion threshold).
Below this threshold, the system is in nominal mode without any
regulation (no BE shaping in uplink on the concerned TRE(s))
Coding rules
Step size = 10.
Mandatory rules
IPGCHU_DELAY_HIGH_THRES_UL >=
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
Abis group
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
10
500
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
191 / 1436
4.2.44 (IPGSL_Base_Address_MFS) - (IPGSL_Base_Address_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGSL_Base_Address_MFS
Logical Name
IPGSL_Base_Address_MFS
Definition
Base address of the local IP address used to define the IP address

used by the IPGSL on each GP board.
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
- Operator must take care that a MFS will reserve 30 GP address

max from this base.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
192 / 1436
4.2.45 (IPGSL_BASE_TCP_MFS) - (IPGSL_BASE_TCP_MFS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGSL_BASE_TCP_MFS
Logical Name
IPGSL_BASE_TCP_MFS
Definition
TCP port number used to configure the TCP port number of each GP
board of the MFS for IPGSL interface.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52624
52624
52624
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
193 / 1436
4.2.46 (IPGSL_IP_Address_BSCside) - (IPGSL_IP_Address_BSCside

(BSC))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGSL_IP_Address_BSCside
Logical Name
IPGSL_IP_Address_BSCside (BSC)
Definition
IP address of the IPGSL link on BSC side
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
IP-GSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Parameter change: After the change of this parameter (via the

START_BSS_IP_ADDRESS_BSC) by the operator from the BSC
terminal, the MFS will perform an automatic reset of all the GPs
connected to this BSS (PS traffic is interrupted in the BSS).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
194 / 1436
4.2.47 (IPGSL_IP_Address_MFSside) - (IPGSL_IP_Address_MFSside

(MFS))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGSL_IP_Address_MFSside
Logical Name
IPGSL_IP_Address_MFSside (MFS)
Definition
IP address of the IPGSL link on MFS side.

The value is calculated by the MFS from IPGSL_Base_Address_MFS
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
IP-GSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
195 / 1436
4.2.48 (IPGSL_TCP_PORT_BSCside) - (IPGSL_TCP_PORT_BSCside

(BSC))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGSL_TCP_PORT_BSCside
Logical Name
IPGSL_TCP_PORT_BSCside (BSC)
Definition
TCP port number used by each CCP board of the BSC for IPGSL
interface.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
IP-GSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52624
52625
52624
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
196 / 1436
4.2.49 (IPGSL_TCP_PORT_MFSside) - (IPGSL_TCP_PORT_MFSside

(MFS))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPGSL_TCP_PORT_MFSside
Logical Name
IPGSL_TCP_PORT_MFSside (MFS)
Definition
TCP port number used by each GP board of the MFS for IPGSL
interface.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
IP-GSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52624
52624
52624
External Comment
Each GP board uses the same TCP port number (they can be
distinguished by their IP address).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
197 / 1436
4.2.50 (IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_MUX) - (IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_MUX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_MUX
Logical Name
IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_MUX
Definition
UDP ports of IPTCH link used on TC side (for MUXTRAUP and

TRAUP protocols).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The operator must ensure that the same UDP port must be declared
for same BSC at different TC and that different UDP ports must be
declared for different BSC at same TC. Otherwise IPTCH does not
work in a multi-TC environment.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
54528
54551
54528
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
198 / 1436
4.2.51 (IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_NONMUX) (IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_NONMUX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_NONMUX
Logical Name
IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_NONMUX
Definition
UDP ports used for TC-TC (eTRAUP) flow in UL.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Shall be an even number.

Shall be different from IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_MUX.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52480
52526
52480
External Comment
IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_NONMUX for downlink flow =

IPTCH_UDP_PORT_TC_NONMUX + 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
199 / 1436
4.2.52 (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1) (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1
Logical Name
Definition
Primary IP address of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on

the RNC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside one RNC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

the associated Iur-g Signalling Link
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
200 / 1436
4.2.53 (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_2) (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Secondary IP address of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol)

on the RNC side.
It is an optional address used in case of SCTP multihoming in RNC
side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
201 / 1436
4.2.54 (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST) - (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Logical Name
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Definition
List of the SCTP endpoints (used by M3UA protocol) on the RNC

side.
Coding rules
coded as an array of 4 entries

of IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1,
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT and
Mandatory rules
When the RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of

SCTP endpoints configured in the IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
must be equal or greater than RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RNC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

all the Iur-g Signalling Links of the modified RNC
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
202 / 1436
4.2.55 (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) (IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition
Port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the RNC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside one RNC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
203 / 1436
4.2.56 (LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP) - (LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Logical Name
LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Definition
The minimum number of active IP server processes (IPSP) in the

SMLC server, required to handle the signalling traffic with that SMLC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
When the SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of

SCTP endpoints configured in the LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST must
be equal or greater than LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This parameter is significant when the SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE of

the SMLC is load sharing mode.
- Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lock
all the Lb Signalling Links of the modified SMLC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
204 / 1436
4.2.57 (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1) (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1
Logical Name
Definition
Primary IP address of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol)

on the SMLC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside one SMLC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

the associated Lb Signalling Link
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
205 / 1436
4.2.58 (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_2) (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Secondary IP address of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol)

on the SMLC side.
It is an optional address used in case of SCTP multihoming in SMLC
side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
206 / 1436
4.2.59 (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST) - (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Logical Name
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
Definition
List of the SCTP endpoints (used by M3UA protocol) on the SMLC

side.
Coding rules
coded as an array of 4 entries.

of LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1,
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT and
Mandatory rules
When the SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of

SCTP endpoints configured in the LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST must
be equal or greater than LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

all the Lb Signalling Links of the modified SMLC
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
207 / 1436
4.2.60 (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) - (LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition
Port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the SMLC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify a
SCTP endpoint inside one SMLC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
208 / 1436
4.2.61 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Logical Name
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1
Definition
Local primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA

protocol) on the BSC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
identify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC
Recommended rules
255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
209 / 1436
4.2.62 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition
Local port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the

BSC side.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 and
LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
Recommended rules
By default, the LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT values are

taken in the range 61953-61999.
It is recommended to change these values only in case of IOT issue
with the MSC. In this case it is recommended:
- to not use values in the range 0..49151 ("well known" and "iana
registered" ports)
-to avoid the values already used by other BSS protocols using IP,
-and especially to not use the ports used by the IP_BSSAsig protocol
(to avoid conflicts during the transition from Asig over TDM to Asig
over IP).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment
210 / 1436
Parameter change: Before any modification of the

Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, If the Aflex feature is enabled,
Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the
"off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards other
MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL)
of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC is
the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all the
MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously locked
too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait for
some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on going
calls. After modification of the Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, the
locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen
the telecom service.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
211 / 1436
4.2.63 (LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1) (LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1
Logical Name
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1
Definition
Local primary IP address of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
212 / 1436
4.2.64 (LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) (LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition

BSC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment
The LOCAL_IURG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT values are computed

by the BSC in the range 62000-62015.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
213 / 1436
4.2.65 (LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1) (LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1
Logical Name
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1
Definition
Local primary IP address of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
214 / 1436
4.2.66 (LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) (LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Logical Name
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT
Definition

BSC side.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_ADDRESS_1 and
LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SCTP EndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
62016
External Comment
- The LOCAL_LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT value is set by the BSC
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
215 / 1436
4.2.67 (M2UA_SCTP_PORT_BSC) - (M2UA_SCTP_PORT_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
M2UA_SCTP_PORT_BSC
Logical Name
M2UA_SCTP_PORT_BSC
Definition
STCP port used for IP_BSSAsig flow (M2UA/SCTP signalisation

between BSC and TC and going to/coming from A interface), on
BSC side.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52592
52615
52592
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
216 / 1436
4.2.68 (M2UA_SCTP_PORT_TC) - (M2UA_SCTP_PORT_TC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
M2UA_SCTP_PORT_TC
Logical Name
M2UA_SCTP_PORT_TC
Definition
SCTP port used for IP_BSSAsig flow (M2UA/SCTP signalisation

between BSC and TC and going to/coming from A interface), on
TC side.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52592
52615
52592
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
217 / 1436
4.2.69 (M2UA_SCTP_SG) - (M2UA_SCTP_SG)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
M2UA_SCTP_SG
Logical Name
M2UA_SCTP_SG
Definition
Defines on which processor (also called Signalling Gateway) in

the TCIF board the IP_BSSAsig flow related to a dedicated BSC
is handled.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
TC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
218 / 1436
4.2.70 (M2UA_TC_IP_ADDRESS_SG1) - (M2UA_TC_IP_ADDRESS_SG1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
M2UA_TC_IP_ADDRESS_SG1
Logical Name
Definition
IP address of the TC on the processor SG1, used for IP_BSSAsig

flow (M2UA/SCTP signalling between BSC and TC and coming
from/going to A interface)
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
219 / 1436
4.2.71 (M2UA_TC_IP_ADDRESS_SG2) - (M2UA_TC_IP_ADDRESS_SG2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
IP address of the TC on the processor SG2, used for IP_BSSAsig

flow (M2UA/SCTP signalling between BSC and TC and coming
from/going to A interface)
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
220 / 1436
4.2.72 (MAX_PDCH) - (MAX_PDCH (MX BSC))

Management of
Enable_GPRS Flag (Cell
Parameter)
Creation of a BSC
DLS Restore When the

Flag is Not In Lline With
Max_PDCH
This flag exists in the BSC and is managed by the OMC-R but it is not visible
to the operator. It is derived by the OMC-R from the value of Max_PDCH.
When the Enable_GPRS flag is set to true, it means that the BSC can accept
MFS requests for a certain cell. In some circumstances, there can be some
inconsistencies, but these might not have any impact:
When the BSS is discovered by the OMC-R, the MFS parameters are set to
their default value by the OMC-R. Max_PDCH is set to 0. (There may be
inconsistency at system level, but no impact.) Later, if the operator installs
GPRS, he has to download the radio configuration to the MFS. Through this
operation, the flag Enable_GPRS is recomputed for the cells concerned by
the PRC, and therefore downloaded to the BSC. All data is then in line for
the cells concerned by the PRC. It can occur that some cells remain with
Enable_GPRS set to true and Max_PDCH set to 0 but this does no harm at all
(no impact on the traffic, and not visible by the operator).
Any DLS restore must be followed by the following procedure to line-up the
EN_GPRS of the cells handled by this BSC with the Max_PDCH of these
cells currently stored in the OMC-R:
1. Copy the SC into the PRC
2. Activate this PRC
Until the synchronization is achieved, the cell cannot be set into service for
GPRS by the telecom application (there is no impact if the cell is already
started for GPRS).
Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_PDCH
Logical Name
MAX_PDCH (MX BSC)
Definition
Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated

to the MFS in the cell
Coding rules
221 / 1436
Mandatory rules
Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH (MFS)

Max_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD;
If MAX_PDCH > 0 then EN_GPRS = TRUE ;
If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_GPRS = FALSE;
If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_EGPRS = FALSE;
Total number of TCHs of the cell"
If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.
The aim of this rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the
algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time
and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is
not allowed)
MAX_PDCH shall be set so that at least one slave PDCH can be
allocated to the MFS to serve DL or UL TBFs. This means that
MAX_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_GPRS = TRUE.
When Max_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended
outer", then MAX_PDCH shall be an even number.
The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check
the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:
i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1
if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:
CCCH combined"
ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2
CCCH not combined"
iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX
iv) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK=0) - 3 if
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = 2
Recommended rules
In a micro cell, the operator may be interested to force the

MS to reselect a macro cell by a correct setting of the cell
reselection parameters broadcast on PBCCH (without using NC cell
reselections, i.e. when EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR is set to 0
and NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to NC0 in the micro
cell). In this case, the following configuration is recommended:
NB_TS_MPDCH = 1, MAX_PDCH = 2, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD =
1, MIN_PDCH = 1.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
222 / 1436
External Comment

To support LCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_PDCH > 0
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
223 / 1436
4.2.73 (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) - (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MX BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
Logical Name
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MX BSC)
Definition

to the MFS when the CS traffic is high.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS)

- MAX_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
- MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH
- If EN_DTM = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
External Comment
127 is a theoretical value: 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
224 / 1436
4.2.74 (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP) - (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Logical Name
MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Definition

MSC server required to handle the traffic with that MSC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of

must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This parameter is significant when the TRAFFIC_MODE of the

MSC is load sharing mode.
- Parameter change: before any modification of the
MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, If the Aflex feature is
enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned
MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic
towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling
Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g.
that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among
all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously
locked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and
wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the
on going calls. After modification of the MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, the
locked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopen
the telecom service.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
225 / 1436
4.2.75 (MIN_PDCH) - (MIN_PDCH (MX BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_PDCH
Logical Name
MIN_PDCH (MX BSC)
Definition
Minimum number of master and slave PDCHs that are always

allocated to the MFS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Shall be equal to MIN_PDCH (MFS)

-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH;
-MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;
-MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
-When MIN_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended
outer", then MIN_PDCH shall be an even number
Recommended rules
It is recommended to set this parameter to a value smaller than the

maximum number of PDCHs that may be allocated in the cell, in
order to avoid congestion on the MFS-BSC interface.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
226 / 1436
4.2.76 (MSC_CN_ID) - (MSC_CN_ID)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSC_CN_ID
Logical Name
MSC_CN_ID
Definition
This parameter indicates, within a given PLMN, the Core Network

Identifier.
It is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS
23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for
the Aflex feature.
Coding rules
coded on 2 bytes
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MSC
identifier yet.
Mandatory rules
- All the MSCs, connected to one BSC, must have different

MSC_CN_ID.
Recommended rules
- The operator must control that, in a PLMN, 2 MSCs must have

2 different MSC_CN_ID.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4095
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled

- The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connected
to that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN.
calls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change
applied immediately on the new calls established after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
227 / 1436
4.2.77 (MSC_MCC) - (MSC_MCC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSC_MCC
Logical Name
MSC_MCC
Definition
Mobile Country Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part of

the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as
(PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex
feature.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MCC
yet.
Mandatory rules
The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MCC field of the
BSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
228 / 1436
4.2.78 (MSC_MNC) - (MSC_MNC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSC_MNC
Logical Name
MSC_MNC
Definition
Mobile Network Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part of

the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as
(PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflex
feature.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MNC
yet.
Mandatory rules
The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MNC field of the
BSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
229 / 1436
4.2.79 (MSC_SPC) - (MSC_SPC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSC_SPC
Logical Name
MSC_SPC
Definition
Signalling Point Code of a given MSC, connected to the BSC.
Coding rules
coded over 14 bits
Mandatory rules
All the MSCs connected to one BSC must have different MSC_SPC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to TRUE

- "A signalling over IP" function is available on BSC Evolution only.
- Parameter change: Before any modification of the MSC_SPC, If the
Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set
the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect
the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock
all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some
circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie
in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the
BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the
BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic
Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification
of the MSC_SPC, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "on
loaded" again to reopen the telecom service.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
230 / 1436
4.2.80 (MSC_WEIGHT) - (MSC_WEIGHT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSC_WEIGHT
Logical Name
MSC_WEIGHT
Definition
Weight assigned to a MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature), for

the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to a
high capacity MSC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to set a weight value consistent with the number

of A-trunks connected to that MSC.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
231 / 1436
4.2.81 (MUXTRAUP_SIZE) - (MUXTRAUP_SIZE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MUXTRAUP_SIZE
Logical Name
MUXTRAUP_SIZE
Definition
Threshold used to trigger the sending of a MUXTRAUP packet. It is

the minimum size above which a MUXTRAUP packet is sent. The
size includes IP header, UDP header, COM-H field and payload.
A MUXTRAUP packet may be sent either its size is above the size
threshold or the timer
T_MAX_HOLD_MUXTRAUP has expired
Coding rules
Step size = 100 bytes.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The operator must ensure that the MTU in its network is greater than
MUXTRAUP_SIZE + 80. If it is not the case, IPTCH does not work.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
100
1500
500
External Comment
The value results on a compromise between BW efficiency and jitter.

500 is the highest value with which it works properly under extreme
conditions....... (heavy load, BTS chains etc.)
Change apply immediately and to all established calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
232 / 1436
4.2.82 (NRI_LENGTH) - (NRI_LENGTH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NRI_LENGTH
Logical Name
NRI_LENGTH
Definition
This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (Network

Resource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is used
by the BSC to derive the NRI value from the received temporary
identity TMSI, and to identify the serving MSC, connected to the BSC
(Aflex feature). The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most
significant bit of the NRI) of the TMSI, regardless of the NRI length.
Coding rules

dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any length
value yet.
Mandatory rules
- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1

- NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1
Recommended rules
- The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH is

configured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area.
- A larger length allows to define/connect more MSCs per CS pool
area, but reduce the number of available TMSI for a given time
period, since the NRI is part of the TMSI.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
None
External Comment

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls
are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
233 / 1436
4.2.83 (NRI_LENGTH_PS) - (NRI_LENGTH_PS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NRI_LENGTH_PS
Logical Name
NRI_LENGTH_PS
Definition
This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (Network

Resource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is used
by the MFS to derive the NRI value from the received TLLI, and to
identify the serving SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature).
The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most significant bit of
the NRI) of the TLLI, regardless of the NRI length.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1

- NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1
Recommended rules
The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH_PS is

configured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
None
External Comment
Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled.

Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic
is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
234 / 1436
4.2.84 (NRI_LIST) - (NRI_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NRI_LIST
Logical Name
NRI_LIST
Definition
List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given MSC,

connected to the BSC (Aflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be defined
per MSC.
The NRI is part of the temporary identity TMSI, which is assigned by
the serving MSC to the MS. The BSC derives the NRI from any Initial
layer 3 message, in order to identify the serving MSC.
Coding rules
Coded on 2 bytes
The empty list (length = 0) value 1024 is for implementation purpose
only; this dummy list indicates that the operator does not provide
any NRI yet.
Mandatory rules
- 2 different MSCs, connected to the BSC, must have 2 different

NRI_LIST.
- A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST of all the MSCs
connected to the BSC (and especially when the BSC is in the
overlapping zone of 2 CS pool areas).
- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1
- The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCs
connected to the BSC
- When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, the NRI_LIST must contain at least
one NRI
Recommended rules
- The operator must control that one NRI shall be unique among all
the NRI_LIST of all the MSCs, which serve in parallel a given CS
pool area.
- When several BSCs, belonging to the same CS pool area, are
connected to the same MSC, the operator must control that the
NRI_LIST of that MSC is configured with the same value in each
BSC of the CS pool area.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1023
None
External Comment

235 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
236 / 1436
4.2.85 (NRI_LIST_PS) - (NRI_LIST_PS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NRI_LIST_PS
Logical Name
NRI_LIST_PS
Definition
List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given

SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be
defined per SGSN (and at least one).
The NRI is part of the temporary identity P-TMSI, which is assigned
by the serving SGSN to the MS. The MFS derives the NRI from the
TLLI received from the MS, in order to identify the serving SGSN.
Coding rules
coded on 2 bytes
The value 1024 is only defined for implementation purpose (it is not
a valid value).
Mandatory rules
- In a BSS, 2 different SGSNs must have 2 different NRI_LIST_PS.

- A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST_PS of all the NSEs
of one GP /GPU.
- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1
- For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in any
NRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS.
Recommended rules
- For all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, the NSEs
connected to one SGSN must all have the same NRI_LIST_PS, in
order for a MS to be served by that dedicated SGSN inside the whole
pool area (area belonging or not to the same MFS)
- In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour
of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to one SGSN, must
have the same NRI_LIST_PS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1024
None
External Comment
Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
237 / 1436
4.2.86 (NRT_GUARANTEED_BANDWIDTH_FACTOR) (NRT_GUARANTEED_BANDWIDTH_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NRT_GUARANTEED_BANDWIDTH_FACTOR
Logical Name
NRT_GUARANTEED_BANDWIDTH_FACTOR
Definition
Percentage of "reserved PS bandwidth" (Abis bandwidth) which is

not considered as usable for GBR PS traffic by the MFS.
This parameter enables to guarantee, in each Abis BTS group
supported by the BSC:
- a minimum bandwidth for Best Effort PS traffic,
- the necessary bandwidth for PS related control traffic (PMU-PTU
and IPGCH control traffic),
- the necessary bandwidth for the transmission of all the
IP/UDP/IPGCH headers (for Best Effort + GBR PS traffic), provided
the "reserved PS bandwidth" is not null (or very low) for the Abis
BTS group.
Coding rules
Step size = 1%.
Mandatory rules

NRT_GUARANTEED_BANDWIDTH_FACTOR shall take the same
value for both Abis
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
A-bis link
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
10
100
20
External Comment
Depending on the IPGCHU segment size, the necessary bandwidth

for the transmission of all the IP/UDP/IPGCH headers (for Best Effort
+ GBR PS traffic) may not be negligible. Example: IP header (20
bytes) + UDP header (8 bytes) + IPGCH header (a few bytes) will
represent around 10% of the total Abis bandwidth consumption if the
IPGCHU segment size is 300 bytes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
238 / 1436
4.2.87 (NULL_NRI) - (NULL_NRI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NULL_NRI
Logical Name
NULL_NRI
Definition
Upon reception of a message with that dummy/reserved NRI

included, the BSC uses the load balancing algorithm for selecting
one MSC, among the "on loaded" MSC connected to the BSC (Aflex
feature), and for re-routing the received message to that MSC.
Coding rules
coded on 2 bytes
dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any null
NRI yet.
Mandatory rules
- NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1

- The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCs
connected to the BSC.
Recommended rules
The operator must control that the NULL_NRI is common inside all
the BSSs of one PLMN.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1023
None
External Comment

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going calls
are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Change
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
239 / 1436
4.2.88 (NULL_NRI_PS) - (NULL_NRI_PS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NULL_NRI_PS
Logical Name
NULL_NRI_PS
Definition
In UL cases, upon TLLI reception with that dummy/reserved NRI

included, while a SGSN is not already selected for a mobile, the MFS
uses the load balancing algorithm for selecting one SGSN among
the "on loaded" SGSN connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature).
Coding rules
coded on 2 bytes
Mandatory rules
- NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1

- For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in any
NRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS.
Recommended rules
The operator must control that the NULL_NRI_PS is common inside

all the BSSs of one PLMN
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1023
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
240 / 1436
4.2.89 (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Peer_NSE_Data_Weight
Logical Name
Peer_NSE_Data_Weight
Definition
Indicates the data weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of static
configuration of the Gb over IP interface.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
SGSN-IPEndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
10
External Comment
Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.

If Peer_NSE_Data_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not be
selected as a data endpoint by the load sharing function.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
241 / 1436
4.2.90 (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight
Logical Name
Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight
Definition
Indicates the signalling weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of

static configuration of the Gb over IP interface.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
SGSN-IPEndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
10
External Comment
Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.

If Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not be
selected as a signalling endpoint.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
242 / 1436
4.2.91 (Port_Number) - (SGSN_UDP_Port)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Port_Number
Logical Name
SGSN_UDP_Port
Definition
UDP port number of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static

configuration of Gb over IP interface.
UDP port number of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in
case of dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port)

must be unique per NSE.
- in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can be
defined per NSE.
- In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configured
SGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
SGSN-IPEndPoint
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1024
65535
49152
External Comment
Following IANA.org: "Registered Ports" are in the range 1024-49151

and "Dynamic and/or Private Ports" are those from 49152 through
65535 (ALU BSS ports are taken in the private range, however SGSN
ports taken in the registered ports are accepted by the ALU BSS).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
243 / 1436
4.2.92 (RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP) - (RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Logical Name
RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Definition

RNC server required to handle the signalling traffic with that RNC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
When the RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of

must be equal or greater than RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RNC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This parameter is significant when the RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE of

the RNC is load sharing mode.
all the Iur-g Signalling Links of the modified RNC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
244 / 1436
4.2.93 (RNC_SPC) - (RNC_SPC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RNC_SPC
Logical Name
RNC_SPC
Definition
Signalling Point Code of a given RNC, connected to the BSC.
Coding rules
coded over 14 bits
Mandatory rules
All the RNCs connected to one BSC must have different RNC_SPC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RNC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_IURG is set to TRUE

- "Iur-g+ interface" is available on BSC Evolution only.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
245 / 1436
4.2.94 (RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE) - (RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE
Logical Name
RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE
Definition
Traffic mode of the M3UA signalling link set with the RNC.
Coding rules
0: load sharing mode (ie the traffic is distributed over all the active
IPSPs)
1 :override mode (ie only one of the IPSPs handle the traffic)
2: broadcast mode (ie all the active IPSPs receive the same
messages)
Mandatory rules
- The value "broadcast mode" is not allowed.

- When the RNC_TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of
must be equal or greater than RNC_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RNC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is

for implementation purposes.
- The broadcast mode is not supported by the BSS on the Iur-g
interface.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
246 / 1436
4.2.95 (RSL_UDP_PORT_BSC) - (RSL_UDP_PORT_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RSL_UDP_PORT_BSC
Logical Name
RSL_UDP_PORT_BSC
Definition
UDP port number used for RSL on BSC side.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
RSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52992
53247
52992
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
247 / 1436
4.2.96 (RSL_UDP_PORT_TRE) - (RSL_UDP_PORT_TRE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RSL_UDP_PORT_TRE
Logical Name
RSL_UDP_PORT_TRE
Definition
UDP port number of one TRE (HW module), used for RSL on BTS
side.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BTS
Instance
RSL
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
52992
53247
52992
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
248 / 1436
4.2.97 (SGSN_ID) - (CN_ID_PS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SGSN_ID
Logical Name
CN_ID_PS
Definition
This parameter uniquely identifies one SGSN inside one BSS for the
Gbflex feature.
For that, the operator has the possibility to use the Core Network
Identifier, which is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined
in 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id). But in such case, the
same identifier can identify 2 different SGSN, belonging to 2 different
PLMN.
Coding rules
coded on 2 bytes
Mandatory rules
- All the NSEs of one GP/GPU must have different CN_ID_PS.
Recommended rules
- The operator must control that, in a BSS, 2 SGSNs must have 2

different CN_ID_PS.
- For a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour
of the Gbflex feature, the operator must connect all the GP/GPU(s) to
the same SGSN(s) and define the same CN_ID_PS on all the NSEs,
connected to one SGSN.
- It is highly recommended to extend that rule (same CN_ID_PS value
for all the NSEs connected to one SGSN) in all the BSSs managed
by the MFS; and even more, in the whole managed network.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled

- The default value depends on the configuration. The value given
here is for implementation purposes only.
- The operator must control that the BSS and all the SGSNs
connected to that BSS via Gbflex feature must belong to the same
PLMN.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
249 / 1436
4.2.98 (SGSN_WEIGHT) - (SGSN_WEIGHT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SGSN_WEIGHT
Logical Name
SGSN_WEIGHT
Definition
Weight assigned to a SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature),

for the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to
a high capacity SGSN, because it will be chosen more often than a
SGSN with a lower weight (e.g. a SGSN with weight = 10 will be
chosen twice as often as a SGSN with weight = 5).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviour

of the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN,
must have the same SGSN_WEIGHT. Same rule is to be extended
to all the NSEs of all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, and
connected to the same SGSN.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
250 / 1436
4.2.99 (SGW_INTERWORKING_LB) - (SGW_INTERWORKING_LB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SGW_INTERWORKING_LB
Logical Name
SGW_INTERWORKING_LB
Definition
To configure the M3UA protocol, used on Lb interface towards the

SMLC: either a Signalling GateWay is used to address SMLC over
TDM, or no gateway is needed (for SMLC over IP)
Coding rules
0: no SGW is used (M3UA works in IPSP mode)

1: a SGW is used (M3UA works in MGC mode)
Mandatory rules
can be switched to 0 or 1, only while EN_LB is disabled
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

all the Lb Signalling Link(s) (LBSL) of the associated SMLC. After
modification, unlock the objects and reopen the Location service
for CS domain.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
251 / 1436
4.2.100 (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR) - (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR
Logical Name
SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR
Definition
Number of times one SGSN is used, once selected by the Node

Selection Function.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
There is no advantage to define different values for the BSSs of the

MFS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
10
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
252 / 1436
4.2.101 (SMLC_SPC) - (SMLC_SPC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMLC_SPC
Logical Name
SMLC_SPC
Definition
Signalling Point Code of the SMLC connected to the BSC.
Coding rules
coded over 14 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
External Comment
- Significant only if EN_LB is set to TRUE

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
253 / 1436
4.2.102 (SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE) - (SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE
Logical Name
SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE
Definition
Traffic mode of the M3UA signalling link set with the SMLC.
Coding rules
IPSPs)
messages)
Mandatory rules

- When the SMLC_TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number
of SCTP endpoints configured in the LB_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST
must be equal or greater than LB_MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
SMLC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- The broadcast mode is not supported by the BSS on the Lb
interface.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
254 / 1436
4.2.103 (Start Asig IP Address) - (START_ASIG_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Start Asig IP Address
Logical Name
START_ASIG_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Definition
First IP address for the range of telecom addresses shown to the

external world for the feature "A signalling over IP". The BSC
deduces every telecom address of its associated endpoints (OMCP)
from this base address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment
Parameter change: when this parameter is changed from the BSC

operator terminal, the BSC resets autonomously.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
255 / 1436
4.2.104 (Start Bss IP Address) - (START_BSS_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Start Bss IP Address
Logical Name
START_BSS_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Definition

external world for the feature "Ip transport in the BSS". The BSC
deduces every telecom address of its associated endpoints (OMCP,
TPGSM and CCP) from this base address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

operator terminal, the BSC resets autonomously and the MFS resets
automatically of all the GPs connected to this BSS (PS traffic is
interrupted in the BSS).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
256 / 1436
4.2.105 (START_ADD_FUNC_IP_ADDRESS_BSC) (START_IURG_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
START_ADD_FUNC_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Logical Name
START_IURG_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Definition

external world for the feature "support of the Iur-g+ interface". The
BSC deduces every telecom address of its associated endpoints
(OMCP) from this base address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
257 / 1436
4.2.106 (START_ADD_FUNC_IP_ADDRESS_BSC) (START_LB_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
START_ADD_FUNC_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Logical Name
START_LB_IP_ADDRESS_BSC
Definition

external world for the feature "support of the Lb interface". The BSC
deduces every telecom address of its associated endpoints (OMCP)
from this base address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
None
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
258 / 1436
4.2.107 (TC_TRAUP_IP_Address) - (TC_TRAUP_IP_Address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TC_TRAUP_IP_Address
Logical Name
TC_TRAUP_IP_Address
Definition
IP address of the TC, used for IPTCH flow (MUXTRAUP) and for
TC-TC flow (eTRAUP).
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
259 / 1436
4.2.108 (TCH_TS_ACTIVITY_FACTOR) - (TCH_TS_ACTIVITY_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TCH_TS_ACTIVITY_FACTOR
Logical Name
TCH_TS_ACTIVITY_FACTOR
Definition
Maximum percentage of RTSs supporting some TCH(s) at the same

time (one FR TCH or two HR TCHs), among all the RTSs configured
as TCH or configured as dynamic SDCCH.
The RTSs supporting only one HR TCH are counted as half a RTS.
Allows to perform a "radio over-dimensioning" in case < 100%.
Coding rules
Step size = 1%
Mandatory rules

TCH_TS_ACTIVITY_FACTOR shall take the same value for both
Abis.
Recommended rules
Shall be set to a value high enough to ensure that CS traffic

will (nearly) never be limited because of this constraint. The
ABIS_BANDWIDTH shall be dimensioned in proportion.
In addition, if GPRS is activated in some cells of the Abis BTS group,
it is highly recommended to avoid configurations where the "reserved
PS bandwidth" is very low or null. This can indeed imply risks of PS
traffic blocking situation in the Abis BTS group due to lack of Abis
bandwidth, or risks of PMU-PTU interface traffic congestion, or risks
of IPGCH control traffic congestion.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
Abis segment
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
10
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
260 / 1436
4.2.109 (TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_TC) (TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_TC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_TC
Logical Name
TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_TC
Definition
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of TC addresses

used for
telecom protocols
Coding rules
coded on 32 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
IP address
SubSystem
TC
Instance
TC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4294967295
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
261 / 1436
4.2.110 (TRAFFIC_MODE) - (TRAFFIC_MODE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TRAFFIC_MODE
Logical Name
TRAFFIC_MODE
Definition
Traffic mode of the MSC server.
Coding rules
IPSPs)
messages)
Mandatory rules

- When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number of
must be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
MSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- The broadcast mode is not supported by the BSS.
- Parameter change: Before any modification of the TRAFFIC_MODE,
If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly
set the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect
the new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock
all the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some
circumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie
in IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), the
BSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads the
BSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic
Clear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification of
the TRAFFIC_MODE, the locked objects must be unlocked and be
"on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
262 / 1436
4.2.111 (TRAU_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT) (TRAU_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TRAU_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT
Logical Name
TRAU_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT
Definition
Waiting time to detect loss of synchronisation between BTS and TC

in case of IP transport.
Coding rules
Step size = 1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
263 / 1436
264 / 1436
5 GSM Telecom Parameters
265 / 1436
5.1 Network (CDE)

5.1.1 (ADDR_MON) - (ADDR_MON)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
ADDR_MON
Logical Name
ADDR_MON
Definition
Time it takes to ADDR_TR to be reached to report an alarm. On

timeout, the address error counter is reset.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
266 / 1436
5.1.2 (ADDR_TR) - (ADDR_TR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ADDR_TR
Logical Name
ADDR_TR
Definition
Address error threshold for alarm detection.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
267 / 1436
5.1.3 (Autocleaning_Timer) - (T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Autocleaning_Timer
Logical Name
T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP
Definition
Guard time for detection of SDCCH/TCH autocleaning procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that

T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30
seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.
- Alcatel-Lucent recommends to configure the present BSS
guard timer strictly greater than Max(RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS,
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR) x 0.480 sec of any cells of the
BSS in order to let the radio link failure defence mechanism ended
before internal cleanup.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
255
40
External Comment
T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP = 0 inhibits the autocleaning

procedure.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
268 / 1436
5.1.4 (BF_HI_RX) - (BF_HI_RX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BF_HI_RX
Logical Name
BF_HI_RX
Definition
Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from normal

to busy condition.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
BF_HI_RX > BF_LO_RX
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
80
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
269 / 1436
5.1.5 (BF_HI_TX) - (BF_HI_TX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BF_HI_TX
Logical Name
BF_HI_TX
Definition
Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from normal

to busy condition.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
BF_HI_TX > BF_LO_TX
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
30
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
270 / 1436
5.1.6 (BF_LO_RX) - (BF_LO_RX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BF_LO_RX
Logical Name
BF_LO_RX
Definition
Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from busy

to normal condition.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
BF_LO_RX < BF_HI_RX
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
70
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
271 / 1436
5.1.7 (BF_LO_TX) - (BF_LO_TX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BF_LO_TX
Logical Name
BF_LO_TX
Definition
Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from busy

to normal condition.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
BF_LO_TX < BF_HI_TX
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
272 / 1436
5.1.8 (CGI_REQUIRED) - (CGI_REQD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CGI_REQUIRED
Logical Name
CGI_REQD
Definition
Controls format of cell identifications sent to the MSC.
Coding rules
0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Alcatel recommend to set the CGI_REQD parameter to 1 provided

that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_REQD parameter
shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2G
to 2G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is
recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any
additional Telecom outage.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for

implementation purposes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
273 / 1436
5.1.9 (COUNT_DECR) - (COUNT_DECR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
COUNT_DECR
Logical Name
COUNT_DECR
Definition
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction
to TCU overload is decremented upon T_COUNT_I expiry.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
274 / 1436
5.1.10 (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD) - (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
COUNT_I_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
COUNT_I_THRESHOLD
Definition
Leaky bucket counter threshold used to trigger defense actions upon

TCU overload.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
50
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
275 / 1436
5.1.11 (COUNT_INCR_1) - (COUNT_INCR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
COUNT_INCR_1
Logical Name
COUNT_INCR_1
Definition
to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 1.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
COUNT_INCR_1 <= COUNT_INCR_2
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
276 / 1436
5.1.12 (COUNT_INCR_2) - (COUNT_INCR_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
COUNT_INCR_2
Logical Name
COUNT_INCR_2
Definition
to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 2.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
COUNT_INCR_2 >= COUNT_INCR_1
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
277 / 1436
5.1.13 (CRC_MON) - (CRC_MON)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CRC_MON
Logical Name
CRC_MON
Definition
Time in which CRC_TR is to be reached to report an alarm. On

timeout, the CRC error counter is reset.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
278 / 1436
5.1.14 (CRC_TR) - (CRC_TR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CRC_TR
Logical Name
CRC_TR
Definition
CRC error threshold for alarm detection.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
279 / 1436
5.1.15 (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY) (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Logical Name
EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Definition
Defines if the G1 non-capable MS is supported or not in the network
Coding rules
0: G1 non-capable MS-s are only supported in the cells where the

BCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on
PGSM band or on DCS1800 band).
1: G1 non-capable MS-s are not supported in any cell that contains
at least one G1 TRX of the network (Note these MS-s are still
supported in other cells).
Mandatory rules
When EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY is set to "0", if the BCCH is

not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSM
band or on DCS1800 band), then:
1) the OMC-R does not allow the operator to define the CCCH,
SDCCH and CBCH on a G1 TRX.
2) TRX_PREF_MARK must be <> 0 for a hopping G1 TRX.
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
280 / 1436
5.1.16 (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF) - (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF
Logical Name
EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF
Definition
When set, this flag allows, when bugged MS asking for a "dual rate,
half-rate preferred", to allocate a full rate channel.
Coding rules
0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
281 / 1436
5.1.17 (I_TX_LAPD) - (I_TX_LAPD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
I_TX_LAPD
Logical Name
I_TX_LAPD
Definition
Maximum LAPD transmission queue length.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
204
105
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
282 / 1436
5.1.18 (LB_DECR) - (LB_DECR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LB_DECR
Logical Name
LB_DECR
Definition
Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is

decremented on T_LB_OV expiry.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
283 / 1436
5.1.19 (LB_INCR) - (LB_INCR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LB_INCR
Logical Name
LB_INCR
Definition
Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is

incremented each time an OVERLOAD is received from the FU.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
284 / 1436
5.1.20 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]
Logical Name
Definition
Percentage of MEASUREMENT RESULT messages discarded by

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
285 / 1436
5.1.21 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [10]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i

[10])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
286 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
287 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
288 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
289 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
290 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
291 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
292 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
293 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

the TCU at step I.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
294 / 1436
5.1.30 (NBLK) - (NBLK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NBLK
Logical Name
NBLK
Definition
Maximum number of BLOCK messages that can be sent if the ACK

from the MSC is not received.
Coding rules
255: infinite transmission
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
295 / 1436
5.1.31 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Logical Name
NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Definition
Number of steps needed to reduce the load upon TCU overload

level 1.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 <= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
296 / 1436
5.1.32 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Logical Name
NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Definition
Number of steps to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 2.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 >= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
297 / 1436
5.1.33 (NUBLK) - (NUBLK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NUBLK
Logical Name
NUBLK
Definition
Maximum number of UNBLOCK messages that are sent if the ACK

from the MSC is not received.
Coding rules
255: infinite transmission
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
298 / 1436
5.1.34 (PROT_MON) - (PROT_MON)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PROT_MON
Logical Name
PROT_MON
Definition
Time in which PROT_TH is to be reached to report an alarm. On

timeout, the protocol error counter is reset.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
299 / 1436
5.1.35 (PROT_TH) - (PROT_TH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PROT_TH
Logical Name
PROT_TH
Definition
Protocol error threshold for alarm detection.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
300 / 1436
5.1.36 (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB) - (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB
Logical Name
RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB
Definition
Maximum number of measured neighbour frequencies, reported by

the BTS to the BSC in the Radio Measurements. The actual number,
reported by a TRE, depends on its generation. One frequency,
identified by one (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couple, is reported into
one CI vector.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Configuring a multiple of 14 as value allows optimizing the

block usage in the RMS measurements returned to OMC in the
performance counters.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
42
154
84
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.

- Significant only if EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC is enabled.
- A G3 TRE supports up to 84 (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couples;
others up to 154 couples.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
301 / 1436
5.1.37 (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD) - (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD
Logical Name
SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD
Definition
Period used to average the processor occupancy measurements.
Coding rules
8 bits, step size=1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
16
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
302 / 1436
5.1.38 (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY) - (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY
Logical Name
SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY
Definition
Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load

is high.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
303 / 1436
5.1.39 (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY) - (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SDCCH_LOW_DELAY
Logical Name
SDCCH_LOW_DELAY
Definition
Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load is

low.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
304 / 1436
5.1.40 (SMS_INHIBIT) - (SMS_INHIBIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMS_INHIBIT
Logical Name
SMS_INHIBIT
Definition
This flag enables/disables SMS support.
Coding rules
0: SMS permitted, 1: SMS inhibited
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
305 / 1436
5.1.41 (SSF) - (SSF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SSF
Logical Name
SSF
Definition
This parameter inditifies the numbering plan of the Signalling Point

Code.
Coding rules
coded over 4 bits.only values 0, 4, 8 and 12 are defined : Value =

0, international network; Value = 4, Spare, reserved for international
use; Value = 8, National network; Value = 12 , Reserved for national
use
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
12
12
External Comment
SSF (Sub-Service Field) is composed of 4 bits: 2bits for Network

Indicator and 2 spare bits.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
306 / 1436
5.1.42 (T_BTS_EST_CNF) - (T_BTS_EST_CNF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_BTS_EST_CNF
Logical Name
T_BTS_EST_CNF
Definition
Supervision of the SAPI 3 Establishment procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
307 / 1436
5.1.43 (T_BTS_RLS_CNF) - (T_BTS_RLS_CNF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_BTS_RLS_CNF
Logical Name
T_BTS_RLS_CNF
Definition
Supervision of the SAPI 3 Release procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
308 / 1436
5.1.44 (T_CBC_READY) - (T_CBC_READY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_CBC_READY
Logical Name
T_CBC_READY
Definition
Defines the maximum period during which the BSC tries to connect
to the CBC before issueing an alarm or returning CMD-MODE Resp.
Coding rules
step size: 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_CBC_READY > 8 * T_CONNECT
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
600
300
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
309 / 1436
5.1.45 (T_COUNT_I) - (T_COUNT_I)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_COUNT_I
Logical Name
T_COUNT_I
Definition
Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to

TCU overload.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
50
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
310 / 1436
5.1.46 (T_i) - (T_i)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_i
Logical Name
T_i
Definition
Duration of SSP or SPI condition that triggers an Internal Reset

procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
22
External Comment
Some "slow" MSC (e.g. legacy MSC) may take more than one minute
to reply the BSC request (e.g. the SST message sent by the BSC).
If the BSC is connected to such kind of "slow" MSC, increasing the
T_i value up to 120 seconds may be necessary. Otherwise after T_i
expiry, the BSC triggers an unexpected Internal Reset procedure.
This leads to telecom outage for several minutes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
311 / 1436
5.1.47 (T_LB_OV) - (T_LB_OV)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_LB_OV
Logical Name
T_LB_OV
Definition
Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction

to FU overload.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
25.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
312 / 1436
5.1.48 (T_OVL_MSC) - (T_OVL_MSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_OVL_MSC
Logical Name
T_OVL_MSC
Definition
Minimum delay between two consecutive OVERLOAD messages

sent to the MSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
6553.5
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
313 / 1436
5.1.49 (T_RCR_ACK) - (T_RCR_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RCR_ACK
Logical Name
T_RCR_ACK
Definition
Supervision of the RF Channel Release procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
314 / 1436
5.1.50 (T_SMSCB_RESP) - (T_SMSCB_RESP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_SMSCB_RESP
Logical Name
T_SMSCB_RESP
Definition
Maximum waiting time to get a response from the BTS to a primitive.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
315 / 1436
5.1.51 (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL) - (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL
Logical Name
T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL
Definition
This timer defines the time that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC
Shared DTM Information Indication message indicating that the TCH
resource allocated to a DTM capable MS is being released at the
BSC side, the MFS shall wait before releasing the TCH resource
in its turn.
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
5000
1000
External Comment
The value "0" indicates that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC

Shared DTM Information Indication message, the MFS shall release
immediately the related TCH resource.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
316 / 1436
5.1.52 (T1_0858) - (T1_0858)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T1_0858
Logical Name
T1_0858
Definition
Delay during which, after reception of an OVERLOAD from the BTS,

a new OVERLOAD is ignored.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T1_0858 < T2_0858
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
317 / 1436
5.1.53 (T2_0858) - (T2_0858)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T2_0858
Logical Name
T2_0858
Definition
Minimum delay between debarring of an access class, in the case

where the BTS stops sending OVERLOAD.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T2_0858 > T1_0858
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
318 / 1436
5.1.54 (T9101) - (T9101)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9101
Logical Name
T9101
Definition
Supervision of the SCCP connection release procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
319 / 1436
5.1.55 (T9103) - (T9103)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9103
Logical Name
T9103
Definition
Supervision of the Channel Activation procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
320 / 1436
5.1.56 (T9108) - (T9108)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9108
Logical Name
T9108
Definition
Supervision of the Physical Context procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
321 / 1436
5.1.57 (T9110) - (T9110)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9110
Logical Name
T9110
Definition
Guards the response of the MSC when no resources are

allocated to the SCCP connection (started on the reception
of CONN_IND(SCCP_CON_REQ) not carrying a HANDOVER
REQUEST message and stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST
message is received on the same SCCP connection as the
SCCP_CON_REQ message). Guards also the response of the MSC
when a HANDOVER FAILURE or ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message
has been sent (stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST or CLEAR
COMMAND message is received).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T9110 << max [T(ias), T(iar)].
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
322 / 1436
5.1.58 (TCH_INFO_PERIOD) - (TCH_INFO_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Logical Name
TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Definition
Periodicity of TCH usage information update in the BSC.
Coding rules
stepsize = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
323 / 1436
5.1.59 (THR_LB_OV) - (THR_LB_OV)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_LB_OV
Logical Name
THR_LB_OV
Definition
Counter threshold for triggering global defence actions in the BSC

upon FU overload.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
50
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
324 / 1436
5.1.60 (THRESHOLD_1_0) - (THRESHOLD_1_0)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_0
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_0
Definition
Free buffer thresholds separating "no overload" condition and

"overload level 1" condition when pointer P points at position 0.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
THRESHOLD_1_0 >= THRESHOLD_2_0
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
25
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
325 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_1
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_1
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
28
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
326 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_10
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_10
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
55
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
327 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_2
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_2
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
328 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_3
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_3
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
34
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
329 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_4
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_4
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
37
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
330 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_5
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_5
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
331 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_6
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_6
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
43
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
332 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_7
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_7
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
46
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
333 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_8
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_8
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
49
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
334 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_1_9
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_1_9
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
52
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
335 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_0
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_0
Definition
Free buffer thresholds separating "overload level 1" condition and

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
THRESHOLD_2_0 <= THRESHOLD_1_0
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
22
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
336 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_1
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_1
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
25
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
337 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_10
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_10
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
52
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
338 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_2
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_2
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
28
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
339 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_3
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_3
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
340 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_4
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_4
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
34
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
341 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_5
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_5
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
37
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
342 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_6
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_6
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
343 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_7
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_7
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
43
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
344 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_8
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_8
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
46
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
345 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESHOLD_2_9
Logical Name
THRESHOLD_2_9
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
49
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
346 / 1436
5.1.82 (TL_TCUA) - (TL_TCUA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TL_TCUA
Logical Name
TL_TCUA
Definition
Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load increaseby the

local overload controller.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
TL_TCUA >TS_TCUA
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
50
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
347 / 1436
5.1.83 (TL0) - (TL0)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TL0
Logical Name
TL0
Definition
Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Low

Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equal
to TL0 and less than TL3." The TCU is in "No Overload" state if its
Processor Occupancy Level is less than TL0.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
TL0 < TL3 < TL4
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
348 / 1436
5.1.84 (TL1) - (TL1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TL1
Logical Name
TL1
Definition
BSC processor occupancy threshold used to decrement pointer P

on buffer occupancy thresholds.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
TL1 < TL2
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
70
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
349 / 1436
5.1.85 (TL2) - (TL2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TL2
Logical Name
TL2
Definition
BSC processor occupancy threshold used to increment pointer P

on buffer occupancy thresholds.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
TL3 > TL4
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
85
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
350 / 1436
5.1.86 (TL3) - (TL3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TL3
Logical Name
TL3
Definition
Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level:

1) In upward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "High Overload"
state if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";
2) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is still in "Very High
Overload" State if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";
3) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "Low
Overload" state if "TL0 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL3.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
T0 < TL3 < TL4
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
75
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
351 / 1436
5.1.87 (TL4) - (TL4)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TL4
Logical Name
TL4
Definition
Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Very

High Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or
equal to TL4.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
TL4 > TL3 > TL0
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
95
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
352 / 1436
5.1.88 (TRG_SDCCH) - (TRG_SDCCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TRG_SDCCH
Logical Name
TRG_SDCCH
Definition
Controls if local overload controller is triggered upon SDCCH

overload.
Coding rules
1 for TCU, 0 for others
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC proc
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter is set by default to 1 for TCUs. It shall be set to 0

for other BSC processors
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
353 / 1436
5.1.89 (TS_TCUA) - (TS_TCUA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TS_TCUA
Logical Name
TS_TCUA
Definition
Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load reduction by the

local overload controller.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
TS_TCUA < TL_TCUA
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
50
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
354 / 1436
5.2 Site (CAE)

5.2.1 (A_LEV_HO) - (A_LEV_HO)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_LEV_HO
Logical Name
A_LEV_HO
Definition
Window size for level averages for handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32
Recommended rules
A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC. A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
Umbrella
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
Minicell
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
355 / 1436
5.2.2 (A_LEV_MCHO) - (A_LEV_MCHO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_LEV_MCHO
Logical Name
A_LEV_MCHO
Definition
Window size for level averages for microcell handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
356 / 1436
No
5.2.3 (A_LEV_PC) - (A_LEV_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_LEV_PC
Logical Name
A_LEV_PC
Definition
Window size for level averages for power control.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32
Recommended rules
A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
357 / 1436
5.2.4 (A_PBGT_DR) - (A_PBGT_DR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_PBGT_DR
Logical Name
A_PBGT_DR
Definition
Window size for neighbour cell level averages for forced directed retry.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
358 / 1436
5.2.5 (A_PBGT_HO) - (A_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_PBGT_HO
Logical Name
A_PBGT_HO
Definition
Window size for averaging neighbour cell levels and averaging

current cell levels for power budget calculation.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32
Recommended rules
A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
16
External Comment
should be set to 6 in suburban area, to 8 in urban area and to 12

in rural area
Cell Type Dependent
Single
12
Umbrella
12
Concentric
12
Concentric Umbrella
12
Microcell
Minicell
12
Extended inner cell
12
Extended outer cell
12
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
359 / 1436
5.2.6 (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR) - (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
Logical Name
A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
Definition
Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB FR-to-HR channel

adaptation (handover Cause 27).
Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
61
61
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
360 / 1436
5.2.7 (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR) - (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Logical Name
A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Definition
Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel

adaptation.
Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
61
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
361 / 1436
5.2.8 (A_QUAL_HO) - (A_QUAL_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_QUAL_HO
Logical Name
A_QUAL_HO
Definition
Window size for quality averages for handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32
Recommended rules
A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
Umbrella
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
Minicell
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
362 / 1436
No
5.2.9 (A_QUAL_PC) - (A_QUAL_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_QUAL_PC
Logical Name
A_QUAL_PC
Definition
Window size for quality averages for power control.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32
Recommended rules
A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
363 / 1436
5.2.10 (A_RANGE_HO) - (A_RANGE_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_RANGE_HO
Logical Name
A_RANGE_HO
Definition
Window size for distance averages.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
364 / 1436
5.2.11 (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition
Window size for load averages.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
365 / 1436
5.2.12 (AC 0) - (AC_0)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 0
Logical Name
AC_0
Definition
Indicates if Access Class 0 is barred.
Coding rules
0: not barred, 1: barred
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
366 / 1436
5.2.13 (AC 1) - (AC_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 1
Logical Name
AC_1
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
367 / 1436
5.2.14 (AC 11) - (AC_11)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 11
Logical Name
AC_11
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
368 / 1436
5.2.15 (AC 12) - (AC_12)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 12
Logical Name
AC_12
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
369 / 1436
5.2.16 (AC 13) - (AC_13)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 13
Logical Name
AC_13
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
370 / 1436
5.2.17 (AC 14) - (AC_14)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 14
Logical Name
AC_14
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
371 / 1436
5.2.18 (AC 15) - (AC_15)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 15
Logical Name
AC_15
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
372 / 1436
5.2.19 (AC 2) - (AC_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 2
Logical Name
AC_2
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
373 / 1436
5.2.20 (AC 3) - (AC_3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 3
Logical Name
AC_3
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
374 / 1436
5.2.21 (AC 4) - (AC_4)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 4
Logical Name
AC_4
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
375 / 1436
5.2.22 (AC 5) - (AC_5)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 5
Logical Name
AC_5
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
376 / 1436
5.2.23 (AC 6) - (AC_6)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 6
Logical Name
AC_6
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
377 / 1436
5.2.24 (AC 7) - (AC_7)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 7
Logical Name
AC_7
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
378 / 1436
5.2.25 (AC 8) - (AC_8)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 8
Logical Name
AC_8
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
379 / 1436
5.2.26 (AC 9) - (AC_9)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AC 9
Logical Name
AC_9
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
380 / 1436
5.2.27 (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST) - (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
Logical Name
ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
Definition
Enables/disables the addition of the legacy HR codec type in the list

of supported codec type provided to the TFO remote partner for a
given AMR-NB call, when that call is currently established in Half
Rate for cell load reason and when TFO is possible for that call (TFO
on AMR-NB supported by the TC and configured in the cell).
Coding rules
0: HR SV1 is never provided in the list of supported codec types.

1: HR SV1 may be provided (if supported by the MS and configured
in the cell) in the list of supported codec types, in addition to HR SV3.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Significant if EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled

- TFO on AMR-NB function is available on BSC Evolution only.
calls are not disrupted. Change applied only on new AMR-NB call
allocated in Half Rate after modification
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
381 / 1436
5.2.28 (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM) (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM
Logical Name
ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM
Definition
Indicates if C2 cell selection parameters are present in

SYS_INFO_7&8 or SYS_INFO_4.
Coding rules
1bit; 0= the SI 4 rest octets, if present, are used to derive the value of
PI and possibly C2 parameters.
1= the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters in a SYS INFO TYPE
or message 8 are used
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
382 / 1436
5.2.29 (AG_PREMPT_PCH) - (AG_PREMPT_PCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AG_PREMPT_PCH
Logical Name
AG_PREMPT_PCH
Definition
Flag to enable pre-emption of Paging sub-channels for Access Grant

messages when there is one remaining free AGCH block.
Coding rules
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
Mandatory rules
Lets define the free AGCH blocks as the number of blocks remaining
for the AGCH messages when the BCCH extended block and NCH
blocks have been excluded.
- If there is no free AGCH block then the flag is not used (pre-emption
mandatory, default
value 0 is not used by BTS )
- If there is only one free AGCH block then AG_PREMPT_PCH =1 or
0 (pre-emption allowed)
- If there is more than one free AGCH then AG_PREMPT_PCH = 0
(pre-emption forbidden).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
383 / 1436
5.2.30 (ALLOC_ANYWAY) - (ALLOC_ANYWAY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ALLOC_ANYWAY
Logical Name
ALLOC_ANYWAY
Definition
Controls whether a queued request can be allocated on free

resource at expiry of its queuing timer independently of the threshold
NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
only relevant when NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
384 / 1436
5.2.31 (AMR_FR_HYST) - (AMR_FR_HYST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_FR_HYST
Logical Name
AMR_FR_HYST
Definition
Hysteresis for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation.
Coding rules
step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16

dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST +
AMR_FR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3).
The recommended value for the preferred AMR FR
configurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via the
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is:
AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 2 dB.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
7.5
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset

(12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s).
Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
385 / 1436
5.2.32 (AMR_FR_SUBSET) - (AMR_FR_SUBSET)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_FR_SUBSET
Logical Name
AMR_FR_SUBSET
Definition
Bitmap (8 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for
AMR-NB FR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecs
associated to the selected preferred AMR configuration).
Coding rules
bit 8 (most significant)=1: 12,2 kbit/s is part of the subset;

bit 7=1: 10,2 kbit/s is part of the subset;
bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset.
AMR configuration 0 is composed of the codec: 4.75 Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 1 is composed of the codec: 12.20, 7.40, 5.90
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75
Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 9 is composed of the codec: 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75
Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
(The list of all the 16 standardized AMR-NB FR configurations are
given in 3GPP TS 28.062)
Mandatory rules
In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a

maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1).
Recommended rules
The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for calls

between GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases to
TFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
386 / 1436
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
240
164
External Comment
- Default value corresponds to an optimal codec subset:12.2kbit/s,

7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s
- The AMR-NB FR configurations 11, 13 and 15 (allowing the
optimization mode) are not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
387 / 1436
5.2.33 (AMR_FR_THR_1) - (AMR_FR_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_FR_THR_1
Logical Name
AMR_FR_THR_1
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between lowest

codec mode and second lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_FR_THR_1 <= AMR_FR_THR_2
Recommended rules

AMR_FR_THR_1 <= 16dB.
The recommended value for the preferred AMR FR
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is:
AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 4 dB.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
6.5
External Comment

(12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s). AMR_FR_THR_1 is not used if less
than 2 codecs are in the AMR FR subset.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
388 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_FR_THR_2
Logical Name
AMR_FR_THR_2
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between second

lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 >= AMR_FR_THR_1
Recommended rules

The recommended values for the preferred AMR FR
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are:
AMR configuration 1 and 14: 6.5 dB;
AMR configuration 9, 10 and 12: 5.5 dB.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
11.5
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
389 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_FR_THR_3
Logical Name
AMR_FR_THR_3
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between third

lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2
Recommended rules

The recommended values for the preferred AMR FR
PREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are:
AMR configuration 1 and 14: 11.5 dB;
AMR configuration 10: 6.5 dB;
AMR configuration 12: 8 dB.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
11.5
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
390 / 1436
5.2.36 (AMR_HR_HYST) - (AMR_HR_HYST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_HR_HYST
Logical Name
AMR_HR_HYST
Definition
Hysteresis for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST +
AMR_HR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3).
The recommended value for the preferred AMR HR
PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is:
AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10: 2 dB.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
7.5
External Comment

Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
391 / 1436
5.2.37 (AMR_HR_SUBSET) - (AMR_HR_SUBSET)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_HR_SUBSET
Logical Name
AMR_HR_SUBSET
Definition
Bitmap (6 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for
AMR-NB HR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecs
associated to the selected preferred AMR configuration).
Coding rules
Coded on 1 byte.
bit 8 (most significant) = 0
bit 7 = 0;
bit 6 =1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset;
bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset;
Kbit/sec
AMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75
Kbit/sec
Kbit/sec
and 4.75 Kbit/sec
(The list of all the 9 standardized AMR-NB HR configurations are
given in 3GPP TS 28.062)
Mandatory rules
- In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a

maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1).
- The subset shall not contain only 7.4 kbit/s codec mode. As
consequence, the AMR configuration 4 is forbidden too.
Recommended rules
The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for calls

between GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases to
TFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
60
22
392 / 1436
External Comment
- Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset

- The codec mode 7.95 kbit/s (and AMR configuration 5, as
consequence) is not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
393 / 1436
5.2.38 (AMR_HR_THR_1) - (AMR_HR_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_HR_THR_1
Logical Name
AMR_HR_THR_1
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between lowest

codec mode and second lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_HR_THR_1 <= AMR_HR_THR_2
Recommended rules

AMR_HR_THR_1 <= 16dB.
The recommended values for the preferred AMR HR
PREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter are:
AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 10.5 dB;
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
11
External Comment

(7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). AMR_HR_THR_1 is not used if less
than 2 codecs are in the AMR HR subset.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
394 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_HR_THR_2
Logical Name
AMR_HR_THR_2
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between second

lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 >= AMR_HR_THR_1
Recommended rules

AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 12 dB.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
12.5
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
395 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_HR_THR_3
Logical Name
AMR_HR_THR_3
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between third

lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2
Recommended rules

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
12.5
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
396 / 1436
5.2.41 (AMR_START_MODE_FR) - (AMR_START_MODE_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_START_MODE_FR
Logical Name
AMR_START_MODE_FR
Definition
Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB FR call, until

codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS.
Coding rules
0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode
of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset
contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode
(used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest
codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow band

codec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS
always considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
397 / 1436
5.2.42 (AMR_START_MODE_HR) - (AMR_START_MODE_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_START_MODE_HR
Logical Name
AMR_START_MODE_HR
Definition
Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB HR call, until

codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS.
Coding rules
0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode
of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset
contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode
(used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest
codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes)
Mandatory rules
If AMR_START_MODE_HR is explicit (I.e. not equal to 0), the

chosen codec mode shall not correspond to 7.40 kbit/s.
Recommended rules
Use codec mode 6.7 kbit/s as start mode for AMR-NB HR should
be avoided.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow band

codec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS
always considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
398 / 1436
5.2.43 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
Logical Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
Definition
Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition

between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Recommended rules
As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB,
following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
+ AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
7.5
2.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
399 / 1436
5.2.44 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Logical Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Definition
Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition

between highest codec mode and second lowest codec mode
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Recommended rules
following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
+ AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
7.5
2.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
400 / 1436
5.2.45 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
Logical Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
Definition
Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between

lowest codec mode and second
lowest codec mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2

- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
<= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Recommended rules
following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 +
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
401 / 1436
5.2.46 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
Logical Name
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
Definition
Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between

second lowest codec mode and highest codec mode
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2

- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
<= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Recommended rules
following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 +
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
402 / 1436
5.2.47 (AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD) - (EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD
Logical Name
EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR
Definition
This flag enables/disables access class automatic barring upon

BTS/BSC overload.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
403 / 1436
5.2.48 (AUTO_BAR_CELL) - (AUT_BAR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AUTO_BAR_CELL
Logical Name
AUT_BAR
Definition
This flag enables/inhibits automatic barring of cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
404 / 1436
5.2.49 (AUTO_BAR_EC) - (EC_BAR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
AUTO_BAR_EC
Logical Name
EC_BAR
Definition
This flag enables/disables automatic barring of Emergency Class.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
405 / 1436
5.2.50 (Automatic AC barring on TCH load) - (EN_LOAD_MNGT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Automatic AC barring on TCH load
Logical Name
EN_LOAD_MNGT
Definition
This flag enables/disables automatic barring of access classes on

TCH load criterion.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
406 / 1436
5.2.51 (B_NUM) - (B_NUM)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
B_NUM
Logical Name
B_NUM
Definition
Number of BLOCK/UNBLOCK messages sent in one burst.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
35
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
407 / 1436
5.2.52 (BCC) - (BCC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BCC
Logical Name
BCC (BSC)
Definition
BTS colour code of the cell.
Coding rules
coded over 3 bits
Mandatory rules
Equal to BCC (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here

is for implementation purposes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
408 / 1436
5.2.53 (BCC) - (BCC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BCC
Logical Name
BCC (MFS)
Definition
BTS colour code of the cell.
Coding rules
coded over 3 bits
Mandatory rules
Equal to BCC (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
409 / 1436
5.2.54 (BCC) - (BCC (n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BCC
Logical Name
BCC (n)
Definition
BTS colour code of the adjacent cell.
Coding rules
coded over 3 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
410 / 1436
5.2.55 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BCCH_ARFCN
Logical Name
BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC)
Definition
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the

frequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell.
Coding rules
The coded default value of -1 is for implementation purposes only;

this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any
BCCH yet.
Mandatory rules
- BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
For Evolium serving cell:
- there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of
all the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhood
of the serving cell for reselection) .
- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then
there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all
the target cells for handover.
- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G,
then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies
for the set of all the target cells for handover.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1023
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
411 / 1436
5.2.56 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BCCH_ARFCN
Logical Name
BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
Definition
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the

frequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)
For Evolium serving cell:
- there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of
all the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhood
of the serving cell for reselection) .
- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then
there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all
the target cells for handover.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1023
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
412 / 1436
5.2.57 (BCCH_EXT) - (BCCH_EXT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BCCH_EXT
Logical Name
BCCH_EXT
Definition
This flag enables / disables the use of extended BCCH.
Coding rules
0: false, 1:true
Mandatory rules
-When EN_SOLSA is enabled, the BCCH_EXT shall be set to true.

-When EN_VGCS is disabled :
. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1
-When EN_VGCS is enabled :
. if BCCH_EXT = false, BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Recommended rules
The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLY

recommended in cells having adjacent cells in several frequency
bands and at least 18 adjacent BCCH within the same band.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
413 / 1436
5.2.58 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Logical Name
BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC)
Definition
Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel

(AGCH).
Coding rules
coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7)
Mandatory rules
-BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given

cell
-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell,
BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0
- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and
BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.
. if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0

- For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1
- Parameter change:
no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted.
But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset and
paging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
414 / 1436
5.2.59 (BS_P_CON_ACK) - (BS_P_CON_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_P_CON_ACK
Logical Name
BS_P_CON_ACK
Definition
Supervision of the BS Power Control procedure.
Coding rules
step size=1 (2 x Samfr)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
Umbrella
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
Minicell
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
415 / 1436
5.2.60 (BS_P_CON_INT) - (BS_P_CON_INT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_P_CON_INT
Logical Name
BS_P_CON_INT
Definition
Minimum delay between two consecutive BS power commands.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
Umbrella
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
Minicell
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
416 / 1436
No
5.2.61 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_PA_MFRMS
Logical Name
BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC)
Definition
Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences

of a Paging Group.
Coding rules
coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9)
Mandatory rules
BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumption
is.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
417 / 1436
5.2.62 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION) - (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION
Logical Name
BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION
Definition
This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB,

applied on the output power (after leveling). In a concentric or
multi-band cell, this attenuation applies on the output power of the
TRX(s) of the outer zone.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1dB.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
418 / 1436
5.2.63 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER) (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
Logical Name
BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
Definition
This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB,

applied on the output power of the TRX(s) of the inner zone in a
concentric or multi-band cell (after leveling).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1dB.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
31.9
External Comment
The parameter value depends on configuration. The default value

indicated here is for implementation purposes
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
419 / 1436
5.2.64 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and
BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the
actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary
sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to
adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER
to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available.
Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name
BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)
Definition
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuated

maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.
It is always set to 0 by the OMC.
A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined in
step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB
Mandatory rules
Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-30
External Comment
The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to

the sector maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware
limitation).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
420 / 1436
5.2.65 (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
Logical Name
BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC)
Definition

maximum GMSK output power of the TRX of the inner zone in a
concentric or multi-band cell.
A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER
defined in step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-30
External Comment

limitation).
The parameter value depends on configuration. The default value
indicated here is for implementation purposes.
421 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
422 / 1436
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
No
5.2.66 (BS_TXPWR_MIN) - (BS_TXPWR_MIN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_TXPWR_MIN
Logical Name
BS_TXPWR_MIN
Definition
This parameter defines the maximum value of the power attenuation

(so the minimum allowed transmission power) relative to the
attenuated maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-30
-24
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
423 / 1436
5.2.67 (BSC Primary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_primary_address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSC Primary X25 Address
Logical Name
BSC_X25_primary_address
Definition
BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string
Mandatory rules
changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only for
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
424 / 1436
5.2.68 (BSC Primary X25 Address [1]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSC Primary X25 Address [1]
Logical Name
BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1]
Definition
First character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
1character of a string. default = blank character
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
425 / 1436
5.2.69 (BSC Primary X25 Address [10]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i

[10])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Tenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
426 / 1436

[11])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Eleventh character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
427 / 1436

[12])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Twelfth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
428 / 1436

[13])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Thirteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
429 / 1436

[14])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fourteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
430 / 1436

[15])
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fifteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
431 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Second character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
432 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Third character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
433 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fourth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
434 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fifth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
435 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Sixth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
436 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Seventh character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
437 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Eighth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
438 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Ninth character of BSC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
439 / 1436
5.2.83 (BSC Secondary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_secondary_address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSC Secondary X25 Address
Logical Name
BSC_X25_secondary_address
Definition
BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
440 / 1436
5.2.84 (BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]) (BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]
Logical Name
BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1]
Definition
First character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
441 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Tenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
442 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Eleventh character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
443 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Twelfth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
444 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Thirteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
445 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fourteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
446 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fifteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
447 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Second character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
448 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Third character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
449 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fourth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
450 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Fifth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
451 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Sixth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
452 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Seventh character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
453 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Eighth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
454 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Ninth character of BSC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
455 / 1436
5.2.99 (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND) - (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND
Logical Name
BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND
Definition
Enables/disables the RF RESOURCE INDICATION processing by

the BSC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
456 / 1436
5.2.100 (BSIC) - (BSIC (GSM))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSIC
Logical Name
BSIC (GSM)
Definition
Concatenation of the NCC and the BCC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Abstract
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
457 / 1436
5.2.101 (BTS_Queue_Length) - (BTS_Q_LENGTH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BTS_Queue_Length
Logical Name
BTS_Q_LENGTH
Definition
Maximum number of Assignment Requests and Handover Requests

that can be queued simultaneously.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
64
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
458 / 1436
5.2.102 (CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT) - (RE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT
Logical Name
RE
Definition
This flag indicates to the MS if call reestablishment is allowed in the

cell.
Coding rules
0: allowed, 1: not allowed
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
459 / 1436
5.2.103 (Call_User_Data_Selector) - (Call_user_data_sel)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Call_User_Data_Selector
Logical Name
Call_user_data_sel
Definition
Identifies the higher protocol selector for an outgoing connection.
Coding rules
0 to 16 bytes string
Mandatory rules
Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is

Each byte of the string can get a value in the range [0..255].
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
460 / 1436
5.2.104 (Candidate cell priority) - (PRIORITY(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Candidate cell priority
Logical Name
PRIORITY(0,n)
Definition
Priority of the cell n in the HO candidate cell evaluation process.
Coding rules
0: highest priority, 5: lowest priority
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
461 / 1436
5.2.105 (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Logical Name
CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Definition
This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving

cell to trigger a "general capture" handover.
Coding rules
0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
462 / 1436
5.2.106 (CBC Primary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_primary_address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CBC Primary X25 Address
Logical Name
CBC_X25_primary_address
Definition
CBC X25 primary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
463 / 1436
5.2.107 (CBC Secondary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_secondary_address)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CBC Secondary X25 Address
Logical Name
CBC_X25_secondary_address
Definition
CBC X25 secondary address.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
464 / 1436
5.2.108 (CBC_Operator) - (Operator)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CBC_Operator
Logical Name
Operator
Definition
Identifies the CBC operator.
Coding rules
0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the

OMC on the OMC/BSC interface . BSC performs the padding of
OMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until
20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space
characters from the retrieved BSC value.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
32
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
465 / 1436
5.2.109 (CBC_Password) - (Password)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CBC_Password
Logical Name
Password
Definition
CBC password.
Coding rules
0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the

OMC on the OMC/BSC interface. BSC performs the padding of OMC
string with space characters on the right side of the string until 20
bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space
characters from the retrieved BSC value.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
32
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
466 / 1436
5.2.110 (CBC_Window) - (CBC_window)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CBC_Window
Logical Name
CBC_window
Definition
Maximum number of outstanding primitives on the BSC/CBC

interface for both incoming and outgoing primitives.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules

shall be set to "1" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Default value corresponds to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.

If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, CBC_Window should be set to 3.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
467 / 1436
5.2.111 (CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD) - (RACHRT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD
Logical Name
RACHRT
Definition
Minimum delay between two consecutive sendings of CCCH LOAD

INDICATION messages.
Coding rules
step size=1 (51mfr)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
RACHRT > RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
51mfr
255
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
468 / 1436
5.2.112 (CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD) - (RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD
Logical Name
RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER
Definition
Period over which CCCH load measurements are made.
Coding rules
step size=1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER < RACHRT
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
51mfr
255
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
469 / 1436
5.2.113 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Cell Type
Logical Name
Cell_Type
Definition
Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE,

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an OMC own cell.
Used for cell default parameter template.
Coding rules
Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella

Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7),
Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor
Concentric(11)
Mandatory rules
- EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when

CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".
A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have
the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).
- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"
cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is
"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not
apply to the external cells.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Abstract
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
*: possible values are:

- Single
- Umbrella
- Umbrella Concentric
- Micro
- Mini
- Micro Concentric
- Mini Concentric
- Indoor
- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)
- Extended Inner
- Extended Outer
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
470 / 1436
5.2.114 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Cell Type
Logical Name
Cell_Type(n)
Definition
Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE,

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an adjacent cell (OMC
own cell or OMC external cell).
Coding rules
Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella

Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7),
Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor
Concentric(11), GAN(12)
Mandatory rules
- EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when

the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).
- The "GAN" value is allowed only for external cells
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Abstract
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
*: possible values are:

- Single
- Umbrella
- Umbrella Concentric
- Micro
- Mini
- Micro Concentric
- Mini Concentric
- Indoor
- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)
- Extended Inner
- Extended Outer
- GAN
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
471 / 1436
5.2.115 (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY) - (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
Logical Name
CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
Definition
Indicates the priority of the cell for cell selection.
Coding rules
0: normal priority, 1: low priority
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
472 / 1436
5.2.116 (CELL_CIPH_SET) - (CELL_CIPH_SET)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_CIPH_SET
Logical Name
CELL_CIPH_SET
Definition
List of flag indicating what are the ciphering algorithms allowed by

the operator (each bit represents an A5 algorithm).
When several algorithms can be selected (depending on network
configuration, MS capabilities and operator choice), the one with
the highest A5 number is used.
Coding rules
Coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if corresponding

encryption algorithm is permitted.
Bit x=0 : algorithm A5/x not permitted
Bit x=1 : algorithm A5/x permitted
bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering)
bit 1 : A5/1.
bit 2 : A5/2
bit 3 : A5/3
bit 4 : A5/4
...
bit 7 : A5/7.
Mandatory rules
The possible values are :

- A5/0
- A5/0 + A5/1
- A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3
- The value A5/0 + A5/3 is not allowed because today not all mobiles
support A5/3.
- If CELL_CIPH_SET does not allow the A5/3 usage in the cell, then
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY cannot be enabled.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Bitmap
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
A5/2 is not supported by the BSS.

In cells where EN_DTM = enabled, the algorithm A5/3 is not used
for MS, DTM capable but not supporting ciphering changes in DTM
mode.
473 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
474 / 1436
5.2.117 (CELL_EVALUATION) - (CELL_EV)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_EVALUATION
Logical Name
CELL_EV
Definition
Handover cell evaluation process applied in the cell.
Coding rules
0: Order, 1: Grade
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
grade (1)
Umbrella
grade (1)
Concentric
grade (1)
Concentric Umbrella
grade (1)
Microcell
order (0)
Minicell
grade (1)
Extended inner cell
grade (1)
Extended outer cell
grade (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
475 / 1436
5.2.118 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Definition
Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in a
different location area or, for a GPRS MS, in a different routing area,
or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
14
External Comment
If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the

provisioning context of the OMC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
476 / 1436
5.2.119 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

(BSC))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC)
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
126
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
477 / 1436
5.2.120 (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND) (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
Definition
Indicates to the MS if parameters for C2 reselection criterion are

broadcast.
Coding rules
0: not present, 1: present
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
478 / 1436
5.2.121 (CI) - (CI (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI
Logical Name
CI (BSC)
Definition
Cell Identity.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time

Equal to CI (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
479 / 1436
5.2.122 (CI) - (CI(n) (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI
Logical Name
CI(n) (BSC)
Definition
Cell Identity of adjacent cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules

Equal to CI(n)(MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
480 / 1436
5.2.123 (CI_SI) - (CI_SI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI_SI
Logical Name
CI_SI
Definition
Specific Cell Identity to be broadcasted in the SI3 and SI6 messages

instead of the value of the other O&M parameter "CI".
Coding rules
When set to "0", it indicates that the feature is de-activated, i.e the
existing CI is sent in SI3 and SI6 messages
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
External Comment

is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System Information
Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, in
broadcasted SI3 messages and in dedicated SI6 messages of the
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
481 / 1436
5.2.124 (Circuit Identity Code) - (CIC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Circuit Identity Code
Logical Name
CIC
Definition
Circuit Identity Code of an A interface circuit.
Coding rules
Coded over 16 bits: top 11 bits = pcm number, remaining 5 bits =

TS number
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
A ch
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
482 / 1436
5.2.125 (DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_DEC_HO_margin)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN
Logical Name
DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
Definition
Correction factor favouring handover cause "Power budget" when

traffic is high in the serving cell and low in neighbour cell(s).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
24
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
5 dB (5)
Umbrella
5 dB (5)
Concentric
5 dB (5)
Concentric Umbrella
5 dB (5)
Microcell
4 dB (4)
Minicell
5 dB (5)
Extended inner cell
5 dB (5)
Extended outer cell
5 dB (5)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
483 / 1436
5.2.126 (DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_INC_HO_margin)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN
Logical Name
DELTA_INC_HO_margin
Definition
Correction factor penalizing handover cause "Power budget" when

traffic is low in the serving cell and high in neighbour cell(s).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
24
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
5 dB (5)
Umbrella
5 dB (5)
Concentric
5 dB (5)
Concentric Umbrella
5 dB (5)
Microcell
4 dB (4)
Minicell
5 dB (5)
Extended inner cell
5 dB (5)
Extended outer cell
5 dB (5)
Nb of TRX Dependent
484 / 1436
No
5.2.127 (Directed_Retry) - (EN_DR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Directed_Retry
Logical Name
EN_DR
Definition
This flag enables/disables the execution of Directed Retry.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
485 / 1436
5.2.128 (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-WB
GMSK speech calls.
Coding rules
0 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK disabled,

1 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1

- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which
"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it is
recommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit the
potential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSs
of the MC modules.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
486 / 1436
5.2.129 (Downlink DTX) - (DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Downlink DTX
Logical Name
DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE
Definition
This flag defines if downlink DTX is allowed for FR and EFR calls.
Coding rules
0: DTX not allowed, 1: DTX allowed
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1

of the MC modules.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
487 / 1436
5.2.130 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR
Logical Name
Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR
Definition
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB
FR speech calls.
Coding rules
0 : DL DTX for AMR FR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR FR enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1

of the MC modules.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
488 / 1436
5.2.131 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR
Logical Name
Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR
Definition
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB
HR speech calls.
Coding rules
0 : DL DTX for AMR HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR HR enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1

of the MC modules.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
489 / 1436
5.2.132 (DOWNLINK_DTX_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DOWNLINK_DTX_HR
Logical Name
Downlink_DTX_enable_HR
Definition
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for HR speech
calls.
Coding rules
0 : DL DTX for HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for HR enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1

of the MC modules.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
490 / 1436
5.2.133 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DTX_FR_INDICATOR
Logical Name
DTX_INDICATOR_FR
Definition
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM Phase 1 and 2 for FR. Applies
for all codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB.
Coding rules
0: MS May Use DTX for FR

1: MS Shall Use DTX for FR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for FR
Mandatory rules
The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):
may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not,
shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.
The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR
= shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
491 / 1436
5.2.134 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR
Logical Name
DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR
Definition
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for
AMR-NB FR.
Coding rules
0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB FR,

1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB FR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB FR
Mandatory rules
The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):
The only combination that is NOT allowed is:
DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and
DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Recommended rules
The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
492 / 1436
5.2.135 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DTX_HR_INDICATOR
Logical Name
DTX_INDICATOR_HR
Definition
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 for HR. Applies for all
codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB.
Coding rules
0: MS May Use DTX for HR

1: MS Shall Use DTX for HR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for HR
Mandatory rules
The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):
The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR
= shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
493 / 1436
5.2.136 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR
Logical Name
DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR
Definition
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for
AMR-NB HR.
Coding rules
0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB HR,

1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB HR,
2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB HR
Mandatory rules
The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR /

DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):
The only combination that is NOT allowed is:
DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and
DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may.
Recommended rules
The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
494 / 1436
5.2.137 (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK) (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only to
AMR-WB GMSK.
Coding rules
0= the MS may use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK,

1= the MS shall use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK,
2=the MS shall not use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
495 / 1436
5.2.138 (DWELL_TIME_STEP) - (DWELL_TIME_STEP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DWELL_TIME_STEP
Logical Name
DWELL_TIME_STEP
Definition
Step value for the modification (increasing or decreasing) of

MIN_DWELL_TIME.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
496 / 1436
5.2.139 (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE) - (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE
Logical Name
EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE
Definition
This parameter determines the cause filled in ASSIGNMENT

FAILURE sent in case of External Directed Retry.
Coding rules
coded over 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
13
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
497 / 1436
5.2.140 (EDR_MSG_ORDER) - (EDR_MSG_ORDER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EDR_MSG_ORDER
Logical Name
EDR_MSG_ORDER
Definition
This parameter determines the order of transmission of

ASSIGNMENT FAILURE and HANDOVER REQUIRED on the A
interface in case of an External Directed Retry.
Coding rules
0: Ass Failure before HO Reqd, 1: Ass Failure after HO Reqd
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
498 / 1436
5.2.141 (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED) - (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED
Logical Name
EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED
Definition
This flag indicates whether or not Assignment Request is maintained

in queue during External Directed Retry attempt.
Coding rules
0: Request not maintained in queue, 1: Request maintained in queue
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
499 / 1436
5.2.142 (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL) - (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL
Logical Name
EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL
Definition
This flag indicates whether ASSIGNMENT FAILURE is sent to the

MSC in case of External Directed Retry.
Coding rules
0: Assignment Failure not sent, 1: Assignment Failure sent
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
500 / 1436
5.2.143 (EFR_ENABLED) - (EFR_ENABLED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EFR_ENABLED
Logical Name
EFR_ENABLED
Definition
This flag indicates whether the operation of enhanced full rate (EFR)
is allowed in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
501 / 1436
5.2.144 (EMERGENCY_CALL) - (EC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EMERGENCY_CALL
Logical Name
EC
Definition
Indicates if Emergency calls are allowed for all access classes or

only for access classes 11 to 15.
Coding rules
0: all access classes, 1: access classes 11 to 15 only
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
502 / 1436
5.2.145 (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU) - (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU
Logical Name
EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU
Definition
Defines if the limitation of TRE is static or dynamic.

For static limitation only Nb FR TRE + 2 x DR TRE < 200 is allowed.
For dynamic limitation only Nb TRE < 200 is allowed.
Coding rules
0: static
1:dynamic
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
503 / 1436
5.2.146 (EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY) (EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Logical Name
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the "A5/3 enhanced radio resource

allocation" feature, which tends to favor the selection of a free and
pure CS timeslot, on a TRX supporting the A5/3 ciphering encryption
algorithm, during the resource allocation processing for an A5/3
capable MS (and inversely on a TRX non supporting A5/3, when
the MS is not A5/3 capable). This feature applies to new CS call
establishments and to incoming (internal or external) handovers.
Coding rules
0: disabled,
1: enabled
Mandatory rules
- EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY can be enabled, only if

CELL_CIPH_SET allows the A5/3 usage in the cell.
- When EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY is disabled, then
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY_PS cannot be enabled.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- The present feature is automatically inhibited by the BSC when the

concerned MS is G1 capable.
- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going
traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS call
establishment requested after modification
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
504 / 1436
5.2.147 (EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY_PS) (EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY_PS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY_PS
Logical Name
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY_PS
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the "A5/3 enhanced radio resource

allocation" feature, which tends to favor the selection of a free
and PS capable timeslot, on a TRX supporting the A5/3 ciphering
encryption algorithm, during the resource allocation processing for
an A5/3 capable MS (and inversely on a TRX non supporting A5/3,
when the MS is not A5/3 capable). This feature applies to new CS
call establishments and to incoming (internal or external) handovers.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY_PS can be enabled only if

EN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY is already enabled.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- The present feature is automatically inhibited by the BSC when the

concerned MS is G1 capable.
traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS call
establishment requested after modification
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
505 / 1436
5.2.148 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR) - (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR
Logical Name
EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR
Definition
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HR

channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27). According to the load
of the serving cell (high or normal), the handover is triggered with
different thresholds values.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND

EN_AMR_HR=1}
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 27

triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing call
with TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason).
- When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled,
then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automatically
inhibited.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
506 / 1436
5.2.149 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED) (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED
Logical Name
EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED
Definition
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HR

channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27) under high load only.
Coding rules
0: disabled
1: enabled
Mandatory rules
EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED can be enabled

only if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR =1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled,

then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automatically
inhibited (even if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR is enabled).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
507 / 1436
5.2.150 (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR) - (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR
Logical Name
EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR
Definition
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB channel

adaptation (Handover Cause 26).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND

EN_AMR_HR=1}
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 26

triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing call
with TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
508 / 1436
5.2.151 (EN_AMR_FR) - (EN_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AMR_FR
Logical Name
EN_AMR_FR
Definition
This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB full rate is allowed in the
cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
509 / 1436
5.2.152 (EN_AMR_HR) - (EN_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AMR_HR
Logical Name
EN_AMR_HR
Definition
This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB half rate is allowed in the
cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
510 / 1436
5.2.153 (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
EN_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition
This flag controls whether or not AMR-WB GMSK is allowed in the

cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
511 / 1436
5.2.154 (EN_BALANCED_CI) - (EN_BALANCED_CI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_BALANCED_CI
Logical Name
EN_BALANCED_CI
Definition
This flag enables/disables to balance the C/I measure.
Coding rules
0:disable, 1: enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be

defined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameter
RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
512 / 1436
5.2.155 (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO) - (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO
Logical Name
EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "too high level in outer

zone" handover cause (cause 13).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
enable (1)
Concentric Umbrella
enable (1)
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
513 / 1436
5.2.156 (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)) - (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)
Logical Name
EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)
Definition
This flag enables/disables the incoming handovers of bi-band MSs

from the preferred band.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
514 / 1436
5.2.157 (EN_BS_PC) - (EN_BS_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_BS_PC
Logical Name
EN_BS_PC
Definition
This flag enables/disables BS Power Control.
Coding rules
0: disabled1: enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
515 / 1436
5.2.158 (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP) - (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP
Logical Name
EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP
Definition
This flag enables/disables the sending of Circuit group messages.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
516 / 1436
5.2.159 (EN_DIST_HO) - (EN_DIST_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_DIST_HO
Logical Name
EN_DIST_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "distance" handover

cause (cause 6).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
enable (1)
Umbrella
enable (1)
Concentric
enable (1)
Concentric Umbrella
enable (1)
Microcell
disable (0)
Minicell
enable (1)
Extended inner cell
enable (1)
Extended outer cell
enable (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
517 / 1436
5.2.160 (EN_EDR) - (EN_EXT_DR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_EDR
Logical Name
EN_EXT_DR
Definition
This flag enables/disables the Outgoing External Directed Retry

procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is

set to enable.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether
or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry
is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set
RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EDR is enabled in order to get a Handover
Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congested
and thus to attempt other procedures.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
518 / 1436
5.2.161 (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP) - (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_EXT_MEAS_REP
Logical Name
EN_EXT_MEAS_REP
Definition
This flag enables/disables the extended measurement reporting for

Mobile Assisted Frequency Allocation.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
519 / 1436
5.2.162 (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO
Logical Name
EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the use of Fast traffic handovers.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
520 / 1436
5.2.163 (EN_FORCED_DR) - (EN_FORCED_DR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FORCED_DR
Logical Name
EN_FORCED_DR
Definition
This flag enables/disables the "Forced Directed Retry" handover

cause detection.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
521 / 1436
5.2.164 (EN_GAN_HO) - (EN_GAN_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_GAN_HO
Logical Name
EN_GAN_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the handover to GAN
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
522 / 1436
5.2.165 (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO) - (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
Logical Name
EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "general capture"

handover cause (cause 24).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
523 / 1436
5.2.166 (EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition
Enables/disables, when the cell is loaded, the support of the Half

Rate allocation (at new call establishment and during inter-cell
handover) for possible AMR-WB calls.
This feature deals with the possible AMR-WB calls, ie calls for which
AMR-WB is supported by the MS, and supported by the TC, and
allowed by the MSC, and allowed in the cell.
Coding rules
0: disabled,
1: enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Significant if EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is enabled

- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, calls on
going in the cell are not disrupted. Change applied only on new calls
(establishment or handover) allocated in the cell after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
524 / 1436
5.2.167 (EN_HSL) - (EN_HSL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_HSL
Logical Name
EN_HSL
Definition
Enables SS7 HSL (High speed Signalling Link).
Coding rules
0: HSL disabled
1: HSL enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Changeable on the BSC terminal.

if EN_HSL = 1 the following new Q703 parameters:
Q703_N1_HSL, Q_703_N2_HSL, Q703_T1_HSL, Q703_T4E_HSL
and Q703_T4N_HSL
replaces the old ones:
Q703_N1, Q_703_N2, Q703_T1, Q703_T4E and Q703_T4N.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
525 / 1436
5.2.168 (EN_IMM_ASS_REJ) - (EN_IM_ASS_REJ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_IMM_ASS_REJ
Logical Name
EN_IM_ASS_REJ
Definition
This flag indicates if the Immediate Assignment Reject procedure

is enabled.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter is only valid for circuit switched traffic. For packet
traffic (GPRS or EGPRS) sending of IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
REJECT messages cannot be disabled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
526 / 1436
5.2.169 (EN_INCOMING_HO) - (EN_IC_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INCOMING_HO
Logical Name
EN_IC_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables incoming handovers in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
527 / 1436
5.2.170 (EN_INTERBAND_HO) - (EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTERBAND_HO
Logical Name
EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH
Definition
This flag enables / disables the multiband operation by filtering the

sending of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 2ter/5ter.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
528 / 1436
5.2.171 (EN_INTRA_DL) - (EN_INTRA_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRA_DL
Logical Name
EN_INTRA_DL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink"

handover cause (cause 16) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor
AMR-WB).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
529 / 1436
5.2.172 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRA_DL_AMR
Logical Name
EN_INTRA_DL_AMR
Definition

handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-NB calls.
Coding rules
0: disable, 1: enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover when

frequency hopping is applied
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
530 / 1436
5.2.173 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition

handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-WB GMSK calls.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover when

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
531 / 1436
5.2.174 (EN_INTRA_UL) - (EN_INTRA_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRA_UL
Logical Name
EN_INTRA_UL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover

cause (cause 15) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
532 / 1436
5.2.175 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRA_UL_AMR
Logical Name
EN_INTRA_UL_AMR
Definition

cause (cause 15) for AMR-NB calls.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
533 / 1436
5.2.176 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition

cause (cause 15) for AMR-WB GMSK calls
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
534 / 1436
5.2.177 (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED) - (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
Logical Name
EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
Definition
This flag enables/disables the repetition of intracell handover

attempts.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
535 / 1436
5.2.178 (EN_LOAD_BALANCE) - (EN_LOAD_BALANCE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_LOAD_BALANCE
Logical Name
EN_LOAD_BALANCE
Definition
Flag to enable/disable the balancing of load between the inner and

outer zone of a multiband cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both

"Enabled".
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
EN_LOAD_BALANCE significant only if EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO

is enabled
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
disable (0)
Concentric Umbrella
disable (0)
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
536 / 1436
No
5.2.179 (EN_LOAD_ORDER) - (EN_LOAD_ORDER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_LOAD_ORDER
Logical Name
EN_LOAD_ORDER
Definition
This flag indicates whether or not traffic load has to be taken into
account when setting up the list of target cells.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
537 / 1436
5.2.180 (EN_MA_SELECTION) - (EN_MA_SELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MA_SELECTION
Logical Name
EN_MA_SELECTION
Definition
This flag enables/disables channel selection according to Mobile

Allocation criterion.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
538 / 1436
5.2.181 (EN_MCHO_H_DL) - (EN_MCHO_H_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MCHO_H_DL
Logical Name
EN_MCHO_H_DL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink micro-cell"

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
disable (0) *
Umbrella
disable (0) *
Concentric
disable (0) *
Concentric Umbrella
disable (0) *
Microcell
enable (1)
Minicell
disable (0) *
Extended inner cell
disable (0) *
Extended outer cell
disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
539 / 1436
5.2.182 (EN_MCHO_H_UL) - (EN_MCHO_H_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MCHO_H_UL
Logical Name
EN_MCHO_H_UL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink mirco-cell "

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
disable (0) *
Umbrella
disable (0) *
Concentric
disable (0) *
Concentric Umbrella
disable (0) *
Microcell
enable (1)
Minicell
disable (0) *
Extended inner cell
disable (0) *
Extended outer cell
disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
540 / 1436
No
5.2.183 (EN_MCHO_NCELL) - (EN_MCHO_NCELL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MCHO_NCELL
Logical Name
EN_MCHO_NCELL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "high level in neighbour

lower or indoor cell" handover cause (cause 14).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In a lower layer cell, the flag shall be disabled if there is no indoor

layer.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
disable (0) *
Umbrella
enable (1)
Concentric
disable (0) *
Concentric Umbrella
enable (1)
Microcell
disable (0)
Minicell
disable (0)
Extended inner cell
disable (0) *
Extended outer cell
disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
541 / 1436
5.2.184 (EN_MCHO_RESCUE) - (EN_MCHO_RESCUE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MCHO_RESCUE
Logical Name
EN_MCHO_RESCUE
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "consecutive bad SACCH

frames" handover cause (cause 7).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
disable (0) *
Umbrella
disable (0) *
Concentric
disable (0) *
Concentric Umbrella
disable (0) *
Microcell
enable (1)
Minicell
disable (0) *
Extended inner cell
disable (0) *
Extended outer cell
disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
542 / 1436
No
5.2.185 (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC) - (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC
Logical Name
EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC
Definition
Enables/disables the "RMS improvement" feature, which allows

reporting more than 42 neighbour frequencies per TRX in the 2G
radio link measurements performed by the MS.
When enabled, the parameter RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB gives the
maximum number of frequencies reported by the BTS.
When disabled, that maximum is not configurable (42, per default).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
-Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.

-Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going
calls are not disrupted. But the RMS jobs, ongoing on the BTSs, are
restarted (all data already collected are discarded).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
543 / 1436
5.2.186 (EN_MS_PC) - (EN_MS_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MS_PC
Logical Name
EN_MS_PC
Definition
This flag enables/disables MS Power Control.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
544 / 1436
5.2.187 (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO) - (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO
Logical Name
EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the power budget handovers Cause 12

and the traffic handovers Cause 23 between cells belonging to
different frequency bands.
Coding rules
0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
545 / 1436
5.2.188 (EN_PBGT_FILTERING) - (EN_PBGT_FILTERING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_PBGT_FILTERING
Logical Name
EN_PBGT_FILTERING
Definition
This flag enables/disables filtering of candidate neighbour cells on

HO_MARGIN_DIST/LEV/QUAL criterion.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
This parameter must be set to disabled in case of extended cell
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
enable (1)
Umbrella
enable (1)
Concentric
enable (1)
Concentric Umbrella
enable (1)
Microcell
disable (0)
Minicell
enable (1)
Extended inner cell
disable (0)
Extended outer cell
disable (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
546 / 1436
No
5.2.189 (EN_PBGT_HO) - (EN_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_PBGT_HO
Logical Name
EN_PBGT_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "power budget" handover

cause (cause 12).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
547 / 1436
5.2.190 (EN_POWER_SAVING) - (EN_POWER_SAVING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_POWER_SAVING
Logical Name
EN_POWER_SAVING
Definition
Enables power saving on all TRXs in the cell.
Coding rules
0: the power saving is "disabled",

1: the power saving is "enabled".
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
If EN_POWER_SAVING is set to "enabled", the TRX dynamic power

saving feature will be applied on all the TRXs in the cell belonging
to G3, G4 or G5 TREs. The feature will however not be applied on
the TRXs in the cell belonging to MC modules, due to the specific
architecture of MC modules (unique power amplifier for all the TRXs).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
548 / 1436
5.2.191 (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO) - (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO
Logical Name
EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of handover cause 21 (high

level in neighbour cell in the preferred band).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
549 / 1436
5.2.192 (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING) - (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING
Logical Name
EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING
Definition
This flag enables/disables the use of the parameter PRIORITY(0,n)

in the candidate cell evaluation process.
Coding rules
0: Priority(0,n) not taken into account, 1: Priority(0,n) taken into

account
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
550 / 1436
5.2.193 (EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY) - (EN_RL_RECOV)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY
Logical Name
EN_RL_RECOV
Definition
This flag enables/disables the Radio Link Recovery procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
enable (1)
Umbrella
enable (1)
Concentric
enable (1)
Concentric Umbrella
enable (1)
Microcell
enable (1)
Minicell
enable (1)
Extended inner cell
enable (1)
Extended outer cell
enable (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
551 / 1436
5.2.194 (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2) - (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2
Logical Name
EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the "randomisation of fill bits in L2

message" feature on the DL Air interface of the cell. That feature
brings more protection to voice calls using A5/1 encryption algorithm.
Coding rules
0: the DL randomisation is "disabled",

1: the DL randomisation is "enabled".
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Since a MS may move from one cell to another cell, the activation of
the feature on few cells makes no sense. Alcatel-Lucent recommends
on a large set of cells, like the BSS level.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Parameter change:
No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted.
Change applied only on new CS calls established after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
552 / 1436
5.2.195 (EN_REP_DL_FACCH) - (EN_REP_DL_FACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_REP_DL_FACCH
Logical Name
EN_REP_DL_FACCH
Definition
Enables/Disables repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls.
Coding rules
0: disabled
1: enabled for LAPDm command frames
2: enabled for LAPDm command frames, and also for LAPDm
response frames (valid only for the MS having indicated the support
of the feature by Repeated ACCH Capability bit=1).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Function available on BSC Evolution only.

Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
applied on new calls (after modification).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
553 / 1436
5.2.196 (EN_REP_SACCH) - (EN_REP_SACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_REP_SACCH
Logical Name
EN_REP_SACCH
Definition
Enables/Disables repeated SACCH for SAPI 0 frames in case

of AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls (for mobile station having
indicated the support of the feature).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Function available on BSC Evolution only.

Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
554 / 1436
5.2.197 (EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA) - (EN_RESCUE_UM)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA
Logical Name
EN_RESCUE_UM
Definition
This flag determines if emergency handovers are directed

preferentially to umbrella cells.
Coding rules
0: disabled, 1: enabled, 2: indefinite
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
enable (1)
Minicell
disable (0)
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
555 / 1436
5.2.198 (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO) - (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
Logical Name
EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
Definition
Flag enabling the intracell handovers allowing to move TCH from the
PS zone to the CS zone of PDCH/TCH allocation (intracell handover
cause 30).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
556 / 1436
5.2.199 (EN_RXLEV_DL) - (EN_RXLEV_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RXLEV_DL
Logical Name
EN_RXLEV_DL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink" handover

cause (cause 5).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
557 / 1436
5.2.200 (EN_RXLEV_UL) - (EN_RXLEV_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RXLEV_UL
Logical Name
EN_RXLEV_UL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink" handover

cause (cause 3).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
558 / 1436
5.2.201 (EN_RXQUAL_DL) - (EN_RXQUAL_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RXQUAL_DL
Logical Name
EN_RXQUAL_DL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality downlink"

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
559 / 1436
5.2.202 (EN_RXQUAL_UL) - (EN_RXQUAL_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RXQUAL_UL
Logical Name
EN_RXQUAL_UL
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality uplink" handover

cause (cause 2).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
560 / 1436
5.2.203 (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE) - (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE
Logical Name
EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE
Definition
This flag controls "Current channel" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules
0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
561 / 1436
5.2.204 (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER) - (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER
Logical Name
EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER
Definition
This flag controls "Speech version (used)" OIE inclusion in

HANDOVER REQUIRED.
Coding rules
0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
562 / 1436
5.2.205 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_SOLSA
Logical Name
EN_SOLSA
Definition
This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
May be set to Enabled only if BCCH_EXT=TRUE.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
563 / 1436
5.2.206 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_SOLSA
Logical Name
EN_SOLSA(n)
Definition
This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure
the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter
is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an
OMC internal cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
564 / 1436
5.2.207 (EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION) - (EN_SPEED_DISC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION
Logical Name
EN_SPEED_DISC
Definition
This flag enables/disables the speed discrimination process.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
disable (0) *
Umbrella
disable (0)
Concentric
disable (0) *
Concentric Umbrella
disable (0)
Microcell
disable (0)
Minicell
disable (0)
Extended inner cell
disable (0) *
Extended outer cell
disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
565 / 1436
5.2.208 (EN_TCH_PREEMPT) - (EN_TCH_PREEMPT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TCH_PREEMPT
Logical Name
EN_TCH_PREEMPT
Definition
This flag enables/disables the TCH/VGCH pre-emption feature. If

enabled, a point-to-point or voice group call with the pvi (pre-emption
vulnerability indication) bit set might be pre-empted for a point-to-point
or voice group call that has the pci (pre-emption capability indication)
bit set if the concerned cell is in congestion state.
Coding rules
0:disabled, 1:enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
- EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is

set to enable.
- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set
EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of
MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
In case one or more TCHs have been reserved for emergency

handovers (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0) in the concerned cell,
the BSC will first try to use one of these resources before actually
releasing an ongoing call with lower priority and the pvi bit set.
In case the cell is congested, if EN_TCH_PREEMPT is enabled and
the MSC does not allow the queing, the BSC will queue an incoming
point-to-point request with pre-emption capability indicator set during
at most T11_forced seconds for a normal assignment or during at
most T_qho seconds for an handover request. For the voice group
call request, the BSC will follow the MSC indicator.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
566 / 1436
5.2.209 (EN_TFO) - (EN_TFO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TFO
Logical Name
EN_TFO
Definition
Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function for FR, EFR and
HR codec types.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
567 / 1436
5.2.210 (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_NB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TFO_AMR_NB
Logical Name
EN_TFO_AMR_NB
Definition
Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case of

AMR-NB codec.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Function available on BSC Evolution only
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
568 / 1436
5.2.211 (EN_TFO_AMR_WB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_WB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TFO_AMR_WB
Logical Name
EN_TFO_AMR_WB
Definition
Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case of

AMR-WB GMSK codec.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
569 / 1436
5.2.212 (EN_TFO_MATCH) - (EN_TFO_MATCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TFO_MATCH
Logical Name
EN_TFO_MATCH
Definition
This flag enables/disables TFO codec mismatch resolution function

(for FR, EFR, HR, AMR-NB and AMR-WB codecs).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO=1

or if EN_TFO_AMR_WB=1 or if EN_TFO_AMR_NB=1
- May be set to 0 only if EN_TFO_OPT = 0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
570 / 1436
5.2.213 (EN_TFO_OPT) - (EN_TFO_OPT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TFO_OPT
Logical Name
EN_TFO_OPT
Definition
This flag enables/disables TFO codec optimisation function.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO_MATCH=1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
571 / 1436
5.2.214 (EN_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_TRAFFIC_HO
Logical Name
EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
Definition
This flag enables/disables the detection of "traffic" handover cause

(cause 23).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
As the traffic load of cells external to the BSC is unknown,

no HO cause 23 will be triggered towards these cells, even if
EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
572 / 1436
5.2.215 (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT) - (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT
Logical Name
EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT
Definition
This flag enables/disables the sending of UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT

message.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
573 / 1436
5.2.216 (EXT_HO_FORCED) - (EXT_HO_FORCED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EXT_HO_FORCED
Logical Name
EXT_HO_FORCED
Definition
This flag, when set, forces internal intercell handovers to be executed

as external HO.
Coding rules
0: BSC performs internal HO, 1: MSC performs internal HO
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
574 / 1436
5.2.217 (Extended CBCH) - (Use_of_Extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Extended CBCH
Logical Name
Use_of_Extended_CBCH
Definition
This flag indicates if the extended CBCH is used.
Coding rules
0: not used, 1: used
Mandatory rules
shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"

can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Default value correspond to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.

If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, Use_of_Extended_CBCH should
be set to "Yes".
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
575 / 1436
5.2.218 (FORBID_AMR_NS) - (FORBID_AMR_NS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FORBID_AMR_NS
Logical Name
FORBID_AMR_NS
Definition
Flag to forbid / allow AMR-NB or AMR-WB noise suppressor in the

MS.
Coding rules
0: the MS can use AMR NS, 1: the MS shall not use AMR NS.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Significant only if EN_AMR_FR, EN_AMR_HR or

EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is set to TRUE.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
576 / 1436
5.2.219 (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F) - (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F
Logical Name
FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F
Definition
Forbid use of downlink DTX on non hopping TCH of the BCCH TRX.
Coding rules
0 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is allowed; 1 : DTX DL on

non-hopping BCCH TRX is forbidden
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which

of the MC modules.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
577 / 1436
5.2.220 (Force TFO versus AMR) - (FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Force TFO versus AMR
Logical Name
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
Definition
Flag to enable/disable the basic functions of Tandem Free Operation

(TFO) for GSM FR SV1, FR SV2 and HR SV1 codec types when the
current codec is AMR-NB FR or AMR-NB HR and when TFO is not
possible for the current call (TFO on AMR-NB not supported by the
TC or not configured in the cell).
Coding rules
0: disabled,
no TFO negotiation if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently used;
1: enabled,
TFO negotiation will start even if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently
used
Mandatory rules
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR = 1 only if EN_TFO=1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR relevant only if (EN_AMR_FR = 1 or

EN_AMR_HR = 1) AND (EN_TFO = 1) AND (EN_TFO_AMR_NB =
0 or not supported by the BSS)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
578 / 1436
5.2.221 (Forced_Queuing) - (QUEUE_ANYWAY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Forced_Queuing
Logical Name
QUEUE_ANYWAY
Definition
This flag enables/disables forced queuing for Assignment requests

when queuing is not allowed by the MSC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
579 / 1436
5.2.222 (Forward_CM_3) - (EN_SEND_CM3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Forward_CM_3
Logical Name
EN_SEND_CM3
Definition
This flag enables/disables sending of "Classmark 3" IE to the MSC.
Coding rules
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Mandatory rules
EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at

the same time.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The value of this parameter depends on whether the MSC supports

the MS classmark 3 IE or not: if the MSC supports the MS classmark
3 IE then the parameter shall be set to "1", otherwise the parameter
shall be set to "0".
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
580 / 1436
5.2.223 (Free_Factor_1) - (Freefactor_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Factor_1
Logical Name
Freefactor_1
Definition
Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into

account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
581 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Factor_2
Logical Name
Freefactor_2
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 <= Freefactor_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
582 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Factor_3
Logical Name
Freefactor_3
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
583 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Factor_4
Logical Name
Freefactor_4
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
584 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Factor_5
Logical Name
Freefactor_5
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freefactor_5 >= Freefactor_4
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
585 / 1436
5.2.228 (Free_Level_1) - (Freelevel_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Level_1
Logical Name
Freelevel_1
Definition
Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of

the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freelevel_1 < Freelevel_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
586 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Level_2
Logical Name
Freelevel_2
Definition

the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 > Freelevel_1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
10
12
13
14
16
17
587 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Level_3
Logical Name
Freelevel_3
Definition

the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
10
12
14
17
20
23
26
28
31
34
588 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Level_4
Logical Name
Freelevel_4
Definition

the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
12
15
21
26
30
34
38
42
47
51
589 / 1436
5.2.232 (Free_Level_DR) - (Freelevel_DR(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Free_Level_DR
Logical Name
Freelevel_DR(n)
Definition
Minimum number of free TCHs in neighbour cell n to allow forced

directed retry to cell n.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Freelevel_DR > N_TCH_HO
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
See TRXnb
Umbrella
See TRXnb
Concentric
See TRXnb
Concentric Umbrella
See TRXnb
Microcell
See TRXnb
Minicell
See TRXnb
Extended inner cell
255 *
Extended outer cell
255 *
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
590 / 1436
5.2.233 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQUENCY_RANGE
Logical Name
FREQUENCY_RANGE
Definition
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the cell.
Coding rules
0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4:

PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for
future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision
for future frequency bands support.
Mandatory rules
- if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .
- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same
as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell,
where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to
the same frequency range.
The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of
FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS
parameters:
- At cell creation
- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.
However, no check is performed when the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.
Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE
parameter are allowed depending on the value of the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)"
or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800
bands",
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if the
bands",
bands",
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM
(GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set
to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
591 / 1436
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When the frequency range is changed from EGSM (resp.

EGSM-DCS) to PGSM (resp. PGSM-DCS) or from PGSM (resp.
PGSM-DCS) to EGSM (resp. EGSM-DCS), then all TRXs of the cell
have the preserve call flag set to FALSE
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
592 / 1436
5.2.234 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQUENCY_RANGE
Logical Name
FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS)
Definition
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell

(GAN cell excluded).
Coding rules

PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for
future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision
for future frequency bands support.
Mandatory rules
- If FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) = "GSM-DCS" then

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE(n) must be equal to "Concentric".
cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) is
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Within the same PLMN, the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter of a

given cell shall be selected among one of the following values:
- PGSM (GSM900) or EGSM (GSM900) or DCS1800
or PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800 if the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and
DCS1800 bands",
- GSM850 or DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to
"GSM850 and DCS1800 bands",
- GSM850 or DCS1900 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to
"GSM850 and DCS1900 bands.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
593 / 1436
5.2.235 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FREQUENCY_RANGE
Logical Name
FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC)
Definition
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell

(internal or external to the OMC).
Coding rules

PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7: GAN,
8..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a
provision for future frequency bands support.
Mandatory rules
- if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then

CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .
- if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GAN" then CELL_RANGE must be
equal to "GAN".
- the value GAN is only allowed for the OMC external cells
The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of
FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS
parameters:
- At cell creation
- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.
However, no check is performed when the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.
Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE
parameter are allowed depending on the value of the
PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)"
or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the
bands",
bands",
bands",
- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM
(GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set
to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
594 / 1436
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
595 / 1436
5.2.236 (GSM_PHASE) - (GSM_PHASE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GSM_PHASE
Logical Name
GSM_PHASE
Definition
This flag indicates the GSM Phase used by the BSC to format
messages towards the MSC.
Coding rules
0: GSM Phase 1, 1: GSM Phase 2
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
596 / 1436
5.2.237 (H_LOAD_OBJ) - (H_LOAD_OBJ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
H_LOAD_OBJ
Logical Name
H_LOAD_OBJ
Definition
High threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to reduce

MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules
step size = 10%
Mandatory rules
H_LOAD_OBJ >= L_LOAD_OBJ
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
80
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
See TRXnb
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
See TRXnb
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
597 / 1436
5.2.238 (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Logical Name
H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Definition
Maximum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
H_MIN_DWELL_TIME >= L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
598 / 1436
5.2.239 (High Priority Access Class Ordering P1) (AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
High Priority Access Class Ordering P1
Logical Name
AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1)
Definition
List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order.
Coding rules
Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority, 10

(EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access
class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14
(access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
15
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
599 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority

10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
600 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
15
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
601 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
15
13
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
602 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
15
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
603 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
15
11
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
604 / 1436
5.2.245 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is high for circuit
switched calls.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD >= LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
80
External Comment
Default value depends on the number of TRX in the cell (see TRXnb
default value). The value indicated here is for implementation
purposes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
70
70
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
605 / 1436
5.2.246 (Highest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Highest BA range ARFCNs
Logical Name
RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13)
Definition
Highest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information

Element.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
-1
1023
-1
External Comment
RANGEi_HIGHER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA

Range" IE.
Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not
significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator
of end of BA Range)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
606 / 1436
5.2.247 (HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE) - (T_FILTER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE
Logical Name
T_FILTER
Definition
Maximum time a handover alarm is maintained while no more alarm

condition is detected.
Coding rules
step size = 2 x SACCH frames = 0.96s. Coded over 5 bits:0: 0s,

1: 0.96s, ..., 31: 29.76s
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
607 / 1436
5.2.248 (HO_MARGIN) - (HOmargin (0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HO_MARGIN
Logical Name
HOmargin (0,n)
Definition
Difference in power budget (PBGT) between cell(0) and cell(n) which

is required for a power budget HO.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-127
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
5 dB
Umbrella
5 dB
Concentric
5 dB
Concentric Umbrella
5 dB
Microcell
4 dB
Minicell
5 dB
Extended inner cell
5 dB
Extended outer cell
5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
608 / 1436
No
5.2.249 (HO_MARGIN_DIST) - (HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HO_MARGIN_DIST
Logical Name
HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n)
Definition
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on distance handover

causes.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-127
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
2 dB
Umbrella
2 dB
Concentric
2 dB
Concentric Umbrella
2 dB
Microcell
5 dB
Minicell
2 dB
Extended inner cell
-29 dB
Extended outer cell
5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
609 / 1436
5.2.250 (HO_MARGIN_LEV) - (HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HO_MARGIN_LEV
Logical Name
HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n)
Definition
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on level handover

causes.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-127
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
2 dB
Umbrella
2 dB
Concentric
0 dB
Concentric Umbrella
0 dB
Microcell
5 dB
Minicell
0 dB
Extended inner cell
-29 dB
Extended outer cell
5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
610 / 1436
No
5.2.251 (HO_MARGIN_QUAL) - (HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HO_MARGIN_QUAL
Logical Name
HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n)
Definition
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on quality handover

causes
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-127
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
1 dB
Umbrella
1 dB
Concentric
1 dB
Concentric Umbrella
1 dB
Microcell
5 dB
Minicell
1 dB
Extended inner cell
-29 dB
Extended outer cell
5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
611 / 1436
5.2.252 (HR_ENABLED) - (HR_ENABLED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HR_ENABLED
Logical Name
HR_ENABLED
Definition
This flag controls if Half Rate TCH is enabled.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
612 / 1436
5.2.253 (IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE) - (IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE
Logical Name
IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL
Definition
This flag indicates whether or not a transmission alarm triggers the

telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards
MSC). Note that the O&M activities are not dependent on this flag.
Coding rules
0: transmission alarms are not ignored and the telecom defence

activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are
triggered;
1: transmission alarms are ignored and telecom defence activities
(call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are not triggered;
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE = IP, should be set to FALSE. Due to

TDM switching on TC side, there is no more interaction between
Atermux and ATR failures.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
613 / 1436
5.2.254 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IMSI Attach/Detach
Logical Name
ATT (BSC)
Definition
This flag indicates to the MS if IMSI Attach/detach procedure is

allowed in the cell.
Coding rules
0: not allowed, 1: allowed
Mandatory rules
Equal to ATT (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
614 / 1436
5.2.255 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IMSI Attach/Detach
Logical Name
ATT (MFS)
Definition
This flag indicates to the MS whether IMSI Attach/detach procedure

is allowed in the cell.
Coding rules
0: not allowed, 1: allowed
Mandatory rules
Equal to ATT (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
615 / 1436
5.2.256 (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name
IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is indefinite for

circuit switched calls.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0 OR LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <=

IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
45
45
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
616 / 1436
5.2.257 (INTAVE) - (INTAVE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
INTAVE
Logical Name
INTAVE
Definition
Averaging period for interference measurements on idle TCH

timeslots.
Coding rules
step size=1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
INTAVE < T_INTRF_L3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
617 / 1436
5.2.258 (INTERCELL_HO) - (HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
INTERCELL_HO
Logical Name
HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED
Definition
This flag enables/disables the execution of all outgoing intercell

handovers.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Valid for both TCH and SDCCH. This parameter has no influence
on Directed Retry
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
618 / 1436
5.2.259 (Interference bands 1-2 limit) - (INTFBD1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Interference bands 1-2 limit
Logical Name
INTFBD1
Definition
Limit between interference band 1 and interference band 2.
Coding rules
Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules
INTFBD1 < INTFBD2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
619 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
INTFBD2
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
INTFBD3 > INTFBD2 > INTFBD1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-95
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
620 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
INTFBD3
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-90
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
621 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
INTFBD4
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-85
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
622 / 1436
5.2.263 (INTRACELL_HO) - (HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
INTRACELL_HO
Logical Name
HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED
Definition
This flag enables/disables the execution of intracell handovers.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Valid for both TCH and SDCCH.

The flags specific to the TFO feature, I.e. EN_TFO,
EN_TFO_MATCH, EN_TFO_OPT,
EN_IPE_PREF_CODEC_TYPE, are set independently of the flag
HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.
Additionally, the flag related to handover cause 30,
EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO is set
independently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.
The handovers for TFO reasons (cause 29) and RAE4 reasons
(cause 30) can therefore
be performed even if HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = disabled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
623 / 1436
5.2.264 (Keep codec on handover) - (KEEP_CODEC_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Keep codec on handover
Logical Name
KEEP_CODEC_HO
Definition
Indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec for internal
incoming handovers.
Coding rules
0:free choice of the codec ; 1:try to maintain codec for TFO calls
only; 2: try to maintain codec for all calls
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
624 / 1436
5.2.265 (L_LOAD_OBJ) - (L_LOAD_OBJ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_LOAD_OBJ
Logical Name
L_LOAD_OBJ
Definition
Low threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to increase

MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules
step size = 10%
Mandatory rules
L_LOAD_OBJ <= H_LOAD_OBJ
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
See TRXnb
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
See TRXnb
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
10
20
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
625 / 1436
5.2.266 (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Logical Name
L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Definition
Minimum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
L_MIN_DWELL_TIME <= H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
626 / 1436
5.2.267 (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO) - (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXLEV_CPT_HO
Logical Name
L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n)
Definition
Minimum received downlink level from cell n for umbrella to neighbour

lower layer cell n handover or from classical band to preferred band
cell n handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-85
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
627 / 1436
5.2.268 (L_RXLEV_DL_H) - (L_RXLEV_DL_H)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXLEV_DL_H
Logical Name
L_RXLEV_DL_H
Definition
Downlink level threshold for handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
L_RXLEV_DL_H < U_RXLEV_DL_P.

L_RXLEV_DL_H < RXLEV_DL_IH
Recommended rules
L_RXLEV_D_H < L_RXLEV_DL_P

If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND
FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or
"EGSM" or "DCS 1900":
RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to
concentric and monoband cell.)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-96
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-91 dBm (19)
Umbrella
-91 dBm (19)
Concentric
-91 dBm (19)
Concentric Umbrella
-91 dBm (19)
Microcell
-96 dBm (14)
Minicell
-91 dBm (19)
Extended inner cell
-96 dBm (14)
Extended outer cell
-98 dBm (12)
Nb of TRX Dependent
628 / 1436
No
5.2.269 (L_RXLEV_DL_P) - (L_RXLEV_DL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXLEV_DL_P
Logical Name
L_RXLEV_DL_P
Definition
Lower downlink level threshold for power control.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
L_RXLEV_DL_P < U_RXLEV_DL_P
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-85
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
629 / 1436
5.2.270 (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR) - (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR
Logical Name
L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
Definition
Minimum level received from neighbour cell n to allow forced directed

retry to cell n.
Coding rules
Coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-110
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-85 dBm (25)
Umbrella
-85 dBm (25)
Concentric
-85 dBm (25)
Concentric Umbrella
-85 dBm (25)
Microcell
-70 dBm (40)
Minicell
-85 dBm (25)
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
630 / 1436
No
5.2.271 (L_RXLEV_UL_H) - (L_RXLEV_UL_H)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXLEV_UL_H
Logical Name
L_RXLEV_UL_H
Definition
Uplink level threshold for handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
L_RXLEV_UL_H < U_RXLEV_UL_P

L_RXLEV_UL_H < RXLEV_UL_IH
Recommended rules
L_RXLEV_UL_H < L_RXLEV_UL_P

RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-100 dBm (10)
Umbrella
-100 dBm (10)
Concentric
-100 dBm (10)
Concentric Umbrella
-100 dBm (10)
Microcell
-100 dBm (10)
Minicell
-100 dBm (10)
Extended inner cell
-100 dBm (10)
Extended outer cell
-100 dBm (10)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
631 / 1436
5.2.272 (L_RXLEV_UL_P) - (L_RXLEV_UL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXLEV_UL_P
Logical Name
L_RXLEV_UL_P
Definition
Lower uplink level threshold for power control.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
L_RXLEV_UL_P < U_RXLEV_UL_P
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-90
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-95 dBm (15)
Umbrella
-95 dBm (15)
Concentric
-95 dBm (15)
Concentric Umbrella
-95 dBm (15)
Microcell
-85 dBm (25)
Minicell
-95 dBm (15)
Extended inner cell
-95 dBm (15)
Extended outer cell
-95 dBm (15)
Nb of TRX Dependent
632 / 1436
No
5.2.273 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_H
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_H
Definition
Downlink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (neither
AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
L_RXQUAL_DL_H >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Higher value is the worst quality
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
633 / 1436
5.2.274 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR
Definition
Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-NB

calls.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
634 / 1436
5.2.275 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition
Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-WB

GMSK calls.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
635 / 1436
5.2.276 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Definition
Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of any calls,

except the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL
FACCH and Repeated SACCH are activated.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
L_RXQUAL_DL_P > U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Highest value is the worst quality.

There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH,
for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCH
and SACCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
636 / 1436
5.2.277 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH) (L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Definition
Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDm
command and response frames) and Repeated SACCH are
activated.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1

(1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Recommended rules
To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends

:
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- Highest value is the worst quality.
- If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_DL_P
in the previous release, then the new parameter
L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in the
CDE table with THAT customized value.
-Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
637 / 1436
5.2.278 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
Definition
Uplink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (nether
AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
L_RXQUAL_UL_H >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Higher value is the worst quality
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
638 / 1436
5.2.279 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR
Definition
Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-NB calls.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
639 / 1436
5.2.280 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Definition
Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-WB

GMSK calls.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
640 / 1436
5.2.281 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Definition
Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of any calls, except
the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL FACCH
and Repeated SACCH are activated.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
L_RXQUAL_UL_P > U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Highest value is the worst quality.

There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH,
for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCH
and SACCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
641 / 1436
5.2.282 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH) (L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Logical Name
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH
Definition
Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDm
command and response frames) and Repeated SACCH are
activated.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1

(1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Recommended rules
To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends

:
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

- Highest value is the worst quality.
- If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_UL_P
in the previous release, then the new parameter
L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in the
CDE table with THAT customized value.
- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
642 / 1436
5.2.283 (LAC) - (LAC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LAC
Logical Name
LAC (BSC)
Definition
Location Area Code.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules

Equal to LAC (MFS)
A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)
shall have the same LAC.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
643 / 1436
5.2.284 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LAC
Logical Name
LAC(n) (BSC)
Definition
Location Area Code of adjacent cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.

Equal to LAC(n)(MFS).
shall have the same.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
644 / 1436
5.2.285 (Link_factor) - (Linkfactor (0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Link_factor
Logical Name
Linkfactor (0,n)
Definition
Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to handicap or

favour cell n.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-24
24
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
645 / 1436
5.2.286 (Load computation in outer zone) - (EN_LOAD_OUTER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load computation in outer zone
Logical Name
EN_LOAD_OUTER
Definition
Flag to enable/disable the load computation on the outer zone of a

Concentric/multiband cell instead of the load computation on the
whole cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
When enabled, the values of the parameters FREElevel_1 to

FREElevel_4 need to be updated to number of TRX considered in
the load computation.
EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both
"Enabled".
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
significant only for concentric and multiband cells.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
646 / 1436
5.2.287 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Logical Name
LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Definition
Number of load samples (received every TCH_INFO_PERIOD) for

load averaging.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
30
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
647 / 1436
5.2.288 (Load_Factor_1) - (Loadfactor_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Factor_1
Logical Name
Loadfactor_1
Definition
Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account

the TCH load in the candidate cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
648 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Factor_2
Logical Name
Loadfactor_2
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 >= Loadfactor_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-2
Umbrella
-2
Concentric
-2
Concentric Umbrella
-2
Microcell
-2
Minicell
-2
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
649 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Factor_3
Logical Name
Loadfactor_3
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-5
Umbrella
-5
Concentric
-5
Concentric Umbrella
-5
Microcell
-4
Minicell
-5
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
650 / 1436
No

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Factor_4
Logical Name
Loadfactor_4
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-7
Umbrella
-7
Concentric
-7
Concentric Umbrella
-7
Microcell
-6
Minicell
-7
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
651 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Factor_5
Logical Name
Loadfactor_5
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadfactor_5 <= Loadfactor_4
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-10
Umbrella
-10
Concentric
-10
Concentric Umbrella
-10
Microcell
-8
Minicell
-10
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
652 / 1436
No
5.2.293 (Load_Level_1) - (Loadlevel_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Level_1
Logical Name
Loadlevel_1
Definition
Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
653 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Level_2
Logical Name
Loadlevel_2
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
654 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Level_3
Logical Name
Loadlevel_3
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 < Loadlevel_4
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
80
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
655 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Load_Level_4
Logical Name
Loadlevel_4
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Loadlevel_4 > Loadlevel_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
90
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
656 / 1436
5.2.297 (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name
LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is low for circuit
switched calls.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
If LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD is set to 0 in a given cell n, then no

Handover Cause 23 (i.e. Traffic Handovers) can be triggered towards
that cell n.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
20
20
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
657 / 1436
5.2.298 (LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (L_TIME_ADVANCE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE
Logical Name
L_TIME_ADVANCE
Definition
Low threshold to trigger handover cause "too short distance" in outer

cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
63
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
658 / 1436
No
5.2.299 (Lowest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Lowest BA range ARFCNs
Logical Name
RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13)
Definition
Lowest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information

Element.
Coding rules
Coded on 16 bits.
Mandatory rules
RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
-1
1023
-1
External Comment
RANGEi_LOWER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA

Range" IE
Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not
significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator
of end of BA Range)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
659 / 1436
5.2.300 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LSA_ID_I
Logical Name
LSA_ID_array (BSC)
Definition
List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5).
Coding rules
coded on 3 bytes max
Mandatory rules
Equal to LSA_ID_array (MFS)
Recommended rules
The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd
number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number),
as defined in GSM 03.03.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16777215
16777215
External Comment
The default value depends on the configuration. The value given

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
660 / 1436
5.2.301 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LSA_ID_I
Logical Name
LSA_ID_array (MFS)
Definition
List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to LSA_ID_array (BSC)
Recommended rules
The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd
number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number),
as defined in GSM 03.03.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16777215
16777215
External Comment
The default value depends on the configuration. The value given

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
661 / 1436
5.2.302 (LSA_ID_I(n)) - (LSA_ID_array (n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LSA_ID_I(n)
Logical Name
LSA_ID_array (n)
Definition
List of authorised LSAs on a neighbour cell (up to 5).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16777215
16777215
External Comment
This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure
the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter
is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an
OMC internal cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
662 / 1436
5.2.303 (LSA_OFFSET) - (LSA_OFFSET)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LSA_OFFSET
Logical Name
LSA_OFFSET
Definition
Offset to be used for LSA cell reselection between cells with the
same LSA priorities.
Coding rules
coded from 0 to 7, where 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 4 dB, 2 = 8 dB, 3 = 16 dB,

4 = 24 dB, 5 = 32 dB, 6 = 48 dB, 7 = 64 dB.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
64
External Comment
The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
663 / 1436
5.2.304 (LSA_PRIO_THR) - (PRIO_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LSA_PRIO_THR
Logical Name
PRIO_THR
Definition
Signal threshold for applying LSA cell reselection.
Coding rules
coded from 0 to 7; step size = 6 dB (i.e. 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 6 dB, 2 = 12

dB, 3 = 18 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 30 dB, 6 = 36 dB, 7 = infinite = 42 dB).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
42
42
External Comment
The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.

The maximum and default values correspond to an infinite threshold.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
664 / 1436
5.2.305 (MATE_CI) - (MATE_CI (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MATE_CI
Logical Name
MATE_CI (BSC)
Definition
Cell Identity of the Mate cell
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MATE_CI (BSC) = MATE_CI (MFS)

If one mate cell is configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0) then the
other mate cell shall also be configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0)
For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to
65535 at the same time
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
665 / 1436
5.2.306 (MATE_LAC) - (MATE_LAC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MATE_LAC
Logical Name
MATE_LAC
Definition
Location Area Code of the Mate cell.
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to

65535 at the same time
shall have the same LAC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
666 / 1436
5.2.307 (MAX_POW_INC) - (MAX_POW_INC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_POW_INC
Logical Name
MAX_POW_INC
Definition
Maximum Power increase in one power command.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
667 / 1436
5.2.308 (MAX_POW_RED) - (MAX_POW_RED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_POW_RED
Logical Name
MAX_POW_RED
Definition
Maximum Power reduction in one power command.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
668 / 1436
5.2.309 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RETRANS
Logical Name
Max_retrans (BSC)
Definition
Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the

MS on the RACH.
Coding rules
Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01,

10 and 11
Mandatory rules
Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
669 / 1436
5.2.310 (MEAS_STAT_BFI_1) - (MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_1
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1]
Definition
Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used

for Radio Measurements Statistics.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
670 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_2
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [2]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_BFI3 > MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
671 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_3
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [3]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
672 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_4
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [4]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
673 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_5
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [5]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
674 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_6
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [6]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
10
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
675 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_7
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [7]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
14
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
676 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_8
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [8]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
18
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
677 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_9
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [9]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_BFI9 > MEAS_STAT_BFI8
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
24
22
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
678 / 1436
5.2.319 (MEAS_STAT_C_I_1) - (MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_1
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1]
Definition
Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define

bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics.
Coding rules
coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB)
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
-12
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
679 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_2
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [2]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 < MEAS_STAT_CI3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
-9
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
680 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_3
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [3]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
-6
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
681 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_4
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [4]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
-3
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
682 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_5
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [5]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
683 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_6
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [6]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
684 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_7
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [7]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
685 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_8
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [8]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
686 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_9
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [9]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_CI8 < MEAS_STAT_CI9
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-62
62
12
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
687 / 1436
5.2.328 (MEAS_STAT_LEV_1) - (MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_1
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1]
Definition
Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio

Measurements Statistics.
Coding rules
coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-53
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
688 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_2
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [2]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-60
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
689 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_3
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [3]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-66
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
690 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_4
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [4]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-72
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
691 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_5
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [5]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-79
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
692 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_6
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [6]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-85
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
693 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_7
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [7]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-91
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
694 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_8
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [8]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-97
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
695 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_9
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [9]
Definition

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_LEV_8 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_9
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-109
-48
-104
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
696 / 1436
5.2.337 (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1) - (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1]
Definition
Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio

Coding rules
coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109
dB)
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 < MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
-50
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
697 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 >

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
-30
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
698 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
-20
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
699 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
-10
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
700 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL4
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
701 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL5
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
10
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
702 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL6
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
20
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
703 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules

MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL7
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
30
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
704 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding rules
dB)
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL9 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL8
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-109
109
50
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
705 / 1436
5.2.346 (MEAS_STAT_S_1) - (MEAS_STAT_S_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_1
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [1]
Definition
Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_S1 < MEAS_STAT_S2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
706 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_2
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [2]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_S3 > MEAS_STAT_S2 > MEAS_STAT_S1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
707 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_3
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [3]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
708 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_4
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [4]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
12
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
709 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_5
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [5]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
14
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
710 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_6
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [6]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
16
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
711 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_7
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [7]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
18
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
712 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_8
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [8]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
20
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
713 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_S_9
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_S_i [9]
Definition

Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_S9 > MEAS_STAT_S8
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
22
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
714 / 1436
5.2.355 (MEAS_STAT_TA_1) - (MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1])

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_1
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1]
Definition
Upper limit of the first TA band, lower limit of the second TA band
(for the RMS TA measurements)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
0 < MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
715 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_2
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [2]
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd TA band, lower limit of the 3rd TA band (for the
RMS TA measurements)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
13
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
716 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_3
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [3]
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd TA band, lower limit of the 4th TA band (for the
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
19
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
717 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_4
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [4]
Definition
Upper limit of the 4th TA band, lower limit of the 5th TA band (for the
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
25
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
718 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_5
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [5]
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
31
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
719 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_6
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [6]
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
37
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
720 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_7
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [7]
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
43
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
721 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_8
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [8]
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
49
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
722 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_9
Logical Name
MEAS_STAT_TA_i [9]
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
MEAS_STAT_TA_8 < MEAS_STAT_TA_9 < 63
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
62
55
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
723 / 1436
5.2.364 (MIN_CONNECT_TIME) - (MIN_CONNECT_TIME)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_CONNECT_TIME
Logical Name
MIN_CONNECT_TIME
Definition
Maximum connection time after a handover in an overlaid cell to

declare the MS "fast" when leaving the cell with a handover.
Coding rules
step size=1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
20 s
Minicell
40 s
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
724 / 1436
No
5.2.365 (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL) - (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_RLF_TIME_DL
Logical Name
MIN_RLF_TIME_DL
Definition
Minimum time before detecting a radio link failure of a DL TBF,

triggered by N3105 or NstagnatingWindowDL.
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to set a value close to the time of temporary very

bad radio conditions that the operator would like to support during a
DL TBF. Typically, a few seconds.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
25000
4000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
725 / 1436
5.2.366 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Logical Name
MCC (BSC)
Definition
Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:
- MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).
- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same
(MCC,MNC) couple.
- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be
selected from the set of own PLMNs.
- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be
selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
999
External Comment
The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated

here is for implementation purposes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
726 / 1436
5.2.367 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Logical Name
MNC (BSC)
Definition
Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).
(MCC,MNC) couple.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
999
External Comment
The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated

The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.
MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F
binary coded 1111)
MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
727 / 1436
5.2.368 (MS_P_CON_ACK) - (MS_P_CON_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_P_CON_ACK
Logical Name
MS_P_CON_ACK
Definition
Supervision of the MS Power Control procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
3s
Umbrella
3s
Concentric
3s
Concentric Umbrella
3s
Microcell
2s
Minicell
3s
Extended inner cell
3s
Extended outer cell
3s
Nb of TRX Dependent
728 / 1436
No
5.2.369 (MS_P_CON_INT) - (MS_P_CON_INT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_P_CON_INT
Logical Name
MS_P_CON_INT
Definition
Minimum delay between two consecutive MS power commands.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
1s
Umbrella
1s
Concentric
1s
Concentric Umbrella
1s
Microcell
0s
Minicell
1s
Extended inner cell
1s
Extended outer cell
1s
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
729 / 1436
5.2.370 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX
Definition
MS maximum allowed transmission power.
Coding rules
P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm,...., 19: 5 dBm.

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm.
DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ...,
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules
MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

differently:
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
730 / 1436
5.2.371 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)
Definition
MS maximum allowed transmission power.
Coding rules

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules
MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

differently:
-Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
731 / 1436
5.2.372 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC)
Definition

accessing the cell until otherwise commanded.
Coding rules

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

differently:
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
732 / 1436
5.2.373 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
Definition
MS maximum allowed transmission power in the inner zone of a

concentric or multiband cell.
Coding rules

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules
MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

differently:
Meaninful only in cells where: CELL_PARTITION_TYPE =
concentric.
733 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
734 / 1436
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
No
5.2.374 (MS_TXPWR_MIN) - (MS_TXPWR_MIN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MIN
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MIN
Definition
MS minimum allowed transmission power.
Coding rules
P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ...,13: 17 dBm,...,

19: 5 dBm.
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 13: 17 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,...,
15: 0 dBm.
13: 4 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.
Mandatory rules
MS_TXPWR_MIN <= MS_TXPWR_MAX and

MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
17
External Comment
The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:

Default value for P-GSM/G1: 17 dBm
Default value for GSM850: 17 dBm
Default value for DCS1800: 4 dBm
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
735 / 1436
5.2.375 (MSC Signalling Point Code) - (DPC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSC Signalling Point Code
Logical Name
DPC
Definition
Signalling Point Code of the MSC.
Coding rules
coded over 14 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
12
External Comment

- Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to FALSE.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
736 / 1436
5.2.376 (MSCR) - (MSCR (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSCR
Logical Name
MSCR (BSC)
Definition
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations

used to implement MSC software.
Coding rules
0 = MSC is release 98 or older; 1 = MSC is release 99 onwards
Mandatory rules
MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
737 / 1436
5.2.377 (MSCR) - (MSCR (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MSCR
Logical Name
MSCR (MFS)
Definition

used to implement MSC software.
Coding rules
0 = MSC is release 98 or older; 1 = MSC is release 99 onwards
Mandatory rules
MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
738 / 1436
5.2.378 (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format) (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MTP_Sequence_Number_Format
Logical Name
MTP_Sequence_Number_Format
Definition
Defines the format to be used for the sequence number of MTP2.
Coding rules
0: Normal
1: Extended
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Value "Extended" is refused by the BSC if EN_HSL=0
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
739 / 1436
5.2.379 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MULTIBAND_REPORTING
Logical Name
MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)
Definition
Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be

included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS.
Coding rules
Coded over 2 bits:

00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and
allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;
01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed
NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list,
excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and
allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.
Mandatory rules
Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
740 / 1436
5.2.380 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MULTIBAND_REPORTING
Logical Name
MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)
Definition
Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be

included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS.
Coding rules
Coded over 2 bits:

00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and
allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;
01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed
NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list,
excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;
11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and
list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.
Mandatory rules
Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
741 / 1436
5.2.381 (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Logical Name
MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
Definition
This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving

cell to trigger a multiband handover.
Coding rules
0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
742 / 1436
5.2.382 (N_BAD_SACCH) - (N_BAD_SACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_BAD_SACCH
Logical Name
N_BAD_SACCH
Definition
Number of consecutive bad SACCH frames to trigger a rescue

handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
1) N_BAD_SACCH = RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS - N_BSTXPWR_M

+1
2) In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that
T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30
seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
128
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
743 / 1436
5.2.383 (N_TCH_HO) - (N_TCH_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_TCH_HO
Logical Name
N_TCH_HO
Definition
Number of less interfered Full Rate TCH reserved for handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
744 / 1436
5.2.384 (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Logical Name
N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Definition
Number of consecutive load averages used in traffic load evaluation

process.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
745 / 1436
5.2.385 (NB_CLR_REQ) - (N_CLR_REQ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_CLR_REQ
Logical Name
N_CLR_REQ
Definition
Maximum number of CLEAR REQUEST message transmission.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
746 / 1436
5.2.386 (NB_PREF_CELLS) - (N_PREF_CELLS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_PREF_CELLS
Logical Name
N_PREF_CELLS
Definition
Maximum number of candidate cells sent in one HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
747 / 1436
5.2.387 (Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step) - (M2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step
Logical Name
M2
Definition
Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are unbarred in one

step.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
748 / 1436
5.2.388 (Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step) - (N1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step
Logical Name
N1
Definition
Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are barred in one step.
Coding rules
Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of low priority access classes.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
749 / 1436
5.2.389 (Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step) - (N2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step
Logical Name
N2
Definition
Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are unbarred in one step.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
750 / 1436
5.2.390 (Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step) - (M1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step
Logical Name
M1
Definition
Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are barred in one

step.
Coding rules
Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of high priority access classes
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
751 / 1436
5.2.391 (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP) - (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NBR_RESET_CIC_REP
Logical Name
NBR_RESET_CIC_REP
Definition
Maximum number of RESET CIRCUIT message repetitions when

not acknowledged by the MSC.
Coding rules
255: RESET CIRCUIT message is indefinitely repeated
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
752 / 1436
5.2.392 (NBR_RESET_REP) - (NBR_RESET_REP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NBR_RESET_REP
Logical Name
NBR_RESET_REP
Definition
Number of times the RESET message is sent without being

acknowledged by the MSC before an alarm is reported.
Coding rules
If NBR_RESET_REP = 0, RESET message is not sent
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
753 / 1436
5.2.393 (NCC) - (NCC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NCC
Logical Name
NCC (BSC)
Definition
Network Colour code of the cell.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits.
Mandatory rules
- Equal to NCC (MFS)

- NCC (BSC) shall be included in NCC_permited
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
754 / 1436
5.2.394 (NCC) - (NCC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NCC
Logical Name
NCC (MFS)
Definition
Network Colour code of the cell.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits.
Mandatory rules
- Equal to NCC (BSC)

- NCC (MFS) shall be included in NCC_permited
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
755 / 1436
5.2.395 (NCC) - (NCC(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NCC
Logical Name
NCC(n)
Definition
Network Colour code of the neighbour cell.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits.
Mandatory rules
NCC(n) shall be included in NCC_permited of the serving cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

This parameter is for every cell (OMC external cells and OMC
internal cells). The operator needs to configure the value of that
parameter for every cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
756 / 1436
5.2.396 (NCC permitted) - (NCC_permitted)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NCC permitted
Logical Name
NCC_permitted
Definition
Indicates which NCC values the MS considers as belonging to the

network.
Coding rules
Coded over 8 bits. each bit corresponds to a NCC value: MSB

corresponds to NCC = 7, LSB corresponds to NCC = 0. For each
bit:0= NCC not permitted, 1= NCC permitted
Mandatory rules
NCC of the serving cell and of its neighbor cells shall be included in
NCC_permited
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Bitmap
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
757 / 1436
5.2.397 (NCI) - (NCI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NCI
Logical Name
NCI
Definition
This flag indicates to the MS if it reports a HANDOVER FAILURE in

case of out of range timing advance.
Coding rules
0: Out of range timing advance is ignored, 1: Out of range timing

advance triggers a Handover Failure procedure
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
758 / 1436
5.2.398 (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV) - (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV
Logical Name
NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n)
Definition
Threshold of maximum received level from the neighbour cells for

cause 13.
Coding rules
coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-47
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
-47 dBm (63)
Concentric Umbrella
-47 dBm (63)
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
759 / 1436
5.2.399 (NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO) - (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO
Logical Name
NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO
Definition
Number of full rate TCH reserved for incoming emergency handovers

(plus Cause 12 and Cause 27 handovers).
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
The Pre-emption procedure (in case EN_TCH_PREEMPT =

enabled) might use these reserved TCHs in order to avoid releasing
an on-going call unnecessarily.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
760 / 1436
5.2.400 (NY_1) - (NY1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NY_1
Logical Name
NY1
Definition
Maximum number of repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR.
Recommended rules
For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
35
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
761 / 1436
5.2.401 (OFFSET_CA_HIGH) - (OFFSET_CA_HIGH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Logical Name
OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Definition
Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis under

high load (Handover Cause 26).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70)
Mandatory rules
OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
762 / 1436
5.2.402 (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL) - (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Logical Name
OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Definition
Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis under

normal load (Handover Cause 26).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
763 / 1436
5.2.403 (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER) - (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
Logical Name
OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
Definition
Offset which allows to take into account the radio differences

between the inner and the outer zone (especially in multiband cells).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-127
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
764 / 1436
5.2.404 (OFFSET_HOPPING_HO) - (Offset_Hopping_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
OFFSET_HOPPING_HO
Logical Name
Offset_Hopping_HO
Definition
Offset applied in the handover quality causes for radio hopping

channels.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
765 / 1436
5.2.405 (OFFSET_HOPPING_PC) - (Offset_Hopping_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
OFFSET_HOPPING_PC
Logical Name
Offset_Hopping_PC
Definition
Offset applied in the power control quality causes for hopping radio
channels.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
766 / 1436
5.2.406 (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV) - (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV
Logical Name
OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n)
Definition
Minimum received level from umbrella cell n to allow handover cause

"level uplink micro-cell" or "level downlink micro-cell".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-80
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
-88 dBm (22)
Minicell
-88 dBm (22)
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
767 / 1436
5.2.407 (Own SPC) - (OPC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Own SPC
Logical Name
OPC
Definition
Signalling Point Code of the BSC.
Coding rules
coded over 14 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
12
External Comment
- Must be equal to DPC and SSF used by the MSC and RNC and
SMLC for adressing the BSC.
- Parameter change: Before any modification of the OPC, the
BSS-TEL is to be previously locked. This procedure leads the BSC
to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear)
before shutting down the on going calls.
After modification of the OPC, the operator shall trigger a BSC
restart. The locked objects must be unlocked again to reopen the
telecom service.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
768 / 1436
5.2.408 (PAGING) - (PAG_BAR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAGING
Logical Name
PAG_BAR
Definition
This flag indicates if transmission of Pagings is allowed in the cell.
Coding rules
0: Pagings are not barred, 1: Pagings are barred
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
this flag can be used by an operator to temporarily prevent phones

from ringing in specific cells
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
769 / 1436
5.2.409 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name
PENALTY_TIME(BSC)
Definition

criterion.
Coding rules
value
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
620
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
inhibited (31)
Umbrella
inhibited (31)
Concentric
inhibited (31)
Concentric Umbrella
inhibited (31)
Microcell
20 s (0)
Minicell
20 s (0)
Extended inner cell
inhibited (31)
Extended outer cell
inhibited (31)
Nb of TRX Dependent
770 / 1436
No
5.2.410 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name
PENALTY_TIME(MFS)
Definition

criterion.
Coding rules
value.
Mandatory rules
PENALTY_TIME(MFS) = PENALTY_TIME(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
620
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
771 / 1436
5.2.411 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name
PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS)
Definition

criterion.
Coding rules
value
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
620
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
772 / 1436
5.2.412 (PING_PONG_HANDICAP) - (PING_PONG_HCP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PING_PONG_HANDICAP
Logical Name
PING_PONG_HCP
Definition
A transient handicap is applied to power budget of previous cell to

avoid a "ping-pong" effect.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
127
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
773 / 1436
5.2.413 (POW_INC_FACTOR) - (POW_INC_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
POW_INC_FACTOR
Logical Name
POW_INC_FACTOR
Definition
Weighting factor for power increase.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
POW_INC_FACTOR >= POW_RED_FACTOR
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.8
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
774 / 1436
5.2.414 (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Logical Name
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Definition
Power increase step size in case of power command triggered on

quality criterion.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB, ..., 7: 14 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
POW_INC_STEP_SIZE > POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
775 / 1436
5.2.415 (POW_RED_FACTOR) - (POW_RED_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
POW_RED_FACTOR
Logical Name
POW_RED_FACTOR
Definition
Weighting factor for power reduction.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
POW_RED_FACTOR <= POW_INC_FACTOR
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
776 / 1436
5.2.416 (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Logical Name
POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Definition
Power reduction step size in case of power command triggered on

quality criterion.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
POW_RED_STEP_SIZE < POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
777 / 1436
5.2.417 (Preference Mark) - (TRX_PREF_MARK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Preference Mark
Logical Name
TRX_PREF_MARK
Definition
Preference mark assigned to a given TRX.
Coding rules
0: PS/CS TRX: This TRX can carry PS and CS traffic and has the
lowest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to
serve a CS call.
1: CS TRX with preference mark 1: This TRX can carry only CS
traffic and has the preference mark 1 in the TCH sub-channel
selection process used to serve a CS call.
...
7: CS TRX with preference mark 7: This TRX can carry only CS
traffic and has the highest preference in the TCH sub-channel
selection process used to served a CS call. It means that this TRX
has the highest priority for CS traffic.
Mandatory rules
1) For a TRX in the inner zone of a monoband or multiband

concentric cell, the parameter TRX_PREF_MARK shall be set to a
non-null value.
2) For a hopping G1 TRX, if EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
= 0 and BCCH/CCCH are configured on PGSM TRX, then
TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0
3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to
check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:
CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX.
4) In case of cell shared over 2 BTSs, the GPRS TRXs of the cell (ie
TRX_PREF_MARK=0) can be either on the main sector or on the
secondary, but not on both.
5) the maximum number of PS capable TRX (ie TRX_PREF_MARK
= 0) defined in one cell is 16.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
TRX
778 / 1436
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
If EGPRS is activated in the cell, TRX_PREF_MARK (BCCH TRX)

= 0 and the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware and a
transmission pool allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shall
ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMK
and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with
3GPP TS 05.05 and 3GPP TS 05.08 requirements (or 4 dB if an
SDCCH timeslot is defined in timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
779 / 1436
5.2.418 (PREFERRED_BAND) - (PREFERRED_BAND)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PREFERRED_BAND
Logical Name
PREFERRED_BAND
Definition
Frequency band to which the multiband MS are preferentially

directed.
Coding rules
0: none, 1: GSM, 2: DCS
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
780 / 1436
5.2.419 (Preventive cyclic retransmission flag) - (EN_PCR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Preventive cyclic retransmission flag
Logical Name
EN_PCR
Definition
This flag enables preventive cyclic retransmission.
Coding rules
0 : disabled, 1 : enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter is set to 1 by the BSC in case the Ater links of a BSS
are configured as satellite links.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
781 / 1436
5.2.420 (PWRC) - (PWRC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PWRC
Logical Name
PWRC (BSC)
Definition
This flag indicates to the MS if it includes measurements made on

BCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel.
Coding rules
0: measurements made on BCCH frequency are included, 1:

measurements made on BCCH frequency are not included.
Mandatory rules
Equal to PWRC (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
782 / 1436
5.2.421 (PWRC) - (PWRC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PWRC
Logical Name
PWRC (MFS)
Definition
This flag indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include

measurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequency
hopping channel.
Coding rules
0: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall be included, 1:

measurements made on BCCH frequency shall not be included
Mandatory rules
Equal to PWRC (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
783 / 1436
5.2.422 (Q703_N1) - (Q703_N1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_N1
Logical Name
Q703_N1
Definition
Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
127
External Comment
not used if EN_HSL = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
784 / 1436
5.2.423 (Q703_N1_HSL) - (Q703_N1_HSL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_N1_HSL
Logical Name
Q703_N1_HSL
Definition
Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission (if HSL is

used).
Coding rules
step size 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
4095
4095
External Comment
used if EN_HSL = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
785 / 1436
5.2.424 (Q703_N2) - (Q703_N2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_N2
Logical Name
Q703_N2
Definition
Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for

retransmission.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bytes
8192
4096
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
786 / 1436
5.2.425 (Q703_N2_HSL) - (Q703_N2_HSL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_N2_HSL
Logical Name
Q703_N2_HSL
Definition
Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for

retransmission (if HSL is used).
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bytes
65535
32767
External Comment
used if EN_HSL = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
787 / 1436
5.2.426 (Q703_T1) - (Q703_T1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T1
Logical Name
Q703_T1
Definition
MTP2 timer "alignment ready".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
1/10 sec
40
50
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
788 / 1436
5.2.427 (Q703_T1_HSL) - (Q703_T1_HSL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T1_HSL
Logical Name
Q703_T1_HSL
Definition
MTP2 timer "alignment ready" for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used).
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25
350
300
External Comment
used if EN_HSL = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
789 / 1436
5.2.428 (Q703_T2) - (Q703_T2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T2
Logical Name
Q703_T2
Definition
MTP2 timer "not aligned".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
1/10 sec
150
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
790 / 1436
5.2.429 (Q703_T3) - (Q703_T3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T3
Logical Name
Q703_T3
Definition
MTP2 timer "aligned".
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
791 / 1436
5.2.430 (Q703_T4E) - (Q703_T4E)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T4E
Logical Name
Q703_T4E
Definition
MTP2 Emergency proving period.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.4
0.6
0.5
External Comment
Applicable to LSL and HSL.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
792 / 1436
5.2.431 (Q703_T4N) - (Q703_T4N)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T4N
Logical Name
Q703_T4N
Definition
MTP2 Normal proving period.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
7.5
9.5
8.2
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
793 / 1436
5.2.432 (Q703_T4N_HSL) - (Q703_T4N_HSL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T4N_HSL
Logical Name
Q703_T4N_HSL
Definition
MTP2 Normal proving period for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used).
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
70
30
External Comment
used if EN_HSL = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
794 / 1436
5.2.433 (Q703_T5) - (Q703_T5)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T5
Logical Name
Q703_T5
Definition
MTP2 timer "sending SIB".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
80
120
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
795 / 1436
5.2.434 (Q703_T6) - (Q703_T6)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T6
Logical Name
Q703_T6
Definition
MTP2 timer "remote congestion".
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
5.4
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
796 / 1436
5.2.435 (Q703_T7) - (Q703_T7)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q703_T7
Logical Name
Q703_T7
Definition
MTP2 timer "excessive delay of acknowledgement".
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
External Comment
In case of a Ater satellite connection, this parameter is set to 2

seconds by the BSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
797 / 1436
5.2.436 (Q704_T2) - (Q704_T2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q704_T2
Logical Name
Q704_T2
Definition
MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeover

acknowledgement.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.7
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
798 / 1436
5.2.437 (Q704_T4) - (Q704_T4)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q704_T4
Logical Name
Q704_T4
Definition
MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback

acknowledgement (first attempt).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
1.2
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
799 / 1436
5.2.438 (Q704_T5) - (Q704_T5)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q704_T5
Logical Name
Q704_T5
Definition
MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback

acknowledgement (second attempt).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
1.2
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
800 / 1436
5.2.439 (Q707_T1) - (Q707_T1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q707_T1
Logical Name
Q707_T1
Definition
MTP3 timer supervising the reception of signalling link test

acknowledgement.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
12
6.4
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
801 / 1436
5.2.440 (Q707_T2) - (Q707_T2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Q707_T2
Logical Name
Q707_T2
Definition
MTP3 delay between transmission of consecutive signalling link

test message.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
90
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
802 / 1436
5.2.441 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER
Logical Name
RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)
Definition
Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET

CHANNEL REQUEST filtering.
Coding rules
64: no filtering
Mandatory rules
Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS).
Recommended rules
Disable the filtering for extended cells.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
64
64
External Comment
One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL

REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with
Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are
discarded.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
803 / 1436
5.2.442 (RACH_BUSY_THRES) - (RACH_BUSY_THRES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RACH_BUSY_THRES
Logical Name
RACH_BUSY_THRES
Definition
Received level above which a RACH TS is deemed busy.
Coding rules
This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:

1: -110 dBm
5: -106 dBm
9: -102 dBm
13: -98 dBm
17: -94 dBm
21: -90 dBm
25: -86 dBm
29: -82 dBm
33: -78 dBm
37: -74 dBm
41: -70 dBm
45: -66 dBm
49: -62 dBm
53: -58 dBm
57: -54 dBm
61: -50 dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-50
-106
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
804 / 1436
5.2.443 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES
Logical Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS
Definition
Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path, for
non AMR calls, or for AMR calls (NB or WB) for which Repeated
SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS > N_BSTXPWR_M
Recommended rules
Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent

(very far to the 3GPP values):
It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message.
For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but
not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO
CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.
Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration
is artificially increased.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
255
18
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
805 / 1436
5.2.444 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR) (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR
Logical Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR
Definition
Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path

for calls using an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated
SACCH and/or Repeated DL FACCH are not activated.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR > N_BSTXPWR_M
Recommended rules
Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
255
18
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
806 / 1436
5.2.445 (RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES) - (N_BSTXPWR_M)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES
Logical Name
N_BSTXPWR_M
Definition
Counter threshold to trigger a radio link recovery.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
N_BSTXPWR_M < RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
13
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
13
Umbrella
13
Concentric
13
Concentric Umbrella
13
Microcell
15
Minicell
13
Extended inner cell
13
Extended outer cell
13
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
807 / 1436
5.2.446 (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH) - (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH
Logical Name
RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH
Definition
Repeated DL SACCH activation threshold for UL RLT (Radio Link

Timer) counter.
Dynamic activation is triggered in the BTS when the UL RLT counter
is inferior or equal to that threshold.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
127
10
External Comment
- Function available on BSC Evolution only

- The setting of this value is a trade-off between "triggering
REP_DL_SACCH soon enough to take benefit from it before drop"
and "triggering REP_DL_SACCH not too soon to let time to the
recovery mechanism to increase the output power of the BTS to its
max level before".
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
808 / 1436
5.2.447 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT
Logical Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)
Definition
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision.

This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for which
Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.
Coding rules
step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr

... 15 == 64 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
64
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
809 / 1436
5.2.448 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT
Logical Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)
Definition
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision.

This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for which
Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.
Coding rules

... 15 == 64 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
64
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
810 / 1436
5.2.449 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR
Logical Name
RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR
Definition
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision, for a call using
an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated SACCH and/or
Repeated DL FACCH are not activated.
Coding rules

... 15 == 64 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
64
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
811 / 1436
5.2.450 (REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT) (REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT
Logical Name
REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT
Definition
Legacy support for repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB or

AMR-WB GMSK calls.
This parameter concerns only the LAPDm command frames.
Coding rules
0: repeated DL FACCH enabled only for the AMR mobile stations

having indicated the support of the feature by repeated ACCH
Capability bit = 1
1: repeated DL FACCH enabled for all AMR mobile stations
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This parameter is relevant only if repeated downlink FACCH

(EN_REP_DL_FACCH) is enabled.
- The value 1 is used to tackle early implementations, ie for MS with
repeated ACCH Capability bit=0 or MS without Repeated ACCH
Capability bit (legacy MS).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
812 / 1436
5.2.451 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR) (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR
Logical Name
REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR
Definition
Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB FR calls.

Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMR
value) is inferior or equal to that threshold.
Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
off
4,75 kbit/s
5,15 kbit/s
5,90 kbit/s
6,70 kbit/s
7,40 kbit/s
7,95 kbit/s
10,2 kbit/s
12,2 kbit/s
External Comment

- When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DL
FACCH is always activated for AMR-NB FR codec (if allowed for the
call).
-Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Change
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
813 / 1436
5.2.452 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR) (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR
Logical Name
REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR
Definition
Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB HR calls.

Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
off
4,75 kbit/s
5,15 kbit/s
5,90 kbit/s
6,70 kbit/s
7,40 kbit/s
External Comment

FACCH is always activated for AMR-NB HR codec (if allowed for the
call).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
814 / 1436
5.2.453 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB) (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB
Logical Name
REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB
Definition
Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-WB GMSK calls.

Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
off
6,60 kbit/s
8,85 kbit/s
12,65 kbit/s
External Comment

FACCH is always activated for AMR-WB GMSK codec (if allowed for
the call).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
815 / 1436
5.2.454 (Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH) (Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH
Logical Name
Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH
Definition
This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high

priority messages within the schedule period for basic CBCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
shall be set to "0" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
816 / 1436
5.2.455 (Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH) (Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH
Logical Name
Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH
Definition
This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high

priority messages within the schedule period for extended CBCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
817 / 1436
5.2.456 (RESET_INDEFINITE) - (RESET_INDEFINITE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RESET_INDEFINITE
Logical Name
RESET_INDEFINITE
Definition
This flag determines whether or not the RESET message shall be

sent indefinitely (as long as it is not acknowledged).
Coding rules
0: RESET message is sent a maximum of NBR_RESET_REP times,

1: The Reset procedure is repeated until a RESET or RESET ACK
message is received.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
818 / 1436
5.2.457 (RESP_REQ) - (RESP_REQ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RESP_REQ
Logical Name
RESP_REQ
Definition
This flag controls "Response request" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules
0: IE not included, 1: IE included
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended

to include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED
message (RESP_REQ).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether
or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry
is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set
RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EXT_DR is set to enabled in order to get a
Handover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are
congested and thus to attempt other procedures.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
819 / 1436
5.2.458 (RF_RES_IND_PERIOD) - (T_INTRF_L3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RF_RES_IND_PERIOD
Logical Name
T_INTRF_L3
Definition
Delay between two consecutive RF RESOURCE INDICATION.
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) & T_INTRF_L3 >

INTAVE
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
180
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
820 / 1436
5.2.459 (RMS_TEMPLATE) - (RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RMS_TEMPLATE
Logical Name
RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX
Definition
Template of values of RMS parameters to be applied to the

concerned cell (concerns the parameters MEAS_STAT_C_Ix,
MEAS_STAT_BFIx, MEAS_STAT_LEVx, MEAS_STAT_PATH_BALx,
MEAS_STAT_Sx, EN_BALANCED_CI, VQ_AVERAGE,
VQ_BAD_RXFER, VQ_FER_THRESHOLD, VQ_GOOD_RXFER,
VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD, VQ_RXLEV, VQ_RXQUAL,
VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER).
Coding rules
coded from 1 to 16
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
821 / 1436
5.2.460 (ROT) - (ROT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ROT
Logical Name
ROT
Definition
Indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include "Time Difference"

IE in HANDOVER COMPLETE.
Coding rules
0: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is NOT included in HANDOVER

COMPLETE,
1: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is included in HANDOVER
COMPLETE
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
822 / 1436
5.2.461 (RSL_RATE (BSC)) - (RSL_RATE (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RSL_RATE (BSC)
Logical Name
RSL_RATE (BSC)
Definition
Rate used on all RSL links towards a BTS.
Coding rules
0: 16 kbit/s, 1: 64 kbit/s
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BTS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
823 / 1436
5.2.462 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Definition

cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
824 / 1436
5.2.463 (RXLEV_DL_IH) - (RXLEV_DL_IH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_DL_IH
Logical Name
RXLEV_DL_IH
Definition
Downlink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell

handover in case of bad downlink quality.
Coding rules
Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm.
Mandatory rules
RXLEV_DL_IH > L_RXLEV_DL_H
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-65
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-65 dBm (45)
Umbrella
-65 dBm (45)
Concentric
-65 dBm (45)
Concentric Umbrella
-65 dBm (45)
Microcell
-65 dBm (45)
Minicell
-65 dBm (45)
Extended inner cell
-70 dBm (40)
Extended outer cell
-60 dBm (50)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
825 / 1436
5.2.464 (RXLEV_DL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_DL_ZONE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_DL_ZONE
Logical Name
RXLEV_DL_ZONE
Definition
Downlink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-71
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
-71 dBm (39)
Concentric Umbrella
-71 dBm (39)
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
826 / 1436
No
5.2.465 (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO) - (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
Logical Name
RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
Definition
Threshold on the downlink received level above which it is not

necessary to trigger a handover on power budget (cause 12).
Coding rules
Coded over 6 bits:0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-47
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-65 dBm (45)
Umbrella
-65 dBm (45)
Concentric
-65 dBm (45)
Concentric Umbrella
-65 dBm (45)
Microcell
-65 dBm (45)
Minicell
-65 dBm (45)
Extended inner cell
-70 dBm (40)
Extended outer cell
-60 dBm (50)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
827 / 1436
5.2.466 (RXLEV_MIN_n) - (RXLEVmin(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_MIN_n
Logical Name
RXLEVmin(n)
Definition
Minimum level received from cell n to allow reception of handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-96
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-100 dBm (10)
Umbrella
-100 dBm (10)
Concentric
-100 dBm (10)
Concentric Umbrella
-100 dBm (10)
Microcell
-100 dBm (10)
Minicell
-100 dBm (10)
Extended inner cell
-100 dBm (10)
Extended outer cell
-102 dBm (8)
Nb of TRX Dependent
828 / 1436
No
5.2.467 (RXLEV_UL_IH) - (RXLEV_UL_IH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_UL_IH
Logical Name
RXLEV_UL_IH
Definition
Uplink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell

handover in case of bad uplink quality.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RXLEV_UL_IH > L_RXLEV_UL_H
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-65
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-75 dBm (35)
Umbrella
-75 dBm (35)
Concentric
-75 dBm (35)
Concentric Umbrella
-75 dBm (35)
Microcell
-65 dBm (45)
Minicell
-70 dBm (40)
Extended inner cell
-75 dBm (35)
Extended outer cell
-75 dBm (35)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
829 / 1436
5.2.468 (RXLEV_UL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_UL_ZONE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_UL_ZONE
Logical Name
RXLEV_UL_ZONE
Definition
Uplink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-78
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
-78 dBm (32)
Concentric Umbrella
-78 dBm (32)
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
830 / 1436
No
5.2.469 (Schedule Period for Basic CBCH) (Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Schedule Period for Basic CBCH
Logical Name
Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH
Definition
Length of the DRX schedule period for the basic CBCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
CBper
40
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
831 / 1436
5.2.470 (Schedule period for Extended CBCH) (Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Schedule period for Extended CBCH
Logical Name
Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH
Definition
Length of the DRX schedule period for the extended CBCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
CBper
40
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
832 / 1436
5.2.471 (SDCCH_COUNTER) - (SDCCH_COUNTER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SDCCH_COUNTER
Logical Name
SDCCH_COUNTER
Definition
Time during which SDCCH handovers are forbidden after completion

of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
SDCCH_COUNTER <= T_SDCCH_PC
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
"0" means that SDCCH handover is immediately allowed after

completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
833 / 1436
5.2.472 (SDCCH_HO) - (HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SDCCH_HO
Logical Name
HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT
Definition
The flag inhibits/enables the execution of SDCCH handovers.
Coding rules
0: SDCCH HO enabled1: SDCCH HO disabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry
Cell Type Dependent
Single
enable (0)
Umbrella
enable (0)
Concentric
enable (0)
Concentric Umbrella
enable (0)
Microcell
enable (0)
Minicell
enable (0)
Extended inner cell
disabled (1) *
Extended outer cell
disabled (1) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
834 / 1436
No
5.2.473 (Send_CM_Enquiry) - (BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Send_CM_Enquiry
Logical Name
BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY
Definition
Controls the trigger of Classmark Enquiry procedure at call

establishment time.
Coding rules
0: the classmark enquiry is never initiated by the BSC;

1: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with
ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will always initiate a classmark enquiry;
2: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message
with ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will initiate the classmark enquiry if
algorithm A5/1 is not available (information available in MS classmark
1 IE sent in the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
835 / 1436
5.2.474 (Signalling Link Code) - (SLC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Signalling Link Code
Logical Name
SLC
Definition
Signalling Link Code.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
N7 ch
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
836 / 1436
5.2.475 (SMSCB_Features_Set) - (SMSCB_Features_set)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMSCB_Features_Set
Logical Name
SMSCB_Features_set
Definition
This parameter indicates which features are usable with the SMSCB
product.
Coding rules
1: Features set 1, 2: Features set 2
Mandatory rules
Can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE = "inactive".

If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then CBC_Window shall be equal
to "1"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then SMSCB_Recovery
shall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then
for all the BSC cells Use_of_Extended_CBCH shall be set to
"No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cells
Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH shall be set to "0"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When migrating from FS1 to FS2,

USE_OF_EXTENDED_CBCH shall be set to "Yes",
CBC_WINDOW shall be set to 4.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
837 / 1436
5.2.476 (SMSCB_Phase) - (SMSCB_Phase)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMSCB_Phase
Logical Name
SMSCB_Phase
Definition
This parameter indicates whether the feature operates in GSM

Phase2 or Phase 2+ mode.
Coding rules
0: Phase 2, 1: Phase 2+
Mandatory rules
If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS1", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to

"phase2"
If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS2", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set
to "phase2+"
SMSCB_Phase can be changed only when
SMSCB_STATE="inactive"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
838 / 1436
5.2.477 (SMSCB_Recovery) - (SMSCB_Recovery)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMSCB_Recovery
Logical Name
SMSCB_Recovery
Definition
This parameter indicates if the CBC accepts the recovery-indication

in Restart-Indication message.
Coding rules
0: No, 1: Yes
Mandatory rules
shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"

can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive"
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
839 / 1436
5.2.478 (SMSCB_State) - (SMSCB_State)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMSCB_State
Logical Name
SMSCB_State
Definition
This flag indicates if the feature is activated or deactivated.
Coding rules
0: activated, 1: deactivated
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
840 / 1436
5.2.479 (Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2) - (STRIP_O5_CM2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2
Logical Name
STRIP_O5_CM2
Definition
This flag controls the format of the "Classmark 2" IE sent to the MSC.
Coding rules
0: no modification on "Classmark2" IE, 1: octet 5 of "Classmark2" IE

is stripped out
Mandatory rules
EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at

the same time.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
841 / 1436
5.2.480 (SYNCHRONISED_HO) - (EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SYNCHRONISED_HO
Logical Name
EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables synchronous handovers between

synchronized cells.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
842 / 1436
5.2.481 (T(conn est)) - (T(conn est))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T(conn est)
Logical Name
T(conn est)
Definition
SCCP timer supervising the reception of Connection Confirm

message.
Coding rules
step size = 0.5sec
Mandatory rules
T(conn est) < T9105
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
127.5
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
843 / 1436
5.2.482 (T(iar)) - (T(iar))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T(iar)
Logical Name
T(iar)
Definition
SCCP timer supervising the activity on SCCP connection.
Coding rules
step size = 6sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Must be greater than T(ias) used by the MSC

It is recommended to configure T(iar) > (2 x T(ias) used by the MSC)
+ 1 min
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
402
1530
1260
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
844 / 1436
5.2.483 (T(ias)) - (T(ias))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T(ias)
Logical Name
T(ias)
Definition
SCCP timer supervising the sending of Inactivity Test message.
Coding rules
step size = 6sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Must be less than T(iar) used by the MSC

It is recommended to configure T(ias) < (T(iar) used by the MSC
- 1 min) / 2
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
96
450
300
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
845 / 1436
5.2.484 (T(rel)) - (T(rel))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T(rel)
Logical Name
T(rel)
Definition
SCCP timer supervising the reception of Release Complete

message.
Coding rules
step size = 0.5sec, coded from 16 to 255, 16 == 8 sec, 255 == 127.5

sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
127.5
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
846 / 1436
5.2.485 (T(sst)) - (T(sst))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T(sst)
Logical Name
T(sst)
Definition
SCCP delay between sending of consecutive Subsystem Status Test

messages.
Coding rules
step size = 6sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
For BSC Evolution, ALU highly recommends setting this timer to 6

seconds to improve the BSC robustness.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
1200
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
847 / 1436
5.2.486 (T_BIND_CNF) - (T_BIND_CNF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_BIND_CNF
Logical Name
T_BIND_CNF
Definition
Maximum waiting time to get a response to a CBSE-BIND primitive.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
300
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
848 / 1436
5.2.487 (T_BURST) - (T_BURST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_BURST
Logical Name
T_BURST
Definition
Delay between consecutive bursts of BLOCK or UNBLOCK

messages.
Coding rules
step size =0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
(31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM < T1_short
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
849 / 1436
5.2.488 (T_HCP) - (T_HCP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_HCP
Logical Name
T_HCP
Definition
Time during which PING_PONG_HCP is applied after handover.
Coding rules
step size= 1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
240
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
850 / 1436
5.2.489 (T_HO_REQD_LOST) - (T_HO_REQD_LOST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_HO_REQD_LOST
Logical Name
T_HO_REQD_LOST
Definition
Supervision of the MSC response after sending of HANDOVER

REQUIRED.
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
T_HO_REQD_LOST > T7
Recommended rules
T_HO_REQD_LOST value shall be greater than the maximum time

for external handover execution
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
30
External Comment
Depends on MSC type
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
851 / 1436
5.2.490 (T_IA) - (T_IA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_IA
Logical Name
T_IA
Definition
Indicates the maximum time a CS IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

message remains in the AGCH queue.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T_IA<T3101
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
2.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
852 / 1436
5.2.491 (T_INHIBIT_CPT) - (T_INHIBIT_CPT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_INHIBIT_CPT
Logical Name
T_INHIBIT_CPT
Definition
Time during which the HO Causes 14, 21, and 24 are inhibited.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
240
External Comment
T_INHIBIT_CPT = 0 inhibits the anti ping-pong function.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
853 / 1436
5.2.492 (T_MS_CELL_REJ) - (T_MS_CELL_REJ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_MS_CELL_REJ
Logical Name
T_MS_CELL_REJ
Definition
Delay where the cells the MS failed to handover, cannot be selected

as targets in subsequent handover attempts.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
854 / 1436
5.2.493 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_PAG_CS
Logical Name
T_PAG_CS (BSC)
Definition
This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can

remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on
A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_PAG_CS (MFS)
Recommended rules
T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
855 / 1436
5.2.494 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_PAG_CS
Logical Name
T_PAG_CS (MFS)
Definition
This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can

remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on
A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_PAG_CS (BSC)
Recommended rules
T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
856 / 1436
5.2.495 (T_QHO) - (T_qho)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_QHO
Logical Name
T_qho
Definition
Maximum queuing time for Handover Requests.
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
857 / 1436
5.2.496 (T_SDCCH_PC) - (T_SDCCH_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_SDCCH_PC
Logical Name
T_SDCCH_PC
Definition
Time during which power control on SDCCH is inhibited after

completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 1 (2 x Samfr)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_SDCCH_PC >= SDCCH_COUNTER
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
2 x Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
858 / 1436
5.2.497 (T1) - (T1_short)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T1
Logical Name
T1_short
Definition
Supervision of the Blocking/Unblocking procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T1_short > (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
25.5
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
859 / 1436
5.2.498 (T11) - (T11)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T11
Logical Name
T11
Definition
Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests.
Coding rules
step size = 1 s
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
19
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
860 / 1436
5.2.499 (T11_FORCED) - (T11_FORCED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T11_FORCED
Logical Name
T11_FORCED
Definition
Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests where queuing is

not allowed by the MSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
19
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
861 / 1436
5.2.500 (T13) - (T13)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T13
Logical Name
T13
Definition
Delay for acknowledgement of RESET received from MSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
862 / 1436
5.2.501 (T17) - (T17)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T17
Logical Name
T17
Definition
Period of time where a new OVERLOAD that is received from the

MSC, is not processed after reception of a processed OVERLOAD.
Coding rules
step size: 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
T17 < T18_overload
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
863 / 1436
5.2.502 (T18) - (T18)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T18
Logical Name
T18
Definition
Delay between consecutive debarring actions after a BSS outage.
Coding rules
Step size: 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
864 / 1436
5.2.503 (T18_OVERLOAD) - (T18_Overload)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T18_OVERLOAD
Logical Name
T18_Overload
Definition
Delay between the latest MSC OVERLOAD message or DTC

internal overload detection and debarring action. Also delay between
consecutive debarring actions for overload procedure and Telecom
global reset procedure.
Coding rules
step size: 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
T18_OVERLOAD > T17
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
865 / 1436
5.2.504 (T19) - (T19)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T19
Logical Name
T19
Definition
Supervision of the Reset Circuit procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
25.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
866 / 1436
5.2.505 (T20) - (T20)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T20
Logical Name
T20
Definition
Supervision of Circuit Group Blocking procedure.
Coding rules
step size=0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
25.5
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
867 / 1436
5.2.506 (T200 (BSC)) - (T200 (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T200 (BSC)
Logical Name
T200 (BSC)
Definition
Supervision of acknowledgements.
Coding rules
step size: 100ms; (1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 300ms, 4: 400ms, .. .

, 10: 1000ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The recommended value for Abis via satellite is 1000 ms.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
A-bis link
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
300
1000
300
External Comment
The value of T200 (BSC) is driven by the associated Abis connection

type.
It can be changed indirectly from the OMC (through the change of
Abis connection type)
The default value 300 ms corresponds to Abis terrestrial link.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
868 / 1436
5.2.507 (T200_TF) - (T200_TF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T200_TF
Logical Name
T200_TF
Definition
Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH FR associated)

SAPI 0.
Coding rules
Step size = 20 msec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
200
5100
200
External Comment
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going

traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS calls
established after modification.
When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automatically
added by the BTS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
869 / 1436
5.2.508 (T200_TH) - (T200_TH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T200_TH
Logical Name
T200_TH
Definition
Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH HR associated)

SAPI 0.
Coding rules
step size = 20 msec.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
180
5100
180
External Comment
Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going

traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS calls
established after modification.
When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automatically
added by the BTS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
870 / 1436
5.2.509 (T3101) - (T3101)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3101
Logical Name
T3101
Definition
Supervision of the Immediate Assignment procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T3101 > 2s
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
871 / 1436
5.2.510 (T3103) - (T3103)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3103
Logical Name
T3103
Definition
Supervision of the Internal Handover procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_D.

T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_FR.
T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_HR.
T3103 > T3106_D.
T3103 > T3106_F
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
16.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
872 / 1436
5.2.511 (T3105D) - (T3105_D)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3105D
Logical Name
T3105_D
Definition
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION

on SDCCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
T3105_D x Ny1 < T3103

T3105_D x Ny1 < T9113
Recommended rules
T3105_D x Ny1 > T3124

T3105_D << T3124 (T3124 = 675 ms on SDCCH)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
200
220
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
873 / 1436
5.2.512 (T3105D_STOP) - (T3105_D_STOP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3105D_STOP
Logical Name
T3105_D_STOP
Definition
Criterion to stop T3105_D timer.
Coding rules
0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of

any correct L2 signalling frame
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
874 / 1436
5.2.513 (T3105F_FR) - (T3105_F_FR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3105F_FR
Logical Name
T3105_F_FR
Definition

on FACCH for FR channels.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T3103

T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T9113
Recommended rules
T3105_F_FR x Ny1 > T3124

T3105_F_FR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
20
250
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
875 / 1436
5.2.514 (T3105F_HR) - (T3105_F_HR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3105F_HR
Logical Name
T3105_F_HR
Definition

on FACCH for HR channels.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T3103

T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T9113
Recommended rules
T3105_F_HR x Ny1 > T3124

T3105_F_HR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
20
250
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
876 / 1436
5.2.515 (T3105F_STOP) - (T3105_F_STOP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3105F_STOP
Logical Name
T3105_F_STOP
Definition
Criterion to stop T3105_F timer.
Coding rules

any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
877 / 1436
5.2.516 (T3106D) - (T3106_D)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3106D
Logical Name
T3106_D
Definition
Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target

cell in case of SDCCH synchronous handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
T3106_D < T3103

T3106_D < T9113
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
1100
1500
1200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
878 / 1436
5.2.517 (T3106D_STOP) - (T3106_D_STOP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3106D_STOP
Logical Name
T3106_D_STOP
Definition
Criterion to stop T3106_D timer.
Coding rules

any correct L2 signalling frame
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
879 / 1436
5.2.518 (T3106F) - (T3106_F)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3106F
Logical Name
T3106_F
Definition
Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target

cell in case of TCH synchronous handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
T3106_F < T3103

T3106_F < T9113
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
500
1000
1000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
880 / 1436
5.2.519 (T3106F_STOP) - (T3106_F_STOP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3106F_STOP
Logical Name
T3106_F_STOP
Definition
Criterion to stop T3106_F timer.
Coding rules

any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
881 / 1436
5.2.520 (T3107) - (T3107)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3107
Logical Name
T3107
Definition
Supervision of the Assignment procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
882 / 1436
5.2.521 (T3109) - (T3109)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3109
Logical Name
T3109
Definition
Supervision of the Channel Release procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T3109 > RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT + 1s
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
35
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
883 / 1436
5.2.522 (T3111) - (T3111)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3111
Logical Name
T3111
Definition
Delay of the RF Channel Release procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T3111 > 2 x T200_D. T3111 > 2 x T200_TH. T3111 = T3110 (MS)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
884 / 1436
5.2.523 (T3212) - (T3212 (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3212
Logical Name
T3212 (BSC)
Definition
This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive

Periodic Location Update procedures.
Coding rules
0: no periodic location update
Mandatory rules
Equal to T3212 (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
6 mn
255
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
885 / 1436
5.2.524 (T4) - (T4)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T4
Logical Name
T4
Definition
Supervision of RESET message sent to the MSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
6553.5
External Comment
T4 shall be set greater than T2 (timer in MSC).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
886 / 1436
5.2.525 (T7) - (T7)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T7
Logical Name
T7
Definition
Timer controlling the repetition of HANDOVER REQUIRED.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T7 < T_HO_REQD_LOST
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
887 / 1436
5.2.526 (T8) - (T8)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T8
Logical Name
T8
Definition
Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the serving BSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
888 / 1436
5.2.527 (T9104) - (T9104)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9104
Logical Name
T9104
Definition
Supervision of the call clearing procedure when triggered by the BSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
889 / 1436
5.2.528 (T9105) - (T9105)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9105
Logical Name
T9105
Definition
Supervision of the SCCP Connection procedure.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T9105 > T(conn est)
Recommended rules
T9105 > max T3210. T9105 > max T3220. T9105 > max T3230
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
11
6553,5
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
890 / 1436
5.2.529 (T9112) - (T9112)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9112
Logical Name
T9112
Definition
Supervision of the channel modification in the MS.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T9112 >= 15s. T9112 <= T9114. T9112 is inferior to the MSC timer
supervising the Modify procedure.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
6553.5
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
891 / 1436
5.2.530 (T9113) - (T9113)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T9113
Logical Name
T9113
Definition
Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the target BSC.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
T9113 > T3105_D x Ny1. T9113 > T3105_F x Ny1. T9113 >
T3106_D. T9113 > T3106_F
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
892 / 1436
5.2.531 (TA_STAT) - (TA_STAT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TA_STAT
Logical Name
TA_STAT
Definition
Threshold on timing advance to define the cell limit used for Radio
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
63
External Comment
1 bper corresponds to about 550m
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
893 / 1436
5.2.532 (TCH load threshold for Auto AC) - (N_threshold)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TCH load threshold for Auto AC
Logical Name
N_threshold
Definition
Threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage for automatic barring

of access classes.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
894 / 1436
5.2.533 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Logical Name
TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Definition
Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME.
Coding rules
step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
infinity
External Comment
If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the

provisioning context of the OMC.
Cell Type Dependent
Single
0 dB (0)
Umbrella
0 dB (0)
Concentric
0 dB (0)
Concentric Umbrella
0 dB (0)
Microcell
infinity (7)
Minicell
infinity (7)
Extended inner cell
0 dB (0)
Extended outer cell
0 dB (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
895 / 1436
5.2.534 (TFO HR when loaded) - (FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TFO HR when loaded
Logical Name
FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
Definition
Flag to control the establishment of TFO in Half Rate, when the cell
is loaded and the call is currently allocated with an Half Rate codec
type (HR or AMR-NB HR) for load reason.
Coding rules
0 : "TFO with Half Rate codec not forced",

if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec,
the BSC will propose to establish TFO with all the supported codec
types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec).
1 : "TFO with Half Rate codec only",
if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, it
will stay in Half Rate even in case of TFO mismatch situation (if TFO
is not possible in Half Rate on remote side, TFO is not established).
2 : "TFO with Half Rate codec preferred",
if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec,
the BSC will propose in a first step to establish TFO providing only
the supported Half Rate codecs only. If TFO is not possible in Half
Rate on remote side, the BSC will try to establish TFO with all the
supported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR
AMR-WB codec), provided that EN_TFO_MATCH=1.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED=2, EN_TFO_MATCH should

be set to 1
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When the call is currently allocated with AMR-NB HR for load reason
and when TFO is possible for that call (TFO on AMR-NB supported
by the TC and configured in the cell), then the BSC automatically
behaviors as "TFO with Half Rate codec only", and set the list of the
supported codec types according to the ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST
parameter.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
896 / 1436
5.2.535 (THR_CCCH_LOAD) - (THR_CCCH_LOAD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_CCCH_LOAD
Logical Name
THR_CCCH_LOAD
Definition
Threshold triggering the sending of CCCH LOAD INDICATION

message.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
3000
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
897 / 1436
5.2.536 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Logical Name
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Definition
Lower load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HR

codec type in a dual rate cell.
Coding rules
step size = 10%
Mandatory rules
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 &

THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Recommended rules
When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 value, it is

recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is
greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
20
30
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
898 / 1436
5.2.537 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Logical Name
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Definition
Lower load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codec

type and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 and
Cause 27) in a dual rate cell.
Coding rules
Step size = 10%
Mandatory rules
THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 &

THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Recommended rules
When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 value, it is

greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
20
30
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
899 / 1436
5.2.538 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Logical Name
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Definition
Higher load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HR

codec type in a dual rate cell.
Coding rules
Step size = 10%
Mandatory rules
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 &

THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Recommended rules
When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 value, it is

greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
900 / 1436
5.2.539 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Logical Name
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Definition
Higher load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codec

type and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 and
Cause 27) in a dual rate cell.
Coding rules
Step size = 10%
Mandatory rules
THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 &

THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Recommended rules
When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 value, it is

greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) /100*total number of
TCH in the cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
901 / 1436
5.2.540 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
Logical Name
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under high load

(Cause 26 and Cause 27).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
902 / 1436
5.2.541 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Logical Name
THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Definition
Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under normal

load (Cause 26 and Cause 27).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
903 / 1436
5.2.542 (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD) - (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
Logical Name
TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
Definition
Periodicity of traffic load update in resource allocation algorithms =

N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
3264
120
External Comment
The given default value corresponds to the value calculated by the

OMC, based on the values of N_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends
on the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value),
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, not
reflected by DLS default value), TCH_INFO_PERIOD.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
904 / 1436
5.2.543 (TRX zone) - (ZONE_TYPE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TRX zone
Logical Name
ZONE_TYPE
Definition
Determines which TRX(s) belong to the inner zone and which TRX(s)
belong to the outer zone of a concentric cell.
Coding rules
Coded as a 16 bits bitmap. Each bit specifies the zone the

corresponding TRX (if declared) belongs to. 0: Outer zone, 1: Inner
zone.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Bitmap
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
TRX
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
N/A
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
905 / 1436
5.2.544 (TRX_CIPH_CAP) - (TRX_CIPH_CAP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TRX_CIPH_CAP
Logical Name
TRX_CIPH_CAP
Definition
Indicates the ciphering algorithms supported by the TRX in TDM

mode and in IP mode.
Coding rules
The first byte indicates the ciphering capability in TDM mode.

The second byte indicates the ciphering capability in IP mode.
Each byte is coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if
corresponding encryption algorithm is permitted.
Bit x=0 : encryption algorithm not supported
Bit x=1 : encryption algorithm supported
bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering)
bit 1 : A5/1.
bit 2 : A5/2
bit 3 : A5/3
bit 4 : A5/4
...
bit 7 : A5/7.
Mandatory rules
The possible values for each byte are :

- A5/0 + A5/1
- A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Bitmap
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
TRX
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
771
External Comment
A5/2 is not supported by the BSS.

(A5/0 + A5/1 for both mode) is for implementation purposes.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
906 / 1436
5.2.545 (TSC) - (TSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TSC
Logical Name
TSC
Definition
Training Sequence Code for any (packet) channel except for BCCH,
CCCH and CBCH
Coding rules
coded over 3 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Two training sequence codes are used in Alcatel BSS:
*) TSC for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH: the BSS sets the TSC to the
O&M parameter BCC. This behaviour is compliant to 3GPP TS 05.02
which states that for BCCH and CCCH, the TSC must be equal to
the BCC. In Alcatel BSS, for CBCH, the TSC is also set to BCC.
**) TSC for any other (packet) channel: the BSS sets the TSC to
the O&M parameter TSC.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
907 / 1436
5.2.546 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TX_INTEGER
Logical Name
Tx_integer (BSC)
Definition
Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL

REQUEST.
Coding rules
Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,
50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111
Mandatory rules
Equal to Tx_integer (MFS)
Recommended rules
When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it

is recommended to set:
TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF
=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.
When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is
recommended to set:
TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.
The number of slots belonging to the MSs RACH between 2
successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn
randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the
set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the
CCCH configuration as shown below:
1) for non combined CCCH:
- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms)
- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms)
Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)
2) for combined CCCH:
Note:
- In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH
frames per 51-multiframe
- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames
per 51-multiframe.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
908 / 1436
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
50
32
External Comment
When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set:

=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
909 / 1436
5.2.547 (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO
Logical Name
U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO
Definition
Downlink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover.
Coding rules
coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-47
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
-91 dBm (19)
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
910 / 1436
No
5.2.548 (U_RXLEV_DL_P) - (U_RXLEV_DL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
U_RXLEV_DL_P
Logical Name
U_RXLEV_DL_P
Definition
Upper downlink level threshold for power control.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
U_RXLEV_DL_P > L_RXLEV_DL_P
Recommended rules
U_RXLEV_DL_P >= L_RXLEV_DL_P + 10 dB
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-75
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
911 / 1436
5.2.549 (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO
Logical Name
U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO
Definition
Uplink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-47
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
-98 dBm (12)
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
912 / 1436
No
5.2.550 (U_RXLEV_UL_P) - (U_RXLEV_UL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
U_RXLEV_UL_P
Logical Name
U_RXLEV_UL_P
Definition
Upper uplink level threshold for power control.
Coding rules
coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm
Mandatory rules
U_RXLEV_UL_P > L_RXLEV_UL_P
Recommended rules
U_RXLEV_UL_P >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + 10 dB
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-75
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
-85 dBm (25)
Umbrella
-85 dBm (25)
Concentric
-85 dBm (25)
Concentric Umbrella
-85 dBm (25)
Microcell
-75 dBm (35)
Minicell
-85 dBm (25)
Extended inner cell
-85 dBm (25)
Extended outer cell
-85 dBm (25)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
913 / 1436
5.2.551 (U_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_DL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Logical Name
U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Definition
Upper downlink quality threshold for power control.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
U_RXQUAL_DL_P < L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Highest value is the worst quality
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
914 / 1436
5.2.552 (U_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_UL_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Logical Name
U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Definition
Upper uplink quality threshold for power control.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
U_RXQUAL_UL_P < L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Highest value is the worst quality
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
915 / 1436
5.2.553 (UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (U_TIME_ADVANCE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE
Logical Name
U_TIME_ADVANCE
Definition
Timing Advance threshold for distance handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
63
63
External Comment
One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m
Cell Type Dependent
Single
35 km (63)
Umbrella
35 km (63)
Concentric
35 km (63)
Concentric Umbrella
35 km (63)
Microcell
1 km (2)
Minicell
35 km (63)
Extended inner cell
34.5 km (62)
Extended outer cell
35 km (63)
Nb of TRX Dependent
916 / 1436
No
5.2.554 (VQ_AVERAGE) - (VQ_AVERAGE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_AVERAGE
Logical Name
VQ_AVERAGE
Definition
Average window size on measurements to obtain samples for Voice

Quality statistics.
Coding rules
step size = 1 Samfr
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
128
External Comment

defined. This allows to define "RMS tempates" (see parameter
RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
917 / 1436
5.2.555 (VQ_BAD_RXFER) - (VQ_BAD_RXFER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_BAD_RXFER
Logical Name
VQ_BAD_RXFER
Definition
Radio bad FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice
Quality statistics.
Coding rules
coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
20
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
918 / 1436
5.2.556 (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_FER_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
VQ_FER_THRESHOLD
Definition
Radio FER threshold to detect calls with bad speech quality for Voice
Quality statistics.
Coding rules
step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
30
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
919 / 1436
5.2.557 (VQ_GOOD_RXFER) - (VQ_GOOD_RXFER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_GOOD_RXFER
Logical Name
VQ_GOOD_RXFER
Definition
Radio good FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice
Quality statistics.
Coding rules
coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
20
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
920 / 1436
5.2.558 (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD
Logical Name
VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD
Definition
Radio interference threshold to detect noisy calls for Voice Quality

statistics.
Coding rules
step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
30
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
921 / 1436
5.2.559 (VQ_RXLEV) - (VQ_RXLEV)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_RXLEV
Logical Name
VQ_RXLEV
Definition
Radio level threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality
statistics.
Coding rules
0 = -110 dBm, 1 = -109 dBm, 62 = -48 dBm, 63 = -47 dBm, step

= 1dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-95
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
922 / 1436
5.2.560 (VQ_RXQUAL) - (VQ_RXQUAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_RXQUAL
Logical Name
VQ_RXQUAL
Definition
Radio quality threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice

Quality statistics.
Coding rules
step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
923 / 1436
5.2.561 (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER) - (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER
Logical Name
VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER
Definition
Radio quality threshold to specify correlation between quality

samples for Voice Quality statistics.
Coding rules
step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

RMS_template).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
924 / 1436
5.2.562 (W_LEV_HO) - (W_LEV_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_LEV_HO
Logical Name
W_LEV_HO
Definition
Weight applicable to level samples for handover when no DTX is

applied.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
925 / 1436
5.2.563 (W_LEV_MCHO) - (W_LEV_MCHO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_LEV_MCHO
Logical Name
W_LEV_MCHO
Definition
Weight applicable to level samples for microcell handover when no

DTX is applied.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
N/A
Umbrella
N/A
Concentric
N/A
Concentric Umbrella
N/A
Microcell
Minicell
N/A
Extended inner cell
N/A
Extended outer cell
N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
926 / 1436
No
5.2.564 (W_LEV_PC) - (W_LEV_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_LEV_PC
Logical Name
W_LEV_PC
Definition
Weight applicable to level samples for power control when no DTX

is applied.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
927 / 1436
5.2.565 (W_PBGT_HO) - (W_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_PBGT_HO
Logical Name
W_PBGT_HO
Definition
Weight applicable to level samples for power budget when no DTX

is applied.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
928 / 1436
5.2.566 (W_QUAL_CA) - (W_QUAL_CA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_QUAL_CA
Logical Name
W_QUAL_CA
Definition
Averaging weight applicable for full quality (Channel adaptation).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
929 / 1436
5.2.567 (W_QUAL_HO) - (W_QUAL_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_QUAL_HO
Logical Name
W_QUAL_HO
Definition
Weight applicable to quality samples for handover when no DTX

is applied.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
930 / 1436
5.2.568 (W_QUAL_PC) - (W_QUAL_PC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
W_QUAL_PC
Logical Name
W_QUAL_PC
Definition
Weight applicable to quality samples for power control when no DTX

is applied.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
931 / 1436
5.2.569 (WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING) - (MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING
Logical Name
MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING
Definition
This flag indicates if the BSC sends a Q.704 TRA message upon first
reception of SLTA from the MSC.
Coding rules
0 : TRA not sent upon first SLTA reception, 1 : TRA sent upon first
SLTA reception
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This flag is set to 1 for interworking with a "White Book" MSC. It is

set to 0 for interworking with a "Blue Book" MSC.
- Parameter change: after modification, a BSC restart procedure
is needed. On going calls are not disrupted (as long as no new
signalling exchange is needed) but the new traffic is not accepted
during that procedure.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
932 / 1436
5.2.570 (WI_CR) - (WI_CR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
WI_CR
Logical Name
WI_CR
Definition
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Call

Re-establishment".
Coding rules
0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

REJECT message is sent.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
933 / 1436
5.2.571 (WI_EC) - (WI_EC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
WI_EC
Logical Name
WI_EC
Definition
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Emergency call".
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
934 / 1436
5.2.572 (WI_OC) - (WI_OC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
WI_OC
Logical Name
WI_OC
Definition
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Originating call".
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
935 / 1436
5.2.573 (WI_OP) - (WI_OP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
WI_OP
Logical Name
WI_OP
Definition
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Location

updating" or "Other procedures which can be completed with an
SDCCH".
Coding rules

Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
936 / 1436
5.2.574 (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
Logical Name
ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
Definition
Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_DL_ZONE for outer to inner zone

handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-40
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
937 / 1436
5.2.575 (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
Logical Name
ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
Definition
Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_UL_ZONE for outer to inner zone

handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-40
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
938 / 1436
5.3 System (CST)

5.3.1 (Interference band 5 upper limit) - (INTFBD5)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Interference band 5 upper limit
Logical Name
INTFBD5
Definition
Upper limit of interference band 5.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
System (CST)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-47
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
939 / 1436
5.3.2 (SMSCB_Mode) - (SMSCB_Mode)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMSCB_Mode
Logical Name
SMSCB_Mode
Definition
This parameter enables to select the mode of operation, either

OMC-R or CBC.
Coding rules
0: OMC-R, 1: CBC
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
System (CST)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
940 / 1436
6 GPRS Telecom Parameters
941 / 1436
6.1 Network (CDE)

6.1.1 (BSSGP_T3) - (bssgp_T3)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSSGP_T3
Logical Name
bssgp_T3
Definition
Timer used by MFS to wait for Suspend acknowledgement from

SGSN.
Coding rules
1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
10
0.6
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
942 / 1436
6.1.2 (BSSGP_T4) - (bssgp_T4)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BSSGP_T4
Logical Name
bssgp_T4
Definition
Timer used by MFS to wait for Resume acknowledgement from

SGSN.
Coding rules
1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
BSSGP_T4 < T_GPRS_Resume/ (Resume_retries+1))
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
10
0.6
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
943 / 1436
6.1.3 (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING
Logical Name
EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING
Definition
This flag enables / disables autonomous rerouting of DL LLC PDUs.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF

feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting
feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
944 / 1436
6.1.4 (EN_CBL) - (EN_CBL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_CBL
Logical Name
EN_CBL
Definition
This flag enables / disables CBL feature (Leaky Bucket

Synchronisation)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
945 / 1436
6.1.5 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC
Logical Name
FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC
Definition
Safety factor to size BVC_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flow

control, on Gb interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
946 / 1436
6.1.6 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS
Logical Name
FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS
Definition
Safety factor to size default MS_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink

flow control, on Gb interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS should be set to a value corresponding to

the maximum multi-slot class of the MS present on the network
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
947 / 1436
6.1.7 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF) (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF
Logical Name
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF
Definition
Threshold to enter the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given

GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling
message storage).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 >
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF >
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
70
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
948 / 1436
6.1.8 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON) (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Threshold to exit the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a given

GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signalling
message storage).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
949 / 1436
6.1.9 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2) (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2
Logical Name
GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2
Definition
Threshold defining the second level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a

given GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP
signalling message storage).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
90
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
950 / 1436
6.1.10 (K_GSL (BSC)) - (K_GSL (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
K_GSL (BSC)
Logical Name
K_GSL (BSC)
Definition
Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending

whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:
- K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in
all BSC of the MFS.
- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links
in at least one BSC of the MFS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
951 / 1436
6.1.11 (K_GSL (MFS)) - (K_GSL (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
K_GSL (MFS)
Logical Name
K_GSL (MFS)
Definition
Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

- K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in
all BSC of the MFS.
- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links
in at least one BSC of the MFS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
952 / 1436
6.1.12 (MAX_BLER) - (MAX_BLER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_BLER
Logical Name
MAX_BLER
Definition
Maximum mean BLER value that a TBF can possibly reach
Coding rules
step size = 0,05
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.95
0.35
External Comment
The MAX_BLER value is used by RRM to evaluate the minimum

number of GCHs necessary to support RT traffic on a TRX.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
953 / 1436
6.1.13 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC) (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Logical Name
Definition
Number of bytes above which a transition from "short data" to "long

data" MS transfer shall be periodically reattempted (only useful in the
rare cases where such a transition previously failed).
Coding rules
step size = 100 bytes
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <=
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
100
100000
10000
External Comment
- Applicable only to TDM mode.

- A transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer can only fail
in the rare cases where there is a too high number of TBFs on the
TRX / in some very specific reallocation failure scenarios.
A low value of N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC should
be avoided because it will tend to increase the CPU load of the
MFS for a defence case which should be rare (if TRX and Abis/Ater
transmission resources are properly dimensioned).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
954 / 1436
6.1.14 (N391) - (N391)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N391
Logical Name
N391
Definition
Number of polling cycles before Frame Relay " full status enquiry"
(see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
955 / 1436
6.1.15 (N392) - (N392)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N392
Logical Name
N392
Definition
Error threshold (Frame Relay, see Q.933, Annex A).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
956 / 1436
6.1.16 (N393) - (N393)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N393
Logical Name
N393
Definition
Monitored error counts (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
957 / 1436
6.1.17 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
Logical Name
Definition
In a G2 BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages

queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no
longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.
The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer"
overflow.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC <
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
105
20
External Comment
Applicable only to TDM mode.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
958 / 1436
6.1.18 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
Logical Name
Definition
In an Evolution BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages

queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no
longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.
overflow.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC <
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
105
84
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
959 / 1436
6.1.19 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC
Logical Name
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC
Definition
In a G2 BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP

messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requests
can again be sent on this GSL link.
overflow.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC <
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
105
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
960 / 1436
6.1.20 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC
Logical Name
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC
Definition
In an Evolution BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of

BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel
requests can again be sent on this GSL link.
overflow.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC <
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
105
52
External Comment
Applicable only to TDM mode
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
961 / 1436
6.1.21 (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN) - (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN
Logical Name
NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN
Definition
For a PDCH, percentage of channel capacity (in terms of radio

block scheduling) which is exclusively reserved to NRT TBFs. That
capacity is not allowed to be allocated to a streaming TBF (RT PFC).
Coding rules
step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
In each direction (DL or UL), the minimum number of NRT

TBFs which are possible (in all cases) to be established on
a PDCH is equal to ((NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN/100) *
(T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING/20ms)) rounded down to the
closest integer value. This minimum number of NRT TBFs is
guaranteed even in case of RT PFC allocation on the PDCH.
The higher the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher
the risks of rejecting RT PFC creation requests.
The lower the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher
the risks of rejecting NRT TBF establishment requests (signalling
or data traffic).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
962 / 1436
6.1.22 (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER) - (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER
Logical Name
PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER
Definition
Authorize or inhibit DL LLC PDU ordering according to the remaining

PDU lifetime.
Coding rules
0: ordering disabled, 1 : ordering enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Should be set to "ordering disabled", when the MFS interfaces with

an Ericsson SGSN or any SGSN modifying the PDU Lifetime value
during data flows addressed to the same MS on the same LLC SAPI
in a non-acceptable manner, otherwise should be set to "ordering
enabled".
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
963 / 1436
6.1.23 (S_BECN) - (S_BECN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
S_BECN
Logical Name
S_BECN
Definition
Number of consecutive frames with BECN bit before congestion is

stated.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
964 / 1436
6.1.24 (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR) (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR
Logical Name
SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR
Definition
When computing the best candidate timeslot allocation for an NRT

TBF, this factor enables to give a higher weight (PDCH capacity)
to the already-established NRT TBFs having a higher scheduling
priority (combination of THP and of Precedence) than the TBF to be
established or reallocated.
This factor will tend to avoid piling up several TBFs with different
scheduling priorities on the same PDCHs, which would degrade the
throughput of the low-priority TBFs.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
The higher the value of T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING is, the

higher the value of SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR shall be,
in order to avoid degrading the throughput of the low-priority TBFs
in a significant manner (if it is possible according to the available
PDCHs in the cell).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
965 / 1436
6.1.25 (T_ACK_WAIT) - (T_ACK_WAIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_ACK_WAIT
Logical Name
T_ACK_WAIT
Definition
Timer defining the maximum time to wait for an MS answer (i.e.

Packet Control Ack or beginning of an UL TBF) to a network
solicitation sent on PACCH/DL when the MS is in PTM, or on PPCH
when the MS is in PIM and non-DRX mode, or on main DCCH when
the MS is in dedicated mode.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite
links:
- T_ack_wait = 1200 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and
Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS.
- T_ack_wait = 1700 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM).
- T_ack_wait = 2300 ms if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is
carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least
one cell of the MFS and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for all
the corresponding BTS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
1.2
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
966 / 1436
6.1.26 (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH) - (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH
Logical Name
T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH
Definition
Timer defining the maximum time to wait for a MS answer (i.e. Packet
Control Ack) to a network sollicitation sent on PPCH when the MS is
in PIM and DRX mode.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec ; 0 = 0; 1 = 0.1;... ;100 = 10
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

links:
- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 2.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried
through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,
- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 3 s if GPRS traffic is carried either
through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell
of the MFS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
2.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
967 / 1436
6.1.27 (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC) (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
Logical Name
T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
Definition
Timer value controlling the time duration between successive

resource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs (triggers T3 and
T4).
In a given cell, at each expiry of the T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
timer :
- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4
reallocation attempts are performed,
- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4
reallocations are performed,
- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3 T3
reallocation attempts are performed,
- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 T3
reallocations are performed.
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec; value 1 means 1 sec; value 2 means 2 sec, and
so on
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the

cells of the BSS.
This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are
released and reestablished again some moments later. This way,
the T3 and T4 reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are
currently unused, but still established.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
External Comment
968 / 1436
This parameter, together with the parameters

N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3,
N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 and
N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4, allows to :
- to control the reactivity of the BSS with regards to T3 and T4
reallocations,
- and to control the extra CPU load generated by T3
and T4 reallocation attempts (the lowest the value of
T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC, the highest the generated CPU
load).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
969 / 1436
6.1.28 (T_GCH_release) - (Trelease)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_GCH_release
Logical Name
Trelease
Definition
Supervision of GCH link release for 16k channel.
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Trelease > Tdsl

Treq_pending > Trelease
Recommended rules

links:
- Trelease = 500 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,
- Trelease = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
200
1200
500
External Comment
HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH
channels. Former HMI name Trelease.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
970 / 1436
6.1.29 (T_GPRS_Resume) - (T_GPRS_Resume)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_GPRS_Resume
Logical Name
T_GPRS_Resume
Definition
Timer used by BSC, to wait for Resume acknowledgement from

SGSN before releasing the CS channel.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec, coded from 2 to 50
Mandatory rules
T_GPRS_Resume < T3240 (10s)
Recommended rules
T_GPRS_Resume > (BSSGP_T4 * (Resume_retries+1))

- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater
- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater
satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.2
External Comment
T3240 is a MS timer see 3GPP TS 24.008
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
971 / 1436
6.1.30 (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING) (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING
Logical Name
T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING
Definition
Maximum time between two scheduling of a given NRT TBF (either

between two DL block requests for a NRT DL TBF, or between two
UL blocks received for a given NRT UL TBF).
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.12
0.3
0.3
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
972 / 1436
6.1.31 (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE) (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE
Logical Name
T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE
Definition
This timer controls the duration during which a MS context is kept

after receipt of a FLUSH-LL.
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
5000
1000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
973 / 1436
6.1.32 (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD) (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD
Logical Name
T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD
Definition
This timer controls the maximum time during which a GPU waits for
the response to a rerouting request.
Coding rules
step size = 50 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
50
2000
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
974 / 1436
6.1.33 (T_ul_2_ph_access) - (T_One_Block)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_ul_2_ph_access
Logical Name
T_One_Block
Definition
Timer to postpone the release of the M-EGCH link of a TRX, when

the TRX does not support any (E)GPRS traffic, but a one uplink block
has been allocated to a MS for a 2 phase access TBF establishment
on one of the RTSs of the TRX
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

links:
- T_one_block = 4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- T_one_block = 5 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS
(round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0
(TDM).
- T_one_block = 6 s if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried
through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least one
cell of the MFS and and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for all
the corresponding BTS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
975 / 1436
6.1.34 (T_ul_access_max) - (T_ul_access_max)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_ul_access_max
Logical Name
T_ul_access_max
Definition
Timer to limit the duration of an UL TBF establishment.
Coding rules
step size = 50 ms, 0 = 0 ms, 1 = 50 ms,... , 100 = 5000 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The two following rules are recommended:

i) The Time T_ul_access_max shall be longer than the duration of a
radio allocation requested towards the BSC.
ii) A too long value of T_ul_access_max may lead to reserve
unnecessarily radio resources. It is recommended to set
T_ul_access_max = T_repeat + 240 ms Round_Trip_Delay, where
the T_Repeat is the maximum time between two successive packet
channel requests, 240 ms is a given margin. The value of T_Repeat
depends on the parameters S, TX_INT, and TX_INTEGER.
It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending on
whether or not GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS
through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms):
- T_ul_access_max = 1400 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis
and Ater terrestrial links in at least one cell of the MFS (and this is
irrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS)
= TDM or IP or mixed mode),
- T_ul_access_max = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through
Abis or Ater satellite links in all the cells of the MFS (and this is
irrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS)
= TDM or IP or mixed mode).
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
5000
1400
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
976 / 1436
6.1.35 (T_WAIT_FLUSH) - (T_WAIT_FLUSH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_WAIT_FLUSH
Logical Name
T_WAIT_FLUSH
Definition
Timer monitoring the receipt of a Flush message or a GPRS suspend

message further to the release of the on-going TBF(s)
Coding rules
Step size : 0.5 sec

1 coded 1; 1,5 coded 2; 2 coded 3; 2,5 coded 4; ....
15,5 coded 30 and 16 coded 31
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The timer T_WAIT_FLUSH shall be set to the maximum cell

reselection duration plus the time for the MS to switch back to the old
cell and send a Packet Cell Change Failure message.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
16
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
977 / 1436
6.1.36 (T1) - (bssgp_T1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T1
Logical Name
bssgp_T1
Definition
Guards the (un)blocking procedures.
Coding rules
step size=1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
978 / 1436
6.1.37 (T2) - (bssgp_T2)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T2
Logical Name
bssgp_T2
Definition
Guards the reset procedure.
Coding rules
step size=1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
979 / 1436
6.1.38 (T200_GSL (MFS)) - (T200_GSL (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T200_GSL (MFS)
Logical Name
T200_GSL (MFS)
Definition
Supervision of acknowledgements on the GSL link.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_GSL_Ack (MFS) > T200_GSL (MFS) * (1 + N200_GSL (MFS))

- T200_GSL(MFS) = 1 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater
terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS.
- T200_GSL(MFS) = 2 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite
links in at least one BSC of the MFS.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
980 / 1436
6.1.39 (T391) - (T391)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T391
Logical Name
T391
Definition
Link integrity verification polling timer (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933,
Annex A, A.7).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
981 / 1436
6.1.40 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL
Logical Name
TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL
Definition
Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number

of DL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number
of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
External Comment

- If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network
(delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF
traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs
established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may
be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The
TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow
to increase this limit, so to be more flexible.
Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and
TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL
TBF numbers may be different.
The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters
are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL
(RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load
tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the
induced extra CPU load).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
982 / 1436
6.1.41 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL
Logical Name
TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL
Definition
Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number

of UL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number
of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
External Comment

- If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network
(delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF
traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs
established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may
be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The
TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow
to increase this limit, so to be more flexible.
Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and
TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL
TBF numbers may be different.
The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters
are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL
(RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load
tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the
induced extra CPU load).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
983 / 1436
6.1.42 (TnsBlock) - (Tns_block)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TnsBlock
Logical Name
Tns_block
Definition
Time-out to trigger the block/unblock procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
984 / 1436
6.1.43 (TnsReset) - (Tns_reset)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TnsReset
Logical Name
Tns_reset
Definition
Time-out for reset procedure.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
120
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
985 / 1436
6.1.44 (TnsTest) - (Tns_test)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TnsTest
Logical Name
Tns_test
Definition
Overall time-out to test an NS-VC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
60
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
986 / 1436
6.1.45 (Treq_pending) - (Treq_pending)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Treq_pending
Logical Name
Treq_pending
Definition
Maximum time during which a GCH establishment or release request

from PMU can be delayed in MEGCH layer.
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Treq_pending > Trelease+Tcorr
Recommended rules
Treq_pending > Testab+Tcorr
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
1000
5200
2000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
987 / 1436
6.2 Site (CAE)

6.2.1 (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE) - (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
Logical Name
ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
Definition
Format of the access burst used by (E)GPRS MSs when

sending a PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST, a PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT or a PTCCH/U message.
Coding rules
0 : 8 bits access bursts, 1 : 11 bits access bursts
Mandatory rules

the same ACCESS_BURST_TYPE when they are PS capable.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
988 / 1436
6.2.2 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD

(BSC))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Allowed priority classes
Logical Name
PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)
Definition
This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority

class is allowed to do Packet access.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access not allowed in the cell;
011:packet access allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access
allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access allowed for priority
level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4
Mandatory rules
Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
989 / 1436
6.2.3 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD

(MFS))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Allowed priority classes
Logical Name
PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)
Definition
This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority

class is allowed to do a Packet access.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access is not allowed in the cell;
011:packet access is allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access
is allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access is allowed for
priority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4
Mandatory rules
Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Persistence level parameter for priority (i) is meaningless if the Radio

Priority (i) is not allowed
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
990 / 1436
6.2.4 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ALPHA
Logical Name
ALPHA (BSC)
Definition
Alpha power control parameter.
Coding rules
Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary

coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010
Mandatory rules
Equal to ALPHA (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
991 / 1436
6.2.5 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
ALPHA
Logical Name
ALPHA (MFS)
Definition
Alpha power control parameter.
Coding rules
Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary

coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010
Mandatory rules
Equal to ALPHA (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
992 / 1436
6.2.6 (Ater_Usage_Threshold) - (Ater_Usage_Threshold)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Ater_Usage_Threshold
Logical Name
Ater_Usage_Threshold
Definition
Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which

the Ater usage is said "high".
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent

with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the
saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same
moment in the GPU).
Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage
can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will
limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).
For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the
BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
<= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons,
"short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high
Ater usage optimizations.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
70
External Comment

- When the Ater usage is "high", the
GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage is applied,
whereas when the Ater usage is "normal" (i.e. percentage of used
Ater nibbles is below the threshold), no GCH reduction factor is
applied.
Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF
are not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF established
after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
993 / 1436
6.2.7 (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data) (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
Logical Name
Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
Definition
Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which

the Ater usage is optimized for "short data" MS transfers.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100% (100%

meaning that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data"
MS transfers), then it is recommended to set it to 30%, except if the
drawbacks of another value (as explained in the external comments)
are deemed acceptable.
For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the
BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
<= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons,
"short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Ater
usage optimizations.
If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the
GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100%
is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and
T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment

- Setting Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data to 100% means that
there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers.
If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100%:
- the higher the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the fewer
ping time degradations and data transfer delays will be experienced,
- the lower the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the more
accurate the Ater consumption in the GPU will be (i.e. potential
wastes of Ater resources will be minimized in the GPU).
Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBF
are not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF established
after modification.
994 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
995 / 1436
6.2.8 (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY) - (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY
Logical Name
BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined Best Effort
Packet Flow Context, and for all MS traffic without PFC
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
12
External Comment
Default value corresponds to the priority for interactive THP3.

The minimum value (the highest priority) corresponds to one priority
level below the streaming class.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
996 / 1436
6.2.9 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_AG_BLKS_RES
Logical Name
BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS)
Definition
Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel

(AGCH), broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment.
Coding rules
coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7)
Mandatory rules
-BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given

cell
-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell,
BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0
- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and
BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.
. if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0

- For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1
- Parameter change:
no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted.
But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset and
paging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
997 / 1436
6.2.10 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_CV_MAX
Logical Name
BS_CV_MAX (BSC)
Definition
Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by

the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.
One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH
before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed.
Coding rules
Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111).
Mandatory rules
Equal to BS_CV_MAX (MFS)
Recommended rules
BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round

trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged
blocks and minimise window-stalled situations.
If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink
retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.
links:
- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
terrestrial links in the serving cell,
- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of

UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a
given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases
and reestablishments.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
998 / 1436
6.2.11 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_CV_MAX
Logical Name
BS_CV_MAX (MFS)
Definition
Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by

the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.
One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH
before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed.
Coding rules
Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111).
Mandatory rules
Equal to BS_CV_MAX (BSC)
Recommended rules
BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round

trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged
blocks and minimise window-stalled situations.
If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink
retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.
links:
- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis
satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of

UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a
given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases
and reestablishments.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
999 / 1436
6.2.12 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_PA_MFRMS
Logical Name
BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS)
Definition
Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences

of a Paging Group, broadcast on the PBCCH for the CS service
establishment.
Coding rules
coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9)
Mandatory rules
BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
is.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1000 / 1436
6.2.13 (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Logical Name
BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Definition
Number of blocks allocated to the PAGCH or PDTCH or PACCH per

52 multiframe.
Coding rules
coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, ..., 1010: 10)

The codepoints 0000: 0, 1011: 11 and 1100: 12 are not supported
by the ALCATEL BSS.
Mandatory rules
BS_PAG_BLKS_RES < 12 BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
According to 3GPP TS 05.02, the number of paging blocks "available"

on one PCCCH =
(12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES - BS_PBCCH_BLKS) * 64. In order for
the network to be able to page GPRS-attached Mobile Stations when
PCCCH is present in the cell, there shall be at least one radio block
where paging can occur. This requires (12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES BS_PBCCH_BLKS) to be strictly greater than 0.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1001 / 1436
6.2.14 (BS_PBCCH_BLKS) - (BS_PBCCH_BLKS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Logical Name
BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Definition
Number of blocks allocated to the PBCCH per 52 multiframe.
Coding rules
coded on 2 bits : 00=Block B0 used for PBCCH, 01=Block B0, B6

used for PBCCH, 10=Block B0, B6, B3 used for PBCCH, 11=Block
B0, B6, B3, B9 used for PBCCH
Mandatory rules
BS_PBCCH_BLKS < 12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1002 / 1436
6.2.15 (BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN) - (BS_PRACH_BLKS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN
Logical Name
BS_PRACH_BLKS
Definition
Number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframe

on each MPDCH.
Coding rules
coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, .., 1000: 8)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1003 / 1436
6.2.16 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BS_TXPWR_MAX
Logical Name
BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)
Definition

maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.
A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined in
step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB

0 0 0 0 = 0 dB,
0 0 0 1 = -2 dB,
0 0 1 0 = -4 dB,
..., 1 1 1 1 = -30 dB
Mandatory rules
Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-30
External Comment

limitation).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1004 / 1436
6.2.17 (BVCI) - (PTP_BVCI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BVCI
Logical Name
PTP_BVCI
Definition
PTP BVCI value.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1005 / 1436
6.2.18 (C31_HYST) - (C31_HYST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
C31_HYST
Logical Name
C31_HYST
Definition
Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shall

be applied to the C31 criterion. The hysteresis is
GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (for NC0 mode).
Coding rules
0 : no, 1 : yes
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1006 / 1436
6.2.19 (C32_QUAL) - (C32_QUAL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
C32_QUAL
Logical Name
C32_QUAL
Definition
Flag indicating an exception rule for GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET

in NC0 mode.
Coding rules
0=NO, 1=YES
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1007 / 1436
6.2.20 (Capacity) - (ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Capacity
Logical Name
ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)
Definition
Physical access rate of the Frame Relay bearer channel.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
OMC
Instance
BC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
64
1984
64
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1008 / 1436
6.2.21 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS)
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
126
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1009 / 1436
6.2.22 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS)
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
126
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1010 / 1436
6.2.23 (CI) - (CI (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI
Logical Name
CI (MFS)
Definition
Cell Identity.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules

Equal to CI (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1011 / 1436
6.2.24 (CI) - (CI(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI
Logical Name
CI(n) (MFS)
Definition
Cell Identity of adjacent cell.
Coding rules
Values 0..65535 correspond to the standard CI-value.
Mandatory rules

Equal to CI(n)(BSC).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1012 / 1436
6.2.25 (Commited Burst Size) - (CBS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Commited Burst Size
Logical Name
CBS
Definition
Commited Burst Size.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0

CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbyte
248
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1013 / 1436
6.2.26 (Committed Information Rate) - (CIR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Committed Information Rate
Logical Name
CIR
Definition
Committed Information Rate.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CIR=0 when "direct access" is used, CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
1984
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1014 / 1436
6.2.27 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT
Logical Name
CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT
Definition
"Forgetting time" in the long term averaging of channel quality

measurements in the GPRS link Adaptation: measurements which
are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT are negligible in the average of
channel quality measurements.
Coding rules
step size = 20ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.02
External Comment
Parameter change: any modification impacts the telecom PS service.

The on-going PS traffic of the BSS is broken and no new traffic is
accepted until the related GP/GPU(s) restarted.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1015 / 1436
6.2.28 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST
Logical Name
CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST
Definition
"Forgetting time" in the short term averaging of channel quality

measurements in the GPRS link adaptation: measurements which
are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST are negligible in the average of
channel quality measurements.
Coding rules
step size = 20ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.02
0.32
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1016 / 1436
6.2.29 (CS_BLER_DL_3_4) - (CS_BLER_DL_3_4)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_BLER_DL_3_4
Logical Name
CS_BLER_DL_3_4
Definition
CS3 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change

the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when
the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1017 / 1436
6.2.30 (CS_BLER_DL_4_3) - (CS_BLER_DL_4_3)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_BLER_DL_4_3
Logical Name
CS_BLER_DL_4_3
Definition
CS4 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change

the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1018 / 1436
6.2.31 (CS_HST_DL_LT) - (CS_HST_DL_LT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_HST_DL_LT
Logical Name
CS_HST_DL_LT
Definition
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the downlink

radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1019 / 1436
6.2.32 (CS_HST_DL_ST) - (CS_HST_DL_ST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_HST_DL_ST
Logical Name
CS_HST_DL_ST
Definition
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the

downlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1020 / 1436
6.2.33 (CS_HST_UL_LT) - (CS_HST_UL_LT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_HST_UL_LT
Logical Name
CS_HST_UL_LT
Definition
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the uplink

Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1021 / 1436
6.2.34 (CS_HST_UL_ST) - (CS_HST_UL_ST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_HST_UL_ST
Logical Name
CS_HST_UL_ST
Definition
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the uplink

Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1022 / 1436
6.2.35 (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Logical Name
CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Definition
Maximum transfer inactivity time to reuse the previous (Modulation

and) Coding Scheme. This applies in case of transfer resumption
during inactive TBF phase (delayed downlink TBF mode / extended
uplink TBF mode) and in case of uplink TBF establishment on
PACCH while extended uplink TBF mode is not used (with some
additional restrictions).
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
5000
680
External Comment
This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1023 / 1436
6.2.36 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK
Logical Name
Definition
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change

the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a
hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1024 / 1436
6.2.37 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK
Logical Name
Definition

the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a
hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1025 / 1436
6.2.38 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1026 / 1436
6.2.39 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK) (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1027 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1028 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1029 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
3.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1030 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1031 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1032 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1033 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1034 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1035 / 1436
6.2.48 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK
Logical Name
Definition

the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when
hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1036 / 1436
6.2.49 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK
Logical Name
Definition

hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1037 / 1436
6.2.50 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1038 / 1436
6.2.51 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK) (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1039 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the

Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the
RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping
TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1040 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a
hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1041 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when
non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
3.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1042 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1043 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping
TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1044 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1045 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when
non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1046 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition

non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1047 / 1436
6.2.60 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK
Logical Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK
Definition
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation

algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the
downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the
TBF is established on a hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1048 / 1436
6.2.61 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK
Logical Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK
Definition

downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the
TBF is established on a hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1049 / 1436
6.2.62 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK
Logical Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK
Definition

downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the
TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
13
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1050 / 1436
6.2.63 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK
Logical Name
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK
Definition

downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the
TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1051 / 1436
6.2.64 (CS_SIR_HST_DL) - (CS_SIR_HST_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CS_SIR_HST_DL
Logical Name
CS_SIR_HST_DL
Definition
Signal to Interference Ratio hysteresis used in the link adaptation

downlink direction.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1052 / 1436
6.2.65 (Data Link Connection Identifier) - (DLCI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Data Link Connection Identifier
Logical Name
DLCI
Definition
Data Link Connection Identifier, corresponds to a PVC identifier, see

Q.922 Annex A, Table 1.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
991
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1053 / 1436
6.2.66 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DRX_TIMER_MAX
Logical Name
DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)
Definition
Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode

after packet transfer mode.
Coding rules
Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively

binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111
ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL
BSS.
Mandatory rules
Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1054 / 1436
6.2.67 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DRX_TIMER_MAX
Logical Name
DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)
Definition
Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode

after packet transfer mode.
Coding rules
Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively

binary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111
ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL
BSS.
Mandatory rules
Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1055 / 1436
6.2.68 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION
Logical Name
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)
Definition
Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSS

for MS in Packet Transfer Mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC) =
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)
- can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and
(round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS)
Recommended rules
- if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highly

recommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled.
- if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly
recommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS,
either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMO
I) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled"
(network_operation_mode <> NMO I).
- if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS
= false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to set
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible with

the "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface"
feature.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1056 / 1436
6.2.69 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION
Logical Name
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)
Definition
Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSS

for MS in Packet Transfer Mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS) =
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)
- can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and
(round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS)
Recommended rules
- if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highly

recommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled.
- if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly
- if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS
= false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to set
EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible with

the "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface"
feature.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1057 / 1436
6.2.70 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
Logical Name
EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
Definition
Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC acknowledged mode.
Coding rules
0: Disable; 1: Enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If EN_STREAMING = 1 then it is recommended to set

EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK to "TRUE" in order to activate the link
adaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable level
regarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise,
the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best Effort
ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radio
interface.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1058 / 1436
6.2.71 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Logical Name
EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Definition
Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC unacknowledged
Coding rules
0: Disable; 1: Enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1059 / 1436
6.2.72 (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING) (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING
Logical Name
EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING
Definition
This flag enables / disables rerouting of DL LLC PDUs.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter locks only the rerouting part of the feature. It has no
effect on the securisation part.
This parameter applies to both, intra-NSE and inter-NSE cell change.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1060 / 1436
6.2.73 (EN_EGPRS) - (EN_EGPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_EGPRS
Logical Name
EN_EGPRS
Definition
Enables/Disables EGPRS traffic in the cell.
Coding rules
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Mandatory rules
EN_EGPRS = enable only if MAX_PDCH > 0.
Recommended rules
If EN_EGPRS is set to enable, Alcatel recommend to set the

parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX to 0.
In case of extended cell, Alcatel recommend to set the same value in
both, inner and outer, cells.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
From system point of view, when EN_EGPRS = Enable, the highest

MCS allowed on the TRX is defined by the current size of the
M-EGCH link of the TRX and by the MAX_EGPRS_MCS value.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1061 / 1436
6.2.74 (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) - (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF
Logical Name
EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the extended TBF mode feature on the uplink

(without or with allowing the MS not to answer to a USF received
while in Extended UL TBF mode).
Coding rules
0: Extended UL TBF mode (EUTM) is not used

1: EUTM is used
2: I-EUTM is used (improved EUTM mode)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
-It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL

TBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting
feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)
- if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled and if RA capability update
is supported by SGSN, then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
must be enabled.
The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if
the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
I-EUTM (improved EUTM) allow MS in EUTM mode to not answer to

a USF.
In I-EUTM mode, N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT and
IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD parameters can be used to
tune the radio link monitoring.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1062 / 1436
6.2.75 (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS) (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS
Logical Name
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS
Definition
This flag indicates whether or not one Slave PDCH is available for
(E)GPRS traffic in the cell (fast initial PS access feature).
In an Evolium BTS, that corresponds to a PDCH being able to
support incoming (E)GPRS traffic, that PDCH being located on an
established TRX (i.e. the TRX owns an M-EGCH link)
Coding rules
0: disabled,
1: enabled
Mandatory rules
- MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if

- MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if
- If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS
through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, then
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Better performances for service access time will be obtained when

this parameter is set to enabled, but one PDCH will always be
established in the cell. A compromise has to be made by the operator
between performance gain and the cost of radio and terrestrial
resources. This compromise becomes of higher importance in
case of a cell connected through a satellite link due to the higher
GPRS access time with satellite links, but also the higher cost of
transmission links.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1063 / 1436
6.2.76 (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Logical Name
EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the normal fast scheduling mode for the uplink
TBFs in extended mode
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is

enabled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1064 / 1436
6.2.77 (EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) (EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Logical Name
EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Definition
Flag to enable/disable the full fast scheduling mode for uplink TBFs
in EUTM.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- The full fast USF scheduling can be enabled /disabled independently

on the normal fast USF scheduling (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
parameter)
- The parameter is relevant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is
enabled
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1065 / 1436
6.2.78 (EN_FULL_IR_DL) - (EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FULL_IR_DL
Logical Name
EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell
Definition
Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the downlink TBF in the cell.
Coding rules
0: Disable the "full" IR, so : Incremental Redundancy with

resegmentation allowed in DL,
1: Enable the "full" IR, so, Incremental Redundancy without
resegmentation in DL
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
To allow the best throughput in DL, it is strongly recommended to set

this parameter to 0 i.e. to not forbid the resegmentation.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1066 / 1436
6.2.79 (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33) (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
Logical Name
EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
Definition
Enables the support of (E)GPRS multislot class 30-33.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Support of DTM (E)GPRS multislot classes 31 to 33 is possible only

if EN_DTM = 1 and EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 = 1. Support
of configurations requiring EDA is possible only if EN_EDA = 1 (and
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION = 1 in case of DTM).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1067 / 1436
6.2.80 (EN_NACC) - (EN_NACC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_NACC
Logical Name
EN_NACC
Definition
Enables the Network Assisted Cell Change feature.
Coding rules
0: disabled; 1:enabled
Mandatory rules
Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msec

When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
EN_NACC = 0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1068 / 1436
6.2.81 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR) - (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
Logical Name
EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
Definition
Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are

systematically triggered from the serving cell.
Coding rules
0: Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered

1: Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically

triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is up
to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause
is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement
Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can
be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm
(Always).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is

triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving
cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections
is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry
PS traffic (for instance a macro cell).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1069 / 1436
6.2.82 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)) (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)
Logical Name
EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)
Definition
Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are

systematically triggered from the serving cell.
Coding rules
0: Disable Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered

1: Enable Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is up
to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause
is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement
Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can
be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm
(Always).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is

triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving
cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections
is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry
PS traffic (for instance a macro cell).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1070 / 1436
6.2.83 (EN_PFC_FEATURE) - (EN_PFC_FEATURE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_PFC_FEATURE
Logical Name
EN_PFC_FEATURE
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the PFC negotiation feature.
Coding rules
1 => PFC feature is supported,

0 => PFC feature is not supported
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset

autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1071 / 1436
6.2.84 (EN_PSI_STATUS) - (EN_PSI_STATUS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_PSI_STATUS
Logical Name
EN_PSI_STATUS
Definition
Enables the Packet SI Status feature in cells w/o PBCCH or the

Packet PSI Status feature in cells with a PBCCH.
Coding rules
0: disabled; 1:enabled
Mandatory rules
Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msec

When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
EN_PSI_STATUS = 0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1072 / 1436
6.2.85 (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE) - (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
Logical Name
EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
Definition
Flag to enable/disable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
This parameter must be enabled if RA capability update is

supported by SGSN and if it exists, at least, one cell where
EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled.
The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if
the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.
If EN_STREAMING is set to 1 then EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must
also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able to
handle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFC
creation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded to
the default best effort flow by the BSS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1073 / 1436
6.2.86 (EN_RIM_NACC) - (EN_RIM_NACC)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RIM_NACC
Logical Name
EN_RIM_NACC
Definition
Flag to disable/enable the Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC features

(inter-RAT = inter-3G or inter-LTE).
It covers both controlling and serving aspects : for controlling
MFS, this is the ability to request and receive System Information
messages from the Gb interface and to broadcast them to MS
through the PACCH.
For serving MFS, this is the ability to provide System Information
messages when requested by another BSS/RNC.
Coding rules
0: Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are disabled

1: Inter-BSS NACC only is enabled
2 Inter-3G NACC only is enabled
3 Inter-BSS and Inter-3G NACC are enabled
4 Inter-LTE NACC only is enabled
5 Inter-BSS and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled
6 Inter-3G and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled
7 Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
1074 / 1436
- For a BSS working as a controlling BSS, the Inter-BSS NACC

feature can be effective for a serving cell, if EN_NACC feature is
enabled in that cell. For a BSS working as a serving BSS, there is no
interaction with the EN_NACC feature.
- Parameter change:
When enabling (setting from 0 to <>0), a reset of all the BVC SIG is
automatically performed (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS
traffic in the BSS).
In case of disabling (setting from <>0 to 0), the reset is automatically
done only on the NSEs of the BSS, connected to a SGSN supporting
the RIM feature (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS traffic on
these SGSN(s)).
In any other case of modification, there is no impact on the PS traffic;
on going TBFs are not disrupted.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1075 / 1436
6.2.87 (EN_STREAMING) - (EN_STREAMING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_STREAMING
Logical Name
EN_STREAMING
Definition
Enables/disables the support of the STREAMING flows.
Coding rules
1 => the cell supports the streaming flows in addition to the non real
time flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE
= 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful
0 => the cell supports the non real time flows (best effort, interactive,
background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC feature
negotiation with the SGSN is successful
Mandatory rules
- If EN_STREAMING = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 0

- When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
EN_STREAMING = 0
Recommended rules
1) If this parameter is set to 1 then the parameter

EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise
the BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is not
respected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flow
will be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS.
2) the parameter EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK must also set to
"TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the
(M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configured
Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgraded
to the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot
be reached on the radio interface.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1076 / 1436
6.2.88 (Excess Burst Size) - (EBS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Excess Burst Size
Logical Name
EBS
Definition
Excess Burst Size.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0

Recommended rules
EBS=FR_CAPACITY(expressed in kbit/s) / 8, if CIR=0
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbyte
248
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1077 / 1436
6.2.89 (GAMMA_TNx) - (GAMMA_TNx)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GAMMA_TNx
Logical Name
GAMMA_TNx
Definition
Binary representation of the "gamma ch" for MS output power control.
Coding rules
Coded on 5 bits, step size=2dB, with 00000 == 0 dB, 00001 == 2

dB, ... 11111 == 62 dB.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
62
30
External Comment
In the context of a concentric cell, the parameter applies to the outer

zone.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1078 / 1436
6.2.90 (Gb_Transport_Mode) - (Gb_Transport_Mode)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Gb_Transport_Mode
Logical Name
Gb_Transport_Mode
Definition
Mode of the transport for Gb interface: FR or IP.
Coding rules
0: FR mode
1: IP mode
Mandatory rules
- EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP.

- If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the

Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode
of the NSE.
When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of
the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the
Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode
defined in the NSE instance).
- Parameter change: before to set to transport mode to FR, the
operator has to delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE
per GPU, ie no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS). Any
modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously
all the GP/GPUs connected to this BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1079 / 1436
6.2.91 (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE) - (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE
Logical Name
Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE
Definition
Mode of the transport for Gb interface (per NSE): FR or IP.
Coding rules
0: FR mode
1: IP mode
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the

Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode
of the NSE.
When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of
the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the
Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode
defined in the NSE instance).
- Parameter change: Any modification of the parameter leads the
MFS to reset autonomously the associated GP/GPU.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1080 / 1436
6.2.92 (GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter) (GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter
Logical Name
GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage
Definition
Reduction factor of the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, when

the Ater usage is "high".
Coding rules
step size = 0.01
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent

with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the
saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same
moment in the GPU).
Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage
can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will
limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
0.75
External Comment

- The GCH reduction factor applies to the new PDCHs which are
used when the Ater usage is "high" (see the Ater_Usage_Threshold
parameter). This parameter can be reduced in order to avoid Ater
shortage situations.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1081 / 1436
6.2.93 (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name
GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Definition
Additional hysteresis which applies in Ready state for cells in same

RA.
Coding rules
step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001= 2 dB, 111=14 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1082 / 1436
6.2.94 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name
Definition
Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the

system.
Coding rules
Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31

The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1083 / 1436
6.2.95 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)
Definition
Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the

system.
Coding rules
Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31

The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:
dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1084 / 1436
6.2.96 (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE) (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE
Logical Name
GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE
Definition
Default value of the (E)GPRS multislot class assumed at TBF

establishment when the actual MS (E)GPRS multislot class is
unknown.
The default MS class is used as an input of the best candidate TBF
allocation computation process when the MS class is not known
on UL TBF establishment.
Coding rules
Only the following GPRS multislot class defined in 3GPP TS 05.02

annex B are allowed:
1: GPRS multislot class 1 (1+1 MS);
30: GPRS multislot class 30 (5+1 MS).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The recommendations to set this parameter are the following:

1) In case the PS traffic is mainly signalling (e.g. there is a great
proportion of RA Updates among the UL TBF establishment
requests), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE shall be set to
1 (optimization of the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC /
DSP CPU).
2) In case the PS traffic is mainly data (high proportion
of UL TBF establishment requests for data traffic),
GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE should be set to the
most common multislot class which can be found among the
mobile stations within the BSS (in order to limit the number of
T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU, triggered with the
establishment of the concurrent DL TBF). In case of multislot class
30, this additionally requires that the multislot class 30-33 feature
is widely activated in the BSS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
30
External Comment
The entered value is assumed by default at uplink TBF establishment

when the actual MS multislot class is unknown (e.g. RACH one
phase access on CCCH) . Otherwise, the multislot class received in
the request for uplink TBF establishment is taken into account.
1085 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1086 / 1436
6.2.97 (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME) - (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME
Logical Name
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
Definition
Time during which GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active in

neighbour cells.
Coding rules
step size = 10 sec, coded on 5 bits (00000 = 10 sec, 11111 = 320 sec)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
320
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1087 / 1436
6.2.98 (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET) (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET
Logical Name
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
Definition
Permanent offset for GPRS cell reselection in neighbour cells.
Coding rules
coded on 5 bits (00000 = -52 dB, 11111 = 48 dB)

00000= -52; 00001= -48; 00010= -44; 00011= -40; 00100= -36;
00101= -32; 00110= -28; 00111= -24; 01000= -20; 01001= -16;
01010= -12; 01011= -10; 01100= - 8; 01101= - 6; 01110= - 4; 01111=
- 2; 10000= 0; 10001= 2; 10010= 4; 10011= 6; 10100= 8; 10101=10;
10110= 12; 10111= 16; 11000= 20; 11001= 24; 11010= 28; 11011=
32; 11100= 36; 11101= 40; 11110= 44; 11111= 48
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-52
48
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1088 / 1436
6.2.99 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name
Definition
Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system.
Coding rules
step size = 1 dBm, coded on 6 bits (000000 = -110 dBm, 111111

= -47 dBm)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1089 / 1436
6.2.100 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
Definition
Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system

in neighbour cells.
Coding rules
coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1090 / 1436
6.2.101 (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET) (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Logical Name
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Definition
Negative offset used for MS cell reselection process in neighbour

cells.
Coding rules
Possible values : 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinity respectively binary
coded as 000, 001, ..., 111
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
infinity
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1091 / 1436
6.2.102 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HCS_THR
Logical Name
GPRS_HCS_THR
Definition
HCS signal strength.
Coding rules
Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48

dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-48
-84
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1092 / 1436
6.2.103 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HCS_THR
Logical Name
GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
Definition
HCS signal strength.
Coding rules
Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48

dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-48
-84
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1093 / 1436
6.2.104 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Logical Name
HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with
precedence parameter set to high
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1094 / 1436
6.2.105 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Logical Name
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow
Context, with precedence parameter set to high
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1095 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1096 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1097 / 1436
6.2.108 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
Logical Name
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
Definition
Load threshold used to determine a certain margin of radio timeslots

reserved for CS traffic between two sending of the BSCGP RR
Allocation Indication messages. The threshold is expressed in
percentage of the radio timeslots available in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
90
The margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic can be computed

as follows:
External Comment
(100 - HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)/100*NB_TS
where NB_TS is the number of radio timeslots available in the cell.
No
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
t01
t02
t03
t04
t05
t06
t07
t08
t09
t010
t011
t012
70
70
70
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
1098 / 1436
6.2.109 (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Logical Name
IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Definition
Maximum duration of UL TBF inactivity before MS is polled in EUTM

mode when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled).
Coding rules
step size = 20ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
100
1000
300
External Comment
Change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-going

UL TBFs
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1099 / 1436
6.2.110 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS) (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS
Logical Name
INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS
Definition
Number of PDCHs on which MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL

and MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when
establishing GCHs for a GPRS TBF associated to a "short data"
MS transfer.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

TBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and new
TBF established after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1100 / 1436
6.2.111 (LAC) - (LAC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LAC
Logical Name
LAC (MFS)
Definition
Location Area Code.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules

Equal to LAC (BSC)
shall have the same LAC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1101 / 1436
6.2.112 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LAC
Logical Name
LAC(n) (MFS)
Definition
Location Area Code.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules

Equal to LAC(n)(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
65535
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1102 / 1436
6.2.113 (Level 1 down) - (PVC_Level1_down)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Level 1 down
Logical Name
PVC_Level1_down
Definition
This parameter gives the low level of threshold for congestion.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
40
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1103 / 1436
6.2.114 (Level 1 Factor) - (PVC_Level1_Factor)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Level 1 Factor
Logical Name
PVC_Level1_Factor
Definition
This parameter is used to calculate the amount of data used for

buffering.
Coding rules
step size = 0.01
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
amount of memory needed : PVC_Level1_factor * 10 * (CBS+EBS)

for a PVC
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.05
12.75
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1104 / 1436
6.2.115 (Level 1 up) - (PVC_Level1_up)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Level 1 up
Logical Name
PVC_Level1_up
Definition
This parameter gives the high level of threshold for congestion.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
70
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1105 / 1436
6.2.116 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
Logical Name
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
Definition
Number of load samples (calculated every TCH_INFO_PERIOD

seconds) used to compute the maximum number of slave PDCHs
that the BSC can allocate to the MFS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1106 / 1436
6.2.117 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Logical Name
LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow

Context, with precedence parameter set to low
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1107 / 1436
6.2.118 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1108 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1109 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1110 / 1436
6.2.121 (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Logical Name
MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Definition
Indicative value of the maximum number of DownLink (E)GPRS

TBFs per Slave PDCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment
When allocating a DL GPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the

maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each
Slave PDCH.
When allocating a DL EGPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the
maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each Slave
PDCH (regardless of the current number of DL GPRS TBFs).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1111 / 1436
6.2.122 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS) - (MAX_EGPRS_MCS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Logical Name
MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Definition
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for EGPRS traffic

in the cell.
Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Mandatory rules
MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_DL_INIT_MCS

MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
When cell_type = "extended outer", then MAX_EGPRS_MCS <=
MCS-4
Recommended rules
R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if
MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be
higher than 59,2kbps).
R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the
useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above
recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be
accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their
associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best
Effort.
It is advised to set MAX_EGPRS_MCS to a value different from
MCS-2 to cope with MEGCH control message granularity in an
optimal way.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
1112 / 1436
MCS-1;
MCS-2;
MCS-3;
MCS-4;
MCS-5;
MCS-6;
MCS-7;
MCS-8;
MCS-9;
Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact on

the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case of
value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring with
the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted due
to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1113 / 1436
6.2.123 (MAX_GPRS_CS) - (MAX_GPRS_CS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_GPRS_CS
Logical Name
MAX_GPRS_CS
Definition
Maximum coding scheme used for GPRS traffic in the cell.
Coding rules
1 : CS-2;
2 : CS-3;
3 : CS-4
Mandatory rules
MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_DL_INIT_CS

MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_UL_INIT_CS
The aim of this last rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the
and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS
is not allowed)
Recommended rules
R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if
MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher
than 12kbps)
R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful
bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended
rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS
whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This
may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This parameter can be set to CS-3 or CS-4 only if the related

feature has been bought and controlled per quantity.
- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact
on the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case
of value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring
with the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted
due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1114 / 1436
6.2.124 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL) (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Logical Name
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Definition
Maximum coding scheme used for the DL GPRS TBFs associated to

a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules
1:
2:
3:
4:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during

the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended
that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL,
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS,
TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking
rate in the cell (by recommending low values for
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify
the cell configuration.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
CS-1 coded as 0
CS-2 coded as 1
CS-3 coded as 2
CS-4 coded as 3
External Comment

- Setting this parameter to CS-2 might introduce some problems
(because a CS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might
therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be
sent in the M-EGCH link in DL).
- If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher than
MAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead.
due to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1115 / 1436
6.2.125 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL) (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Logical Name
MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Definition
Maximum coding scheme used for the UL GPRS TBFs associated to

a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules
1:
2:
3:
4:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
CS-1 coded as 0
CS-2 coded as 1
CS-3 coded as 2
CS-4 coded as 3
External Comment

- If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher than
MAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1116 / 1436
6.2.126 (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE) - (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_PAGING_QUEUE
Logical Name
MAX_PAGING_QUEUE
Definition
Maximum number of CS+PS paging messages stored in GPU.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Paging Rate = 100 paging/s AND Queueing Time = 5s
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
50
1000
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1117 / 1436
6.2.127 (MAX_PDCH) - (MAX_PDCH (MFS))

Management of
Enable_GPRS Flag (Cell
Parameter)
Creation of a BSC
DLS Restore When the

Flag is Not In Lline With
Max_PDCH
This flag exists in the BSC and is managed by the OMC-R but it is not visible
to the operator. It is derived by the OMC-R from the value of Max_PDCH.
When the Enable_GPRS flag is set to true, it means that the BSC can accept
MFS requests for a certain cell. In some circumstances, there can be some
inconsistencies, but these might not have any impact:
When the BSS is discovered by the OMC-R, the MFS parameters are set to
their default value by the OMC-R. Max_PDCH is set to 0. (There may be
inconsistency at system level, but no impact.) Later, if the operator installs
GPRS, he has to download the radio configuration to the MFS. Through this
operation, the flag Enable_GPRS is recomputed for the cells concerned by
the PRC, and therefore downloaded to the BSC. All data is then in line for
the cells concerned by the PRC. It can occur that some cells remain with
Enable_GPRS set to true and Max_PDCH set to 0 but this does no harm at all
(no impact on the traffic, and not visible by the operator).
Any DLS restore must be followed by the following procedure to line-up the
EN_GPRS of the cells handled by this BSC with the Max_PDCH of these
cells currently stored in the OMC-R:
1. Copy the SC into the PRC
2. Activate this PRC
Until the synchronization is achieved, the cell cannot be set into service for
GPRS by the telecom application (there is no impact if the cell is already
started for GPRS).
Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_PDCH
Logical Name
MAX_PDCH (MFS)
Definition

to the MFS in the cell.
Coding rules
1118 / 1436
Mandatory rules
Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH (MX BSC)

Max_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD;
If MAX_PDCH > 0 then EN_GPRS = TRUE ;
If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_GPRS = FALSE;
If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_EGPRS = FALSE;
Total number of TCHs of the cell"
The aim of this rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the
and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is
not allowed)
MAX_PDCH shall be set so that at least one slave PDCH can be
allocated to the MFS to serve DL or UL TBFs. This means that
MAX_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_GPRS = TRUE.
When Max_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended
outer", then MAX_PDCH shall be an even number.
The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check
the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:
CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX
iv) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK=0) - 3 if
TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = 2
Recommended rules
In a micro cell, the operator may be interested to force the

MS to reselect a macro cell by a correct setting of the cell
reselection parameters broadcast on PBCCH (without using NC cell
reselections, i.e. when EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR is set to 0
and NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to NC0 in the micro
cell). In this case, the following configuration is recommended:
NB_TS_MPDCH = 1, MAX_PDCH = 2, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD =
1, MIN_PDCH = 1.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
1119 / 1436
External Comment

To support LCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_PDCH > 0
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1120 / 1436
6.2.128 (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) - (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
Logical Name
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS)
Definition

to the MFS when the CS traffic is high.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MX BSC)

- MAX_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
- MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH
- If EN_DTM = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
External Comment
127 is a theoretical value: 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1121 / 1436
6.2.129 (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF) - (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
Logical Name
MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
Definition
Maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a single (E)GPRS

connection.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1122 / 1436
6.2.130 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RETRANS
Logical Name
Max_retrans (MFS)
Definition
Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by

the MS on the RACH, broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service
establishment.
Coding rules
Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01,

10 and 11
Mandatory rules
Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
is.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1123 / 1436
6.2.131 (MAX_RETRANS_1) - (MAX_RETRANS_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RETRANS_1
Logical Name
MAX_RETRANS_1
Definition
Maximum number of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions

by the MS on the PRACH with priority level 1.
Coding rules
Possible values are : 1, 2, 4, 7 respectively binary coded : 00, 01,

10, 11
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1124 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RETRANS_2
Logical Name
MAX_RETRANS_2
Definition

Coding rules

10, 11
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1125 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RETRANS_3
Logical Name
MAX_RETRANS_3
Definition

Coding rules

10, 11
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1126 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_RETRANS_4
Logical Name
MAX_RETRANS_4
Definition

Coding rules

10, 11
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1127 / 1436
6.2.135 (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Logical Name
MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Definition
Indicative value of maximum number of UpLink (E)GPRS TBFs per

slave PDCH.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When allocating an UL GPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the

maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each
Slave PDCH.
When allocating an UL EGPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the
maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each Slave
PDCH (regardless of the current number of UL GPRS TBFs).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1128 / 1436
6.2.136 (MIN_PDCH) - (MIN_PDCH (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_PDCH
Logical Name
MIN_PDCH (MFS)
Definition
Minimum number of master and slave PDCHs that are always

allocated to the MFS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Shall be equal to MIN_PDCH (MX BSC)

-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH;
-MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if
-MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if
-When MIN_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended
outer", then MIN_PDCH shall be an even number
Recommended rules
It is recommended to set this parameter to a value smaller than the

maximum number of PDCHs that may be allocated in the cell, in
order to avoid congestion on the MFS-BSC interface.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
127
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1129 / 1436
6.2.137 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Logical Name
MCC (MFS)
Definition
Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).
(MCC,MNC) couple.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
999
External Comment
The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1130 / 1436
6.2.138 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Logical Name
MNC (MFS)
Definition
Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).
(MCC,MNC) couple.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
999
External Comment

The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC.
binary coded 1111)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1131 / 1436
6.2.139 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS)
Definition

Coding rules

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1132 / 1436
6.2.140 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Logical Name
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS)
Definition

Coding rules

dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.
0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
43
43
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1133 / 1436
6.2.141 (N_AVG_I (BSC)) - (N_AVG_I (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_AVG_I (BSC)
Logical Name
N_AVG_I (BSC)
Definition
N_AVG_I (BSC) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the SI13.

The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal level
measurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode.
These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output power
control, but also reported to the network and used for performing
downlink link adaptation.
Coding rules
coded on 4 bits
Mandatory rules
Equal to N_AVG_I (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1134 / 1436
6.2.142 (N_AVG_I (MFS)) - (N_AVG_I (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_AVG_I (MFS)
Logical Name
N_AVG_I (MFS)
Definition
N_AVG_I (MFS) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the PSI

13 and PSI1. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference
signal level measurements that it shall perform during the packet
transfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS
for output power control, but also reported to the network and used
for performing downlink link adaptation.
Coding rules
coded on 4 bits
Mandatory rules
Equal to N_AVG_I (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1135 / 1436
6.2.143 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS) (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS
Logical Name
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS
Definition
Number of bytes below which an MS transfer is considered to be

"short data".
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <=
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
20
10000
150
External Comment

- An MS transfer is considered to be "short data" as long as less
than N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in
both directions (since the TBF establishment(s)). Else, if more than
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in at
least one direction, the MS transfer is considered to be "long data".
Note: in DL, the bytes of the DL LLC PDUs currently queued for the
MS (but not yet sent to the MS) are also counted.
Decreasing (respectively increasing) the value of
N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS will tend:
- to make the Ater resource optimization worse (respectively
better) when the Ater usage of the GPU is above
Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data,
- to reduce (respectively make higher) the PS throughput
degradations at the beginning of MS traffics when the Ater usage of
the GPU is above Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data,
- to make the MFS and BSC CPU loads higher (respectively lower).
TBF are not disrupted. Change applied immediately on current TBF
and on new TBF, established after modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1136 / 1436
6.2.144 (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT) - (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT
Logical Name
N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT
Definition
Maximum number of consecutive polling requests that can be sent

to a MS in EUTM state (when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2
(IEUTM enabled)) without receiving a polling response in a PCA.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
The value of the parameter should be set to a value high enough to

avoid any spurious abnormal UL TBF releases.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
20
10
External Comment
A change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-going

UL TBFs.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1137 / 1436
6.2.145 (N_RIM_RETRIES) - (N_RIM_RETRIES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_RIM_RETRIES
Logical Name
N_RIM_RETRIES
Definition
Number of times a RAN procedure is retried (after first attempt)

before giving up (in case of no answer is received)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1138 / 1436
6.2.146 (N3101_LIMIT) - (N3101_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N3101_LIMIT
Logical Name
N3101_LIMIT
Definition
In an UL TBF tranfer procedure, maximum of consecutive times

(before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network receives
no valid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS on its allocated
PDCH.
To note that the counter N3101 can be incremented more than one
time per block period.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
64
64
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1139 / 1436
6.2.147 (N3103_LIMIT) - (N3103_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N3103_LIMIT
Logical Name
N3103_LIMIT
Definition
In an UL TBF releasing procedure, maximum of consecutive times

(before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network does not
receive a Packet Control Acknowledgement from the MS in response
of its Packet UL ACK/NACK which specifies the end of the TBF.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
N3103_Limit: maximum number of retransmissions to release an UL

TBF
Max_Retrans_DL: maximum number of retransmissions to establish
a DL TBF
In case of simultaneous UL TBF Release and DL TBF establishment
with loss of the Packet Control Ack which acknowledges the final
Packet UL Ack/Nack, the UL TBF has to be released, at least
before the last attempt to establish the DL TBF, in order to avoid the
emission of a Radio Status.
Consequently the following rule has to be followed:
(N3103_Limit + 1) x (RTD + 60) < Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60)
N3103_Limit + 1: total number of attempts to send the final Packet
UL Ack/Nack
RTD: Round Trip Delay
60 (msec): for the Packet UL Ack/Nack acknowledgement: RRBP +
3 is used
Max_Retrans_DL: total number of attempts minus one to send the
Packet DL Assignment
60 (msec): for the Packet DL Assignment acknowledgement: RRBP
+ 3 is used
N3103_Limit < (Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60) / (RTD + 60)) - 1
N3103_Limit < [Max_Retrans_DL] - 1
Example:
With Max_Retrans_DL = 3: N3103_Limit < 2 that is N3103_Limit = 1
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
1140 / 1436
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1141 / 1436
6.2.148 (N3105_LIMIT) - (N3105_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N3105_LIMIT
Logical Name
N3105_LIMIT
Definition
For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis

terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the
maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet
Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This
parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay
to decide if the DL TBF shall be released.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
64
20
External Comment
If N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet

DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.
N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case
of transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends on
GPRS_DL_Ack_Period, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot
class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1142 / 1436
6.2.149 (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) - (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Logical Name
N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Definition
For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis

satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum
number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control
Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
64
24
External Comment
If N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of

consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation
but TBF release. N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE has to be set in order
not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.
The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period_Satellite,
T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number
of TBFs per PDCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1143 / 1436
6.2.150 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_TS_MPDCH
Logical Name
NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC)
Definition
Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary

master PDCHs defined in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; MIN_PDCH >=
NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
2) if the network_operation_mode (BSC) parameter is set to 2
(NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1144 / 1436
External Comment
- Only the value 0 is supported

- The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and
Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through
satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following
criteria:
* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;
* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to
about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged
protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS
signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional
signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is
established.
Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:
* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non
negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;
* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not
recommended.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1145 / 1436
6.2.151 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NB_TS_MPDCH
Logical Name
NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS)
Definition
Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary

master PDCHs defined in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;MIN_PDCH >=
NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.
2) if the network_operation_mode (MFS) parameter is set to 2
(NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.
CCCH combined"
CCCH not combined"
4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then
NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1146 / 1436
External Comment
- Only the value 0 is supported

- The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and
Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through
satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following
criteria:
* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;
* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to
about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged
protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS
signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional
signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is
established.
Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:
* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non
negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;
* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not
recommended.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1147 / 1436
6.2.152 (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
Logical Name
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
Definition
Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT2 can be

triggered due to the detection of a better neighbour cell.
Coding rules
0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm (Always)"
(step size = 1 dB)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is
recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT2 (i.e. set
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR to -110 dBm (Never). The aim of
this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS
redirection.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-47
External Comment
1) The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell

reselections Cause PT2.
2) The specific value of "-47 dBm (Always)" systematically allows the
triggering of NC cell reselections Cause PT2
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1148 / 1436
6.2.153 (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
Logical Name
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
Definition
Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT1 is triggered

due to a too bad RXLEV in the downlink direction (while the MS is
in packet transfer mode).
Coding rules
0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm" (step size
= 1 dB)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

recommended to activate NC cell reselection Cause PT1 (i.e. set
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-96
External Comment
The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell

reselection Cause PT1.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1149 / 1436
6.2.154 (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
Logical Name
NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
Definition
Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT3 is triggered

due to a too bad RXQUAL in downlink direction (while the MS is
in packet transfer mode).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed:
"0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)".
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to 7 (Never). The aim of this recommended
rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection

Cause PT3.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1150 / 1436
6.2.155 (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET) - (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
Logical Name
NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
Definition
NC ping-pong offset which is applied to the C2 or C32 criterion to

disfavour the neighbour cells during T_NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET.
Coding rules
step size = 1 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
63
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1151 / 1436
6.2.156 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T) - (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Logical Name
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Definition
Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while

in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules
coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92

sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0:
30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) .
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.48
61.44
0.96
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1152 / 1436
6.2.157 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)) (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)
Logical Name
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)
Definition
Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while

in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules
coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92

sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0:
30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) .
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.48
61.44
0.96
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1153 / 1436
6.2.158 (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name
NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n)
Definition
NC cell reselection offset used for triggering power budget causes.
Coding rules
0: -127 dB (Always), 1: -126 dB, ..., 254: 127 dB, 255: 128 dB
(Never)
(step size = 1 dB)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-127
128
128
External Comment
1) The specific value of "128 dB (Never)" deactivates the NC cell

reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.
2) The specific value of "-127 dB" (Always)" systematically triggers
the NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1154 / 1436
6.2.159 (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR) (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
Logical Name
NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
Definition
Forgetting factor of the filter used to average the NC measurements

reported in the Packet Measurement Report messages.
Coding rules
step size = 0.001
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.13
External Comment
This parameter applies to the serving cell and the neighbour cells.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1155 / 1436
6.2.160 (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD) - (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Logical Name
NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Definition
Period after which a weight of 0.9 s is applied to the current UL or

DL RXQUAL samples in the averaging filter.
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
20
10000
4000
External Comment
This parameter applies to the serving cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1156 / 1436
6.2.161 (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
Logical Name
NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
Definition
Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT4 is triggered

due to a too bad RXQUAL in uplink direction (while the MS is in
packet transfer mode).
Coding rules
step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed:
"0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)"
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to 7 (Never). The aim of this recommended
rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection

Cause PT4.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1157 / 1436
6.2.162 (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE) - (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE
Logical Name
NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE
Definition
NC2 deactivation mode. This parameter defines whether or not the

Packet Measurement Order message with a Reset Command is sent
at the end of a packet transfer.
Coding rules
0: "NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer". A Packet

Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode at
the end of the packet transfer.
1: "NC2 deactivation at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer". No
Packet Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2
mode.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered

systematically (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Disable), the
presence of the PBCCH is not mandatory. However, the following
recommendations apply, depending on the presence of the PBCCH:
- If PBCCH is present, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE can be set
to any value (at the end of the packet transfer mode or at the expiry of
the GMM Ready timer) if the setting of the C32 parameters ensures
that GPRS mobile stations do not camp in cells where outgoing
GPRS redirections are systematically triggered.
- If PBCCH is not present or PBCCH is present but C32 parameters
are not correctly set, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE should
be set to "at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer" to prevent the
GPRS mobile stations from reselecting a cell where outgoing GPRS
redirections are triggered systematically (at least while the MS is in
packet idle mode and the GMM Ready timer is running).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1158 / 1436
6.2.163 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
Logical Name
Definition
This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell
reselections.
Coding rules
0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell
reselections and no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
(Not supported)
2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the
cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode
or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the
selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated
for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the
BSS.
3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell
reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when
in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation
mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the
MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS
controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet
transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state
(depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2
mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet
measurements to the BSS.
Mandatory rules
- The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1159 / 1436
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of

operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all
MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", then the 3G
search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode
(activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2]
message).
If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G
search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if
Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even
when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order
[NC2] message will not be sent).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1160 / 1436
6.2.164 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n)
Definition
This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell
reselections.
Coding rules
reselections an no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
(Not supported)
2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the
cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode
or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the
selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated
for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the
BSS.
3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell
reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when
in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation
mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the
MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.
4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS
controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet
transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state
(depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2
mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet
measurements to the BSS.
Mandatory rules
- The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1161 / 1436
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of

operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS"
or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", the 3G search is
systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activation
performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message).
This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of the
value of the EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1162 / 1436
6.2.165 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode

(BSC))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Network_mode_of_operation
Logical Name
network_operation_mode (BSC)
Definition
This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging.
Coding rules
3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 ==

Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III.
Mandatory rules
If the network_operation_mode (BSC) parameter is set to NMO II

then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
Equal to network_operation_mode (MFS).
Recommended rules
If EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highly
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of
(E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS.
NMO I requires a Gs interface.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1163 / 1436
6.2.166 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode

(MFS))
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Network_mode_of_operation
Logical Name
network_operation_mode (MFS)
Definition
This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging.
Coding rules
3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 ==

Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III
Mandatory rules
If the network_operation_mode (MFS) parameter is set to NMO II

then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.
Equal to network_operation_mode (BSC).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of
(E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS.
NMO I requires a Gs interface.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1164 / 1436
6.2.167 (Normal Information Rate) - (NIR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Normal Information Rate
Logical Name
NIR
Definition
Normal Information Rate.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
NIR=0 when direct access is used
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
kbit/s
1984
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1165 / 1436
6.2.168 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Logical Name
NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with
precedence parameter set to normal
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1166 / 1436
6.2.169 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Logical Name
Definition
Context, with precedence parameter set to normal
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1167 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1168 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1169 / 1436
6.2.172 (NS Priority) - (NS_Priority)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NS Priority
Logical Name
NS_Priority
Definition
Priority of the NSVC, is used by the load sharing (used for Gb over
Frame Relay interface).
Coding rules
1: lowest priority, 255:highest priority
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
255
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1170 / 1436
6.2.173 (NSEI) - (NSEI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NSEI
Logical Name
NSEI
Definition
NSE Identifier.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
The NSEI shall be unique per MFS.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSE
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1171 / 1436
6.2.174 (NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT) (N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT
Logical Name
N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT
Definition
This parameter defines the maximum number of consecutive Packet

Downlink ACK/NACK or EGPRS Packet Downlink ACK/NACK
messages reporting the failure of progress of the RLC window during
the active phase of a downlink TBF, before triggering an abnormal
release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the
MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
256
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1172 / 1436
6.2.175 (NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT) (N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT
Logical Name
N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT
Definition
NstagnatingWindow limit above which a mono-slot uplink TBF alone

on its PDCH shall be released: the counter is incremented each time
a Packet UL Ack/Nack fails in making the RLC window progress.
For a multi-slot TBF or a TBF which shares its PDCH, the limit is
proportional to the allocated bandwidth at the TBF establishment.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
256
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1173 / 1436
6.2.176 (NSVC Identifier) - (NSVCI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
NSVC Identifier
Logical Name
NSVCI
Definition
NSVC identifier (used for Gb over Frame Relay interface).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
NSVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1174 / 1436
6.2.177 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAN_DEC
Logical Name
PAN_DEC (BSC)
Definition
Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182.
Coding rules
Binary coded on 3 bits
Mandatory rules
Equal to PAN_DEC (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1175 / 1436
6.2.178 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAN_DEC
Logical Name
PAN_DEC (MFS)
Definition
Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to PAN_DEC (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1176 / 1436
6.2.179 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAN_INC
Logical Name
PAN_INC (BSC)
Definition
Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is received by MS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to PAN_INC (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1177 / 1436
6.2.180 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAN_INC
Logical Name
PAN_INC (MFS)
Definition
Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL

ACK/NACK is received by MS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to PAN_INC (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1178 / 1436
6.2.181 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAN_MAX
Logical Name
PAN_MAX (BSC)
Definition
Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS

when N3102 <= 0.
Coding rules
Possible values : 4, 8, 12...., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,

..., 111
Mandatory rules
Equal to PAN_MAX (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
32
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1179 / 1436
6.2.182 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PAN_MAX
Logical Name
PAN_MAX (MFS)
Definition
Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS

when N3102 <= 0.
Coding rules
Possible values : 4, 8, 12,.., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,..

, 111
Mandatory rules
Equal to PAN_MAX (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
32
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1180 / 1436
6.2.183 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PC_MEAS_CHAN
Logical Name
PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC)
Definition
This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure

the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink
power control.
Coding rules
0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH
Mandatory rules
Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS).
Recommended rules
PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1181 / 1436
6.2.184 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PC_MEAS_CHAN
Logical Name
PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS)
Definition
This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure

the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink
power control.
Coding rules
0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on

BCCH, 1 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made
on PDCH
Mandatory rules
Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC).
Recommended rules
PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1182 / 1436
6.2.185 (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for DL PDCH
unit allocation distribution
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 PDCH
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1<
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1183 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 <
PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2<
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1184 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 <
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
1.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1185 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1186 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
2.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1187 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1188 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
3.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1189 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1190 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 <
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1191 / 1436
6.2.194 (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for DL
TBF duration distribution.
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1192 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL TBF
duration distribution
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1193 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL TBF
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1194 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL TBF
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1195 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1196 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1197 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1198 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1199 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1200 / 1436
6.2.203 (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC
volume carried by an DL TBF distribution
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1201 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 <

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
1000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1202 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume
carried by an DL TBF distribution
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
2000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1203 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volume
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
3000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1204 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
5000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1205 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
10000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1206 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
20000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1207 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
50000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1208 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
100000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1209 / 1436
6.2.212 (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for UL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1<
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1210 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 <
PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2<
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1211 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 <
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
1.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1212 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL PDCH
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1213 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
2.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1214 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1215 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
3.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1216 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1217 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 <
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0.1
4.9
4.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1218 / 1436
6.2.221 (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for UL
TBF duration distribution.
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1219 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL TBF
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1220 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL TBF
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1221 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL TBF
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1222 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1223 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1224 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1225 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1226 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
16383.5
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1227 / 1436
6.2.230 (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC
volume carried by an UL TBF distribution
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
500
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1228 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 <

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
1000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1229 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume
carried by an UL TBF distribution
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
2000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1230 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
3000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1231 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
5000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1232 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
10000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1233 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
20000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1234 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
50000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1235 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC
Coding rules
step size = 1 byte
Mandatory rules
PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
byte
99999999
100000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1236 / 1436
6.2.239 (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1) - (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1
Logical Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1
Definition
This parameter indicates the values of the access persistence level

for radio priority 1.
Coding rules
Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4

bits
0 0 0 0 : persistence level 0, 0 0 0 1: persistence level 1, 0 0
1 0:persistence level 2, 0 0 1 1: persistence level 3, 0 1.0.0 :
persistence level 4
. . . . 1 1 1 0 : persistence level 14, 1 1 1 1: persistence level 16
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1237 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_2
Logical Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_2
Definition

Coding rules
Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4

bits
persistence level 4
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1238 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_3
Logical Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_3
Definition

Coding rules
Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4

bits
persistence level 4
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1239 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_4
Logical Name
PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_4
Definition

Coding rules
Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4

bits
persistence level 4
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1240 / 1436
6.2.243 (PFC_T6) - (PFC_T6)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PFC_T6
Logical Name
PFC_T6
Definition
Timer guarding the Download-BSS-PFC procedure
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
10
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1241 / 1436
6.2.244 (PFC_T8) - (PFC_T8)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PFC_T8
Logical Name
PFC_T8
Definition
Timer guarding the Modify-BSS-PFC procedure
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
10
0.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1242 / 1436
6.2.245 (PRACH_BUSY_THRES) - (PRACH_BUSY_THRES)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PRACH_BUSY_THRES
Logical Name
PRACH_BUSY_THRES
Definition
Received level above which a PRACH block is deemed busy.
Coding rules
This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:

0: -110 dBm
1: -106 dBm
2: -102 dBm
3: -98 dBm
4: -94 dBm
5: -90 dBm
6: -86 dBm
7: -82 dBm
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm
15: -50 dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-50
-106
External Comment
Parameter used in dynamic allocation of secondary MasterPDCH

algorithm.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1243 / 1436
6.2.246 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PRIORITY_CLASS
Logical Name
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS
Definition
HCS priority of the cell, used in NC0.
Coding rules
Coded on 3 bits.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1244 / 1436
6.2.247 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PRIORITY_CLASS
Logical Name
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
Definition
HCS priority of the adjacent cell, used in NC0.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1245 / 1436
6.2.248 (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX) - (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Logical Name
PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Definition
Indicates whether or not the PS requests shall be preferentially

served with PDCH(s) of the BCCH TRX
Coding rules
0: No preference. The TRX ranking algorithm handles the BCCH

TRX as a non-BCCH TRX.
1: PS requests preferentially served on BCCH TRX. The TRX
ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the highest
preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry
PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).
2 : PS requests served on BCCH TRX with lowest priority. The
TRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the lowest
preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry
PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping /

radio-hopping cell, Alcatel recommend to set this parameter to 0 in
order to reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK output
power (see external comment).
If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, setting this
parameter to 0 does not reduce the likelihood of having to reduce
the GMSK output power since PS capable TRXs will hop on the
BCCH carrier.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1246 / 1436
External Comment
When set to 1 or 2, this parameter is only relevant if the BCCH TRX

supports PS traffic (i.e. if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on the BCCH TRX).
If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping /
radio-hopping cell, if the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic and if the
BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware allowing the usage of
8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean
output powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB
in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008
requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined on timeslot
number 7 of the BCCH TRX).
If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, the operator
shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between
GMSK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant
with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB if
timeslot number 7 is not part of the PDCH groups).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1247 / 1436
6.2.249 (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN) - (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN
Logical Name
QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN
Definition
Additional capacity (in terms of radio bandwidth and in terms of

transmission resources) which is reserved for a streaming TBF (RT
PFC) to correctly fulfil its AGBR contract and to possibly convey other
multiplexed NRT PFC(s) of the same TBF. The part of this margin
that is not used by the streaming TBF may be used by other TBF(s).
Coding rules
step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Setting QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN to 0% is not recommended (the

GBR of some RT PFCs may turn out to be impossible to guarantee in
this case).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
20
External Comment
In case of IP transport in the BSS, UDP/IP headers are taken into

account in the bandwidth computation
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1248 / 1436
6.2.250 (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Logical Name
R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Definition
Average bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Recommended rules
R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if
MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not
be higher than 59,2kbps).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bit/s
59200
30000
External Comment
This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted,

per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It
is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average
measured bit rate in the cell.
The default value corresponds to MCS-6.
The max value corresponds to MCS-9.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1249 / 1436
6.2.251 (R_AVERAGE_GPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_GPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Logical Name
R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Definition
Average bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Recommended rules
R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than

the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if
MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher
than 12kbps).
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bit/s
20000
12000
External Comment
This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted,

per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It
is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average
measured bit rate in the cell.
The default value corresponds to CS-2.
The max value corresponds to CS-4.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1250 / 1436
6.2.252 (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) - (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Logical Name
RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Definition
This parameter indicates in both STANDBY and READY state the

additional hysteresis which applies when selecting a cell in a new
Routing Area.
Coding rules
step size = 2 dB, Coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001=2 dB, ...111=14 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1251 / 1436
6.2.253 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER
Logical Name
RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS)
Definition
Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET

CHANNEL REQUEST filtering.
Coding rules
64: no filtering
Mandatory rules
Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)
Recommended rules
Disable the filtering for extended cells.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bper
64
64
External Comment
One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL

REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with
Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are
discarded.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1252 / 1436
6.2.254 (RMIN_EGPRS) - (RMIN_EGPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RMIN_EGPRS
Logical Name
RMIN_EGPRS
Definition
Minimal bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell (at
95 % or 90% confidence level or less %, depending on tolerable risk)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Recommended rules
If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False

then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_EGPRS
<= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS,
TBF_DL_INIT_MCS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be
downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.
R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the
useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above
recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be
accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their
associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best
Effort.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bit/s
59200
20800
External Comment
This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming

PFC for Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It
should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.
The default value corresponds to a bitrate between MCS-4 and
MCS-5.
The max value corresponds to MCS-9.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1253 / 1436
6.2.255 (RMIN_GPRS) - (RMIN_GPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RMIN_GPRS
Logical Name
RMIN_GPRS
Definition
Minimal bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this

cell cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less, depending on
tolerable risk)
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Recommended rules
If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False

then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_GPRS
<= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_CS,
TBF_DL_INIT_CS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be
downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.
R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful
bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended
rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS
whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This
may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
bit/s
20000
8000
External Comment
This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming

PFC for Non Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It
should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.
The default value corresponds to CS-1.
The max value corresponds to CS-4.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1254 / 1436
6.2.256 (Round trip delay MFS-MS) - (round_trip_delay)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Round trip delay MFS-MS
Logical Name
round_trip_delay
Definition
Round trip delay between the MFS and a MS, in TDM and IP mode.
Coding rules
step size=10 ms
Mandatory rules
- T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

- If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFS
through satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BT, then
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
80
940
160
External Comment
The round-trip delay is used by the RRM layers. The OMC-R and the
MFS also use this parameter to determine whether or not GPRS
traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links as follows:
- If round_trip_delay < 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS consider
that GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links,
- If round_trip_delay >= 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS
consider that GPRS traffic is carried through one satellite link:
either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in case
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM); or through a satellite link
between BTS and MFS in case Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP).
When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links
in the serving cell, it is recommended to set the round_trip_delay
parameter to [Delay due to satellite (540 ms) + Delay due to MFS-MS
link (160 ms)] = 700 ms.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1255 / 1436
6.2.257 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Routing Area Code for GPRS
Logical Name
RA_CODE (BSC)
Definition
Routing Area Code for GPRS.
Coding rules
The initial special value -1 means that the RA code has still not been
set by the operator.
Mandatory rules
- Equal to RA_CODE (MFS)

- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)
shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
-1
255
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1256 / 1436
6.2.258 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
RA_CODE (MFS)
Definition
Routing Area Code.
Coding rules
0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60)

other values: external or unknown cell
Mandatory rules
- Equal to RA_CODE (BSC)

- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)
shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
-1
255
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1257 / 1436
6.2.259 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE(n))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
RA_CODE(n)
Definition
Routing Area Code of neighbour cells.
Coding rules
0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60);

other values: external or unknown cell.
The special value of "-1" means that the RA code has still not
been valued by the network provider or that the MFS shall set the
SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field to 0.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
If i) the target and serving cells belong to different PLMNs and ii) the
RAC and LAC of the target cell are equal to the RAC and LAC of the
serving cell, and iii) there is a PBCCH established in the serving
cell, and iv) a cell reselection adjacency link is defined between the
serving cell and the target cell, then it is recommended to set the
RA_CODE to -1. Otherwise, the MFS considers that the serving cell
and the target cell belong to the same routing area when setting
the SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field in the 04.60 PACKET
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 3/3bis messages.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
-1
255
External Comment
The special value of -1 means that the RA code has still not been
valued by the operator or that the routing area of the serving cell is
different from the routing area of the target cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1258 / 1436
6.2.260 (Routing Area Colour for GPRS) - (RA_COLOUR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Routing Area Colour for GPRS
Logical Name
RA_COLOUR
Definition
Routing Area Colour for GPRS.
Coding rules
Coded over 3 bits. the initial special value -1 means that the RA
codecolour has not yet been valued by the network provider.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Default value depends on the configuration. The value indicated here

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1259 / 1436
6.2.261 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS)
Definition

cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1260 / 1436
6.2.262 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Logical Name
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS)
Definition

cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
adj
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-110
-47
-100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1261 / 1436
6.2.263 (S) - (S)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Logical Name
Definition
Number of slots between 2 successive PACKET CHANNEL

REQUEST.
Coding rules
Possible values are : 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217
respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010,... ,1001
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater terrestrial links,
it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive
Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 900 ms.
When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links,
it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive
Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 1400 ms.
The number of slots belonging to the MSs PRACH between 2
successive Packet Channel Request messages is a random value
drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution
in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1) with T = Tx_INT. The time in seconds
between two Packet Channel Request messages is determined as
a function of S, TX_INT and of the BS_PRACH_BLKS parameter.
BS_PRACH_BLKS defines the number of blocks statically allocated
to the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each PCCCH.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
12
217
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1262 / 1436
6.2.264 (SGSNR) - (SGSNR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SGSNR
Logical Name
SGSNR
Definition

used to implement SGSN software.
Coding rules
0 = SGSN is release 98 or older; 1 = SGSN is release 99 onwards
Mandatory rules
EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset

autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1263 / 1436
6.2.265 (SMS_PRIORITY) - (SMS_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SMS_PRIORITY
Logical Name
SMS_PRIORITY
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined "SMS" PFC.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1264 / 1436
6.2.266 (T stop frame relay emission) - (T_STOP_FR_EMISSION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T stop frame relay emission
Logical Name
T_STOP_FR_EMISSION
Definition
Timer used to trigger restart of emission on a PVC (Frame Relay).
Coding rules
step size = 1 ms
Mandatory rules
Not changeable after MFS system initialization.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
PVC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
10
5000
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1265 / 1436
6.2.267 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_AVG_T
Logical Name
T_AVG_T (BSC)
Definition
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules
binary coded on 5 bits
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_AVG_T (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
25
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1266 / 1436
6.2.268 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_AVG_T
Logical Name
T_AVG_T (MFS)
Definition
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_AVG_T (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
25
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1267 / 1436
6.2.269 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_AVG_W
Logical Name
T_AVG_W (BSC)
Definition
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_AVG_W (MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
25
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1268 / 1436
6.2.270 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_AVG_W
Logical Name
T_AVG_W (MFS)
Definition
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_AVG_W (BSC)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
25
20
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1269 / 1436
6.2.271 (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN) - (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
Logical Name
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
Definition
This timer defines the duration of the delay introduced by the BSS
to send the final Packet UL Ack/Nack message when releasing an
UL TBF.
Coding rules
step size : 100 ms ; 0 = 0 msec, 1 = 100 msec, 2 = 200 msec, etc
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
2000
400
External Comment
- The feature "delayed emission of the final Packet UL Ack/Nack"

can be inhibited by setting the value 0 to the parameter
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN. When the feature is enabled, the timer
duration should be long enough to let the server send its response to
the uplink PDUs received from the MS, while remaining short enough
in order not to jeopardise the sending of further uplink PDUs by the
MS.
- If GPRS traffic between one BTS and the MFS is carried
through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, and if
T_delayed_Final_PUAN < 540ms then the MS will wait for a delay
equal to Max (540ms, T_delayed_Final_PUAN). This is due to the
delayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side,
PTU at BTS side).
Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1270 / 1436
6.2.272 (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport
Logical Name
T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport
Definition
Time period to request for a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with

measurements.
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
60
3000
400
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1271 / 1436
6.2.273 (T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL) - (T_flow_ctrl_cell)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL
Logical Name
T_flow_ctrl_cell
Definition
Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message to

SGSN.
Coding rules
step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1272 / 1436
6.2.274 (T_FLOW_CTRL_MS) - (T_flow_ctrl_ms)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_FLOW_CTRL_MS
Logical Name
T_flow_ctrl_ms
Definition
Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-MS message

towards the SGSN for GPRS and EGPRS Mobile Stations.
Coding rules
step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
250
10
External Comment
1) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS is set to "0", then the MS flow control

mechanism is inhibited;
2) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS has a non-null value, then "C< T_flow_ctrl_ms
< Th". The parameters C and Th are defined in the 3GPP TS 08.18.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1273 / 1436
6.2.275 (T_GCH_CORR) - (Tcorr)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_GCH_CORR
Logical Name
Tcorr
Definition
Timer to supervise clock drift correction loop for 16k channel.
Coding rules
step size=100ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Tcorr > Trelease+240ms and Tcorr > Testab+240ms

where 240 ms represents the maximum delay in MAC layer between
the notification for a DBN correction and the application of this DBN
correction.
links:
- Tcorr = 0.8 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- Tcorr = 1.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite
links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.5
0.8
External Comment
channels. Former HMI name Tcorr.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1274 / 1436
6.2.276 (T_GCH_ESTAB) - (Testab)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_GCH_ESTAB
Logical Name
Testab
Definition
Supervision of loss of GCH link establishment for 16k channels.
Coding rules
step size= 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Treq_pending > Testab
Recommended rules

links:
- Testab = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- Testab = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite
links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
0.4
External Comment
channels. Former HMI name Testab.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1275 / 1436
6.2.277 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_GCH_INACTIVITY
Logical Name
T_GCH_INACTIVITY
Definition
Timer to postpone the release of the "unused" GCHs of the M-EGCH

link of a TRX (the condition for some GCHs of the M-EGCH link of
a TRX to become "unused" is that some TBFs established on that
TRX were released).
Coding rules
step size = 1sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the

cells of the BSS.
This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are
released and reestablished again some moments later. This way, the
T3 and T4 TBF reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are
currently unused, but still established.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
100
External Comment
The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer comes to make

a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom
performance:
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the higher is the GCH
resource usage on the Ater interface.
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the lower is the
average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if
the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1276 / 1436
6.2.278 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST
Logical Name
T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST
Definition
Timer to postpone the release of the last

N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS GCHs established in a
cell, when the last TBF has been released in the cell. There is
no more (E)GPRS traffic in the cell, but keeping some GCHs
established will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption
in the cell (e.g. WAP, WEB).
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
200
20
External Comment
That timer is relevant only if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS is

disabled.
The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer comes to make
a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom
performance:
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the higher is
the GCH resource usage on the Ater interface.
- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the lower is the
average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if
the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite links.
This parameter may also be used to ensure that the BSS reserves at
least one GCH resource in the serving cell while the MS is engaged
in a Web browsing session.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1277 / 1436
6.2.279 (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL) - (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
Logical Name
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
Definition
Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF phase
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec
Recommended rules

links:
- between 1 sec and 2 sec if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and
Ater terrestrial links,
- between 1.5 sec and 2.5 sec if GPRS traffic is carried either through
Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links.
If Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, the
operator shall ensure that T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL +
round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
100
4000
2000
External Comment
If GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried through satellite link
(round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) =
1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, the duration of the extended UL
phase in the MS is equal to this timer + 540ms. This is due to the
delayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side,
PTU at BTS side).
Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1278 / 1436
6.2.280 (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING) (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING
Logical Name
T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING
Definition
Time which multiplied by the GBR defines a buffer level above which
we may consider the BSS failed to provide the GBR
Coding rules
step size = 1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
100
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1279 / 1436
6.2.281 (T_NC_PING_PONG) - (T_NC_PING_PONG)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_NC_PING_PONG
Logical Name
T_NC_PING_PONG
Definition
Time during which the ping-pong offset is applied.
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
20000
5000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1280 / 1436
6.2.282 (T_NC_REJ_CELL) - (T_NC_REJ_CELL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_NC_REJ_CELL
Logical Name
T_NC_REJ_CELL
Definition
Time during which a NC cell reselection is inhibited towards that cell

due to a previous NC cell reselection failure on that cell.
Coding rules
step size = 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
20000
5000
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1281 / 1436
6.2.283 (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME) (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
Logical Name
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
Definition
Maximum expected response time of a network server as seen from

the MFS.
Coding rules
step size: 100 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
100
5000
1600
External Comment
1) The response time corresponds to T1 T2 where T2 corresponds

to the time at which a command is sent to the SGSN and T1 the time
at which the response is received on the MFS side. This command
/ response is e.g. the LLC PDU containing an FTP GET and the
first LLC PDU starting the file transfer. It can also be the LLC PDU
containing an HTTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the page
download.
2) The value of this timer defines the duration of the Delayed DL TBF
Release procedure. In case the servers to which the GGSN serving
the MFS is connected are not located at the same place, then the
maximum server response time should be entered. However, note
that the higher this timer is, the longer TBF releases will be delayed
and therefore the more resources are used up.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1282 / 1436
6.2.284 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_PAG_PS
Logical Name
T_PAG_PS (BSC)
Definition
This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can

remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay
on Gb and A-bis interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_PAG_PS (MFS)
Recommended rules
T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1283 / 1436
6.2.285 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_PAG_PS
Logical Name
T_PAG_PS (MFS)
Definition
This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can

remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay
on Gb and A-bis interface.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1sec
Mandatory rules
Equal to T_PAG_PS (BSC)
Recommended rules
T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer)
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1284 / 1436
6.2.286 (T_PSI_PACCH) - (T_PSI_PACCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_PSI_PACCH
Logical Name
T_PSI_PACCH
Definition
Scheduling period of PSI1, PSI13 or PSI14 on PACCH.
Coding rules
step size =1sec,

00000 == Deactivated PSI scheduling on PACCH,
00001 == 1s,
...
11110 == T_PSI_PACCH = 30 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
30
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1285 / 1436
6.2.287 (T_RESEL) - (T_RESEL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RESEL
Logical Name
T_RESEL
Definition
Timer whose expiry allows a MS, which has performed an abnormal

release with cell reselection, to reselect the previous cell.
Coding rules
coded on 3 bits, 000= 5 sec, 001= 10 sec, 010 = 15 sec, 011 = 20

sec, 100= 30 sec, 101 = 60 sec, 110 = 120 sec, 111 = 300 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
300
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1286 / 1436
6.2.288 (T_RIM_DISABILITY) - (T_RIM_DISABILITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RIM_DISABILITY
Logical Name
T_RIM_DISABILITY
Definition
Timer supervising the disability of the adjacent target cell. When no

RAN information has been received (no answer at the end of the
retries or unknown destination), this parameter corresponds to the
duration it is not possible to use the RIM NACC procedure for this
target cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
mn
360
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1287 / 1436
6.2.289 (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT) - (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT
Logical Name
T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT
Definition
Timer supervising reception of the following RAN Information with

multiple report. It allows to resynchronize the System Information
messages with the remote entity in case of restart of the remote
entity.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
mn
15
360
60
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1288 / 1436
6.2.290 (T_RIM_RI) - (T_RIM_RI)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RIM_RI
Logical Name
T_RIM_RI
Definition
Timer supervising reception of RAN Information ACK
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
255
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1289 / 1436
6.2.291 (T_RIM_RIR) - (T_RIM_RIR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RIM_RIR
Logical Name
T_RIM_RIR
Definition
Timer supervising reception of RAN Information
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
255
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1290 / 1436
6.2.292 (T_ul_assign_PCCCH) - (T_ul_assign_pccch)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_ul_assign_PCCCH
Logical Name
T_ul_assign_pccch
Definition
The duration between the reception of the (EGPRS) Packet Channel

Request message and one uplink radio block allocated to the MS.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

links:
- T_ul_asssign_pccch = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis
and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,
- T_ul_assign_pccch = 0.7 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through
Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.1
0.7
0.4
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1291 / 1436
6.2.293 (T3168) - (T3168 (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3168
Logical Name
T3168 (BSC)
Definition
This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet
UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case
of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel
Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF).
Broadcast in SI13 within the GPRS Cell Options IE.
Coding rules
Coded on 3 bits as follows:

001: 1000 ms
010: 1500 ms
011: 2000 ms
100: 2500 ms
101: 3000 ms
110: 3500 ms
111: 4000 ms.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

links:
- T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater
satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in the serving cell and
Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM).
- T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and the
MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms),
and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
1292 / 1436
The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for
granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover
the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS
before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile
Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release
of the Alcatel BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1293 / 1436
6.2.294 (T3168) - (T3168 (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3168
Logical Name
T3168 (MFS)
Definition
This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet
UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case
of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel
Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF).
Broadcast in PSI1 within the GPRS Cell Options IE.
Coding rules

001: 1000 ms
010: 1500 ms
011: 2000 ms
100: 2500 ms
101: 3000 ms
110: 3500 ms
111: 4000 ms.
Mandatory rules
Equal to T3168 (BSC)
Recommended rules

links:
- T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater
terrestrial links,
- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite
links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS)
= 0 (TDM).
- T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and the
MFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms),
and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
External Comment
1294 / 1436
The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for
granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover
the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS
before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile
Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release
of the Alcatel BSS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1295 / 1436
6.2.295 (T3192) - (T3192 (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3192
Logical Name
T3192 (BSC)
Definition
Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of

the final block by the MS.
Coding rules

0 0 0: 500 msec
0 0 1: 1000 msec
0 1 0: 1500 msec
1 1 1: 200 msec
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)

links:
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial
links in the serving cell:
i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the
delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if
DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)
ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the
delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if
DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)
iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :
- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed
phase, and
- the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS,
which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready
state.
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or
Ater satellite links in the serving cell:
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
1296 / 1436
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
200
1500
500
External Comment
The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not
supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:
0 1 1: 0 msec
1 0 0: 80 msec
1 0 1: 120 msec
1 1 0: 160 msec
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1297 / 1436
6.2.296 (T3192) - (T3192 (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3192
Logical Name
T3192 (MFS)
Definition
Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of

the final block by the MS.
Coding rules

0 0 0: 500 msec
0 0 1: 1000 msec
0 1 0: 1500 msec
1 1 1: 200 msec
Mandatory rules

Recommended rules
T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)

links:
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial
links in the serving cell:
iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :
- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed
phase, and
- the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS,
which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready
state.
==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or
Ater satellite links in the serving cell:
DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1).
In IP mode, the operator shall ensure that T3192 +
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
1298 / 1436
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
200
1500
500
External Comment
The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not
supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:
0 1 1: 0 msec
1 0 0: 80 msec
1 0 1: 120 msec
1 1 0: 160 msec
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1299 / 1436
6.2.297 (T3212) - (T3212 (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3212
Logical Name
T3212 (MFS)
Definition
This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive

Periodic Location Update procedures.
Coding rules
0: no periodic location update, coded on 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
6 mn
255
30
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1300 / 1436
6.2.298 (TBF_CS_DL) - (TBF_CS_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_CS_DL
Logical Name
TBF_CS_DL
Definition
Threshold defining the number of consecutive PACKET DOWNLINK

ACK/NACK not received above which the Coding Scheme of a DL
acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to CS-1.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater
terrestrial link, in case where N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then
the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link
adaptation but TBF release.
If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellite
link, in case where N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then
the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link
adaptation but TBF release.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1301 / 1436
6.2.299 (TBF_CS_UL) - (TBF_CS_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_CS_UL
Logical Name
TBF_CS_UL
Definition
Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the

network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from
the MS having a monoslot GPRS TBF before changing the coding
scheme to CS1. For a multislot GPRS TBF, TBF_CS_UL_limit :=
TBF_CS_UL x n_allocated
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
64
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1302 / 1436
6.2.300 (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD
Logical Name
TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD
Definition
Defines the window size required to estimate the CS3 BLER. The
window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
512
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1303 / 1436
6.2.301 (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD
Logical Name
TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD
Definition
Defines the window size required to estimate the CS4 BLER. The
window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
512
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1304 / 1436
6.2.302 (TBF_DL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_CS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_DL_INIT_CS
Logical Name
TBF_DL_INIT_CS
Definition
Value of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation

algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case
of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the
downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is
enabled.
Coding rules
0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4
Mandatory rules
TBF_DL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS
Recommended rules

TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1305 / 1436
6.2.303 (TBF_MCS_DL) - (TBF_MCS_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_MCS_DL
Logical Name
TBF_MCS_DL
Definition
Threshold defining the number of consecutive EGPRS PACKET

DOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the MCS of a DL
acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to MCS-1.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
12
External Comment
If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater
terrestrial link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL
then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will not
trigger link adaptation but TBF release.
If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater
satellite link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
< TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL
ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1306 / 1436
6.2.304 (TBF_MCS_UL) - (TBF_MCS_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_MCS_UL
Logical Name
TBF_MCS_UL
Definition
Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the

network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from the
MS having a monoslot EGPRS TBF before changing the coding
scheme to MCS1. For a multislot EGPRS TBF, TBF_MCS_UL_limit
:= TBF_MCS_UL x n_allocated_timeslots.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
192
32
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1307 / 1436
6.2.305 (TBF_UL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_CS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_UL_INIT_CS
Logical Name
TBF_UL_INIT_CS
Definition
Value of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm
is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBF
resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplink
coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled.
Coding rules
0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4
Mandatory rules
TBF_UL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS
Recommended rules

TBF_UL_INIT_CS].
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when

link adaptation is enabled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1308 / 1436
6.2.306 (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING) - (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING
Logical Name
THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING
Definition
Threshold above which the load of the serving cell is considered in a

high load situation in the NC2 cell ranking process
Coding rules
Step size of 10%

0 : 0%; 1: 10%; .... 10 : 100%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
External Comment
This parameter is only relevant if the parameter

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "2: NC2 mode
of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "3: NC2 mode of operation for
all MS".
The serving cell is considered in a low load situation when
THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 0 %. The value of 0 % deactivates
the load evaluation in the serving cell.
The load situation of external cells is unknown in the serving cell.
The BSS then computes the NC2 load of those cells as follows:
- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to a value lower
than 100 %, then the cell is considered in a low load situation.
- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to 100 %, then
the cell is considered in an high load situation
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1309 / 1436
6.2.307 (TOM8_PRIORITY) - (TOM8_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TOM8_PRIORITY
Logical Name
TOM8_PRIORITY
Definition
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined TOM8 Packet
Flow Context
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1310 / 1436
6.2.308 (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR
Logical Name
TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR
Definition
Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad

transmission efficiency in acknowledged mode.
Coding rules
step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1311 / 1436
6.2.309 (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR
Logical Name
TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR
Definition
Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad

transmission efficiency in unacknowledged mode.
Coding rules
step size = 1%
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1312 / 1436
6.2.310 (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Logical Name
TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Definition
Number of received RLC data blocks for GPRS TBF after which
TX_EFFICIENCY is computed.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
500
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1313 / 1436
6.2.311 (TX_INT) - (TX_INT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TX_INT
Logical Name
TX_INT
Definition
Number of PRACH timeslots to spread transmission of PACKET

CHANNEL REQUEST.
Coding rules
Possible values are : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25,

32, 50, coded from 0000 to 1111
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
It is recommended to set TX_INT so that the corresponding

spreading time is about 240 ms.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
50
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1314 / 1436
6.2.312 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (MFS))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TX_INTEGER
Logical Name
Tx_integer (MFS)
Definition
Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL

REQUEST.
Coding rules
Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,
50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111
Mandatory rules
Equal to Tx_Integer (BSC)
Recommended rules
When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it

is recommended to set:
=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.
When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is
recommended to set:
TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.
The number of slots belonging to the MSs RACH between 2
successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn
randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the
set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the
CCCH configuration as shown below:
1) for non combined CCCH:
Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)
2) for combined CCCH:
Note:
- In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH
frames per 51-multiframe
- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames
per 51-multiframe.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
1315 / 1436
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
50
32
External Comment
When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set:

=0
TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1316 / 1436
6.2.313 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject) - (WI_PR)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject
Logical Name
WI_PR
Definition
Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT

or PACKET ACCESS REJECT in the nominal case (see the
WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD parameter for the particular cases).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
255
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1317 / 1436
6.2.314 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload)
- (WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when

CPU overload
Logical Name
WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Definition
Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT or

PACKET ACCESS REJECT in case of PPC CPU or memory
overload.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
255
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1318 / 1436
6.2.315 (Weight_P10) - (Weight_P10)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P10
Logical Name
Weight_P10
Definition
Weight to be used for a TBF/PFC of priority 10
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
weight_Px >= weight_Py if x<y
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1319 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P11
Logical Name
Weight_P11
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1320 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P12
Logical Name
Weight_P12
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1321 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P13
Logical Name
Weight_P13
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1322 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P14
Logical Name
Weight_P14
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1323 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P15
Logical Name
Weight_P15
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1324 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P4
Logical Name
Weight_P4
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1325 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P5
Logical Name
Weight_P5
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
11
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1326 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P6
Logical Name
Weight_P6
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
10
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1327 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P7
Logical Name
Weight_P7
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1328 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P8
Logical Name
Weight_P8
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1329 / 1436

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Weight_P9
Logical Name
Weight_P9
Definition
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1330 / 1436
7 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters
1331 / 1436
7.1 Network (CDE)

7.1.1 (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS) - (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS
Logical Name
EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS
Definition
This flag enables / disables downlink retransmission in the BTS.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
DL retransmission in the BTS will be disabled by the MFS in the

cells having an Abis or an Ater satellite link (whatever the TRE type).
In a cell with terrestrial Abis and Ater links, this feature is disabled
for G3 TREs only.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1332 / 1436
7.1.2 (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN) - (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN
Logical Name
MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN
Definition
Minimum throughput gain required to be provided to the MS when

performing a T2 or T3 TBF reallocation.
Coding rules
step size = 0,1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
0,1
0,3
External Comment
Increasing the value of this parameter above 0,3 might block some
reallocations for mobiles having a high multislot class (multislot class
>= 30).
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1333 / 1436
7.1.3 (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS) - (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS
Logical Name
N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS
Definition
Two definitions are possible :

- If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "enabled" : number of
GCHs required to be established due to the "Fast Initial PS Access"
feature,
- If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "disabled" : number of
GCHs to keep established when there is no more (E)GPRS traffic in
a cell (while the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer is running). Those
GCHs will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
MFS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1334 / 1436
7.2 Site (CAE)

7.2.1 (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION) (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION
Logical Name
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION
Definition
Allows EDA operations for mobile stations in DTM mode.
Coding rules
0: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is not allowed,
1: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is allowed.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This flag is relevant only if DTM and EDA are both activated.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1335 / 1436
7.2.2 (BEP_PERIOD) - (BEP_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
BEP_PERIOD
Logical Name
BEP_PERIOD
Definition
Filter constant for EGPRS channel quality measurements.
Coding rules
coded on 4 bits as follows:

0: 1
1: 2
2: 3
3: 4
4: 5
5: 7
6: 10
7: 12
8: 15
9: 20
10: 25
11: Reserved for future use
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
25
10
External Comment
The BEP_PERIOD parameter defines the forgetting factor used in

the MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averaging at the MS side.
In case of cell without frequency hopping and without "fast" mobiles
(i.e. not motorway or TGV coverage), it is advised to set a higher
value (e.g. 25) in order to avoid spurious MCS changes causing
higher BLER and throughput loss.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1336 / 1436
7.2.3 (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Logical Name
E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Definition
Number of received radio blocks for an EGPRS TBF after which

E_TX_EFFICIENCY is computed.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
500
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1337 / 1436
7.2.4 (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL) - (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL
Logical Name
EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL
Definition
Activation level of Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
Coding rules
0: EDA activated for all mobile stations (supporting the feature),

1: EDA activated for R99-onwards mobile stations (supporting the
feature),
2: EDA activated for Rel-4-onwards mobile stations (supporting the
feature).
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
-This parameter is relevant only if EDA is activated (EN_EDA

parameter).
-The activation level may provide an artificial mean to limit the
inter-operability risks due to mobile stations with uncorrected EDA
implementation (EDA is a R97 feature but has been completely
clarified in Rel-6).
- R99 is detected through the Revision Level Indicator.
- A mobile station is considered as Rel4-onwards compliant if it
indicates the field "GERAN Feature Package 1" in its MS Radio
Access Capability.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1338 / 1436
7.2.5 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT) - (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT
Logical Name
EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT
Definition
For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis

terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the
maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet
Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
32
20
External Comment
If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of

consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but
TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to
release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling
frequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS
multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1339 / 1436
7.2.6 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Logical Name
EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
Definition
For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis

satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum
number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control
Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
32
24
External Comment
If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then the

loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link
adaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit_Satellite has
to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad
radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor,
T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number
of TBFs per PDCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1340 / 1436
7.2.7 (EN_EDA) - (EN_EDA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_EDA
Logical Name
EN_EDA
Definition
Enables Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
Coding rules
0: EDA not activated,

1: EDA activated
Mandatory rules
EN_EDA = 0 in case of extended cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
When EDA is activated, its activation domain is

given by the EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL and
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION parameters.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1341 / 1436
7.2.8 (EN_IR_UL) - (EN_IR_UL_per_cell)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_IR_UL
Logical Name
EN_IR_UL_per_cell
Definition
Enables/Disables Incremental redundancy for the uplink TBF in the

BSS.
Coding rules
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Among the features Incremental Redundancy in

uplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink
(EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell), Alcatel recommends to
enable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activation
of both at the same time may reduce the gain of the Incremental
Redundancy
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The Incremental Redundancy for the uplink TBF feature is supported

only from G4 onwards BTSs.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1342 / 1436
7.2.9 (EN_MCS1_in_CRP) - (EN_MCS1_in_CRP)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_MCS1_in_CRP
Logical Name
EN_MCS1_in_CRP
Definition
Enables the forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in

contention resolution phase at one-phase access to make this phase
more robust.
Coding rules
0: the BSS does not force uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during
the contention resolution phase at one-phase access.
1: the BSS forces uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during the
contention resolution phase at one-phase access.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
The forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contention

resolution phase at one-phase access corresponds to the behaviour
in B9.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1343 / 1436
7.2.10 (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL) (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL
Logical Name
EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell
Definition
Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the uplink TBF in the cell, in

case of RLC in acknowledged mode.
Coding rules
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL)

and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL),
Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy in
Uplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gain
of the Incremental Redundancy
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1344 / 1436
7.2.11 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS) (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS
Logical Name
INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS
Definition
Number of PDCHs on which MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL

and MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when
establishing GCHs for an EGPRS TBF associated to a "short data"
MS transfer.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

TBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and new
TBF established after modification
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1345 / 1436
7.2.12 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL) (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Logical Name
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Definition
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the DL EGPRS

TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL,
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN
[TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS].
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
1346 / 1436
MCS-1 coded as 0
MCS-2 coded as 1
MCS-3 coded as 2
MCS-4 coded as 3
MCS-5 coded as 4
MCS-6 coded as 5
MCS-7 coded as 6
MCS-8 coded as 7
MCS-9 coded as 8

- Setting this parameter to MCS-2 might introduce some problems
(because a MCS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might
therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be
sent in the M-EGCH link in DL).
- If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher than
MAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1347 / 1436
7.2.13 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL) (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Logical Name
MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Definition
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the UL EGPRS

TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer.
Coding rules
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
MCS-1 coded as 0
MCS-2 coded as 1
MCS-3 coded as 2
MCS-4 coded as 3
MCS-5 coded as 4
MCS-6 coded as 5
MCS-7 coded as 6
MCS-8 coded as 7
MCS-9 coded as 8
External Comment

- If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher than
MAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1348 / 1436
7.2.14 (MCS_AVG_PERIOD) - (MCS_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MCS_AVG_PERIOD
Logical Name
MCS_AVG_PERIOD
Definition
Filtering period used for calculation of the forgetting factor applied to

the current UL MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP samples in the averaging
Modulation and Coding Scheme adaptation filter
Coding rules
step size = 20ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
0.02
0.1
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1349 / 1436
7.2.15 (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU) - (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU)

Parameter Name
Definition
HMI Name
N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU
Logical Name
N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU
Number of free 64k Ater TSs that are kept "in reserve" in order to
be able to serve some prioritary requests in cells managed by the
GPU. The prioritary requests are the GCH establishment requests
launched when the first TBF has to be established in a cell (useful to
guarantee that MM traffic will be supported in any cell at any time).
In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU = 0, then no Ater margin is
managed.
In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU > 0, RRM will ensure that
N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU 64k Ater TSs are always free (i.e. not
used by a GCH in the GPU). From then on, only prioritary requests
will be allowed to establish some GCHs with those Ater resources.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment

- Increasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU will make the
average number of unused Ater nibbles in the GPU increase. That
corresponds to a loss of Ater resources on the field, as the on-going
TBF traffic will never "benefit from the margin of Ater resources". But,
on the other hand, the likelihood of not serving a prioritary request in
the GPU will be become very low.
- Decreasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU (to a non
null value) will make it possible that prioritary requests cannot be
served in case several such requests have to be served in a short
period of time (i.e. before having had the time to "fill the Ater margin"
up again), especially if the requests have to be served on several
different DSPs (one 64k Ater TS will be consumed by each DSP).
- Setting N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU to 0 will make it possible the
cases where prioritary requests cannot be served at all.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1350 / 1436
7.2.16 (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA) - (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA
Logical Name
N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA
Definition
Minimum number of consecutive significantly-uplink biases observed

during a transfer to allow a mobile station to use Extended Dynamic
Allocation.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
64
External Comment
This parameter can allow using EDA only in case of big UL transfers
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1351 / 1436
7.2.17 (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport
Logical Name
T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport
Definition
Time period to request for an EGPRS Packet Downlink Ack/Nack

with measurements.
Coding rules
step size = 20 ms
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
ms
60
3000
200
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1352 / 1436
7.2.18 (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_DL_INIT_MCS
Logical Name
TBF_DL_INIT_MCS
Definition
Value of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link
adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in
case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the
downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation
algorithm is enabled.
Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Mandatory rules
TBF_DL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Recommended rules

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
MCS-1
MCS-2
MCS-3
MCS-4
MCS-5
MCS-6
MCS-7
MCS-8
MCS-9
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1353 / 1436
7.2.19 (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
Logical Name
TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
Definition
Value of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link
adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or
in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of
the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation
algorithm is enabled.
Coding rules
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Mandatory rules
TBF_UL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Recommended rules

Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
MCS-1
MCS-2
MCS-3
MCS-4
MCS-5
MCS-6
MCS-7
MCS-8
MCS-9
External Comment
The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled. Exception

cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when link
adaptation is enabled.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1354 / 1436
8 DTM Telecom Parameters
1355 / 1436
8.1 Site (CAE)

8.1.1 (EN_DTM) - (EN_DTM)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_DTM
Logical Name
EN_DTM
Definition
Enables/disables the support of dual transfer mode
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
EN_DTM may be set to 1 only if :

-CELL_RANGE = 0
-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
((E)GPRS is mandatory for DTM operation, and at least 2 PDCHs

are required in the PS zone for allocation of DTM resources to (at
least) one DTM call, therefore, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD shall at
least be equal to 2.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1356 / 1436
8.1.2 (MAX_LAPDM) - (MAX_LAPDM)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MAX_LAPDM
Logical Name
MAX_LAPDM
Definition
Maximum number of LAPDm frames on which a layer 3 can be

segmented into and be sent on the main DCCH.
Coding rules
Coded on 3 bits:
000 : 5
001 : 6
....
111 : 12
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
12
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1357 / 1436
8.1.3 (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30) - (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30
Logical Name
N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30
Definition
Number of TCH usage information update periods to be waited by

the BSC before moving the TCH of a DTM capable MS from the PS
zone to the CS zone (intracell handover cause 30).
"zero" means that the feature "avoid ping-pong between CS and PS
zones for DTM MS" is not activated.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
10
External Comment

applied on the handovers cause 30 detected after the modification
(didnt apply on running timers).
- the delay applied by the BSC is between
N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 * TCH_INFO_PERIOD and
(N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 + 1) * TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1358 / 1436
9 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters
1359 / 1436
9.1 Network (CDE)

9.1.1 (FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT) - (FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT
Logical Name
FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT
Definition
This parameter defines the way "fake" 3G FDD UARFCNs are

managed in the SI2Quater message content, in order to cope with
faulty MS within networks where the GSM to UTRAN TD-SCDMA
cell reselection is enabled.
Coding rules
0: Not managed
1: Managed in every SI2Q instance
2: Managed only in SI2Q instances containing legacy 3G IEs.
Mandatory rules
- For a given 2G cell, where both

EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, if
FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT = 1 then there shall be no more
than 8 distinct ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G
TDD cells target for reselection and there shall be no more than 4
distinct ARFCN_LTE(TDD) among all the neighbour LTE TDD
cells target for reselection.
Recommended rules
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- This parameter is relevant only in 2G cells where

EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is <> disabled, ie when
at least one neighbour 3G TDD UARFCN has to be broadcasted in
SI2Quater.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1360 / 1436
9.2 Site (CAE)

9.2.1 (CI_LTE) - (CI_LTE)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI_LTE
Logical Name
CI_LTE
Definition
This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external LTE (FDD

or TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 36.300.
Coding rules
Binary value on 28 bits is expanded to 32 bits (with the four Most

Significant Bits set to "1").
Mandatory rules
(MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE and CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a

LTE cell inside the OMC
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
268435455
None
External Comment
- The CI_LTE is equivalent to the long/standard eNode-B Id.

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1361 / 1436
9.2.2 (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) - (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G
Logical Name
DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G
Definition
Default priority associated to any UARFCN not explicitely

broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable
MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 1
"0" is the lowest priority,
"7" the highest
Mandatory rules
The DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of a given BSS shall be different from

any priority (GERAN_PRIORITY) of its related 2G cells (which has at
least one neighbour 3G or LTE cell for reselection), and different from
any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of all those target
neighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

traffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts System
Information Broadcasting. Change applied immediately after
modification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicated
Packet Measurement Order messages of the current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1362 / 1436
9.2.3 (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G
Logical Name
DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G
Definition
Default minimum received level associated to any UARFCN not

explicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
Coded_value = (dBm + 119) / 2, step size = 2 dBm
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-119
-57
-119
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1363 / 1436
9.2.4 (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G) - (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
DEFAULT_THRESH_3G
Logical Name
DEFAULT_THRESH_3G
Definition
Default threshold associated to any UARFCN not explicitly

MS/UE.
Coding rules
Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
62
30
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1364 / 1436
9.2.5 (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition
Enables/Disables the GSM to E-UTRAN FDD cell reselection and

defines the LTE search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.
The adjacent EUARFCNs can be configured at LTE cell level only
(ARFCN_LTE).
Those EUARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules
0: Disabled,
1: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
2: Enabled with LTE search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1,
4: Enabled with LTE search activated with flexible priority while the
UE/MS is in GMM ready state.
Mandatory rules
- Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working

are exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same
time a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell
for which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 or
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0).
- EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
disabled at the same time.
- EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 2
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0.
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if
(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
- It is not allowed to have
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 if the cell is
owned by a BSC connected to a legacy MFS.
- if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
they shall have the same value.
Recommended rules
Value 3 should be used only in case of good LTE FDD coverage.
Category
Site (CAE)
1365 / 1436
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- If EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the

NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation
for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwards
MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the LTE search is
systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through
the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This LTE search
deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
Channel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of the
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1366 / 1436
9.2.6 (EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition
Enables/Disables the GSM to E-UTRAN TDD cell reselection and

defines the LTE search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.
The adjacent EUARFCNs can be configured at LTE cell level only
(ARFCN_LTE).
Those EUARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules
0: Disabled,
ready state,
2: Enabled with LTE search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1,
4: Enabled with LTE search activated with flexible priority while the
1367 / 1436
Mandatory rules

- Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-working
time a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell
where both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled.
- EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
disabled
at the same time.
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
- if both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 2
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0 and
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
- It is not allowed to have
EN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 if the cell is
owned by a BSC connected to a legacy MFS.
Recommended rules
Value 3 should be used only in case of good LTE TDD coverage.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1368 / 1436
External Comment
- If EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the

MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the LTE search is
the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This LTE search
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1369 / 1436
9.2.7 (EUARFCN) - (ARFCN_LTE(FDD))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EUARFCN
Logical Name
ARFCN_LTE(FDD)
Definition
Downlink FDD E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel

Number (EUARFCN) of an external LTE FDD cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Only the following downlink EUARFCN ranges are standardized for

FDD:
1) 0 599 and
2) 600 1199 and
3) 1200 1949 and
4) 1950 2399 and
5) 2400 2649 and
6) 2650 - 2749 and (see recommendations)
7I) 2750 - 3449 and
8) 3450 - 3799 and
9) 3800 4149 and
10) 4150 4749 and
11) 4750 4999 and (see recommendations)
12) 5000 5179 and
13) 5180 5279 and
14) 5280 5379 and
17) 5730 5849 and
18) 5850 5999 and
19) 6000 6149 and
20) 6150 6449 and
21) 6450 6599
- For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinct
ARFCN_LTE(FDD) among all the neighbour LTE FDD cells target
for reselection.
Recommended rules
For 2G-LTE interworking need, Alcatel-Lucent recommends

configuring EUARFCN value compliant with values recommended by
3GPP release 9, where band 6 is not applicable anymore, and band
11 is limited up to 4949.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
1370 / 1436
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_LTE is FDD

- The FDD EUARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The FDD EUARFCNs of the LTE neighbour cells configured for
reselection are broadcast on BCCH.
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1371 / 1436
9.2.8 (EUARFCN) - (ARFCN_LTE(TDD))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EUARFCN
Logical Name
ARFCN_LTE(TDD)
Definition
Downlink TDD E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel

Number (EUARFCN) of an external
LTE TDD cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Only the following downlink EUARFCN ranges are standardized for

TDD:
33) 36000 36199 and
34) 36200 36349 and
35) 36350 36949 and
36) 36950 37549 and
37) 37550 37749 and
38) 37750 - 38249 and
39) 38250 - 38649 and
40) 38650 - 39649
ARFCN_LTE(TDD) among all the neighbour LTE TDD cells target for
reselection.
FAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT = 1 then
there shall be no more than 4 distinct ARFCN_LTE(TDD) among all
the neighbour LTE TDD cells target for reselection.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
1372 / 1436
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_LTE is TDD

- The TDD EUARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The TDD EUARFCNs of the LTE neighbour cells configured for
reselection are broadcast on BCCH.
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1373 / 1436
9.2.9 (GERAN_PRIORITY) - (GERAN_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
GERAN_PRIORITY
Logical Name
GERAN_PRIORITY
Definition
Gives the priority for the serving cell. Used for cell reselection by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 1,
"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest
Mandatory rules
When a given serving 2G cell has at least one neighbour 3G or

LTE cell for reselection, then GERAN_PRIORITY shall be different
from any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of its
neighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection, and different from the
DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of its BSS.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1374 / 1436
9.2.10 (H_PRIO) - (H_PRIO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
H_PRIO
Logical Name
H_PRIO
Definition
Hysteresis used in the priority reselection algorithm by a LTE-capable

MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 1
Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC
0: 6: Rule disabled
1: 5: 5 dB
2: 4: 4 dB
3: 3: 3 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1375 / 1436
9.2.11 (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH) - (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH
Logical Name
MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH
Definition
Number of resources blocks (NRB) over which an MS/UE

LTE-capable could measure.
Coding rules
0 (coded) = 6
1 (coded) = 15
2 (coded) = 25
3 (coded) = 50
4 (coded) = 75
5 (coded) = 100
Mandatory rules
All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE
shall be given the same MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH value (to
be checked on a per RAT basis).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
100
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1376 / 1436
9.2.12 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell) - (MCC_LTE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell
Logical Name
MCC_LTE
Definition
Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell

of the own or of a foreign PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- The MCC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs
- (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
None
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1377 / 1436
9.2.13 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell) - (MNC_LTE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell
Logical Name
MNC_LTE
Definition
Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cell

of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- The MNC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs.
- (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify a
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
None
External Comment
- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only

- The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.
binary coded 1111)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1378 / 1436
9.2.14 (PRIORITY_3G) - (PRIORITY_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PRIORITY_3G
Logical Name
PRIORITY_3G
Definition
Priority associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted by the

BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 1,
"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest.
Mandatory rules
- All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC

Evolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the same
PRIORITY_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).
- The PRIORITY_3G of a given 3G cell, neighbour for reselection to
one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority
(GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority
(DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, and
different from any priority (PRIORITY_LTE) of the LTE cell(s) (if any)
neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1379 / 1436
9.2.15 (PRIORITY_LTE) - (PRIORITY_LTE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
PRIORITY_LTE
Logical Name
PRIORITY_LTE
Definition
Priority associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly broadcasted by

the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 1,
"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest.
Mandatory rules
- All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE
shall be given the same PRIORITY_LTE value (to be checked on a
per RAT basis).
- The PRIORITY_LTE of a given LTE cell, neighbour for reselection
to one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority
(GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority
(DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, and
different from any priority (PRIORITY_3G) of the 3G cell(s) (if any)
neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1380 / 1436
9.2.16 (QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (QRXLEVMIN_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
QRXLEVMIN_3G
Logical Name
QRXLEVMIN_3G
Definition
Minimum received level required for a given UARFCN broadcasted

by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSC

QRXLEVMIN_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-119
-57
-119
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1381 / 1436
9.2.17 (QRXLEVMIN_LTE) - (QRXLEVMIN_LTE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
QRXLEVMIN_LTE
Logical Name
QRXLEVMIN_LTE
Definition
Minimum received level required for a given EUARFCN broadcasted

Coding rules
Mandatory rules
All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTE
shall be given the same QRXLEVMIN_LTE value (to be checked
on a per RAT basis).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-140
-78
-140
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1382 / 1436
9.2.18 (Qsearch_P_LTE) - (Qsearch_P_LTE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Qsearch_P_LTE
Logical Name
Qsearch_P_LTE
Definition
Threshold for searching for LTE cells in GPRS depending whether

the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the
threshold.
Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC

0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
7: -70: Always search for LTE neighbour cells
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
15: -50: Never search for LTE neighbour cells
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-98
-50
-50
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1383 / 1436
9.2.19 (RAT_LTE) - (RAT_LTE)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RAT_LTE
Logical Name
RAT_LTE
Definition
This parameter defines the radio access technology of an external

LTE cell.
Coding rules
0: FDD
1: TDD
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1384 / 1436
9.2.20 (T_RESELECTION) - (T_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T_RESELECTION
Logical Name
T_RESELECTION
Definition
Period during which the cell reselection criteria of the priority

algorithm must be verified to allow the cell reselection; used by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
Coded_value = (sec / 5) - 1, step size = 5
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
20
External Comment

traffic is not disrupted
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1385 / 1436
9.2.21 (THRESH_2G_LOW) - (THRESH_2G_LOW)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESH_2G_LOW
Logical Name
THRESH_2G_LOW
Definition
Gives the threshold of the GSM serving cell (and all measured
GSM cells). Used in the priority algorithm for cell reselection by a
LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 2 dB
Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC
0: 0: 0 dB
1: 2: 2 dB
2: 4: 4 dB
3: 6: 6 dB
4: 8: 8 dB
5: 10: 10 dB
6: 12: 12 dB
7: 14: 14 dB
8: 16: 16 dB
9: 18: 18 dB
10: 20: 20 dB
11: 22: 22 dB
12: 24: 24 dB
13: 26: 26 dB
14: 28: 28 dB
15: 30: always select a LTE cell is possible
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
30
30
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1386 / 1436
9.2.22 (THRESH_3G_HIGH) - (THRESH_3G_HIGH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESH_3G_HIGH
Logical Name
THRESH_3G_HIGH
Definition
Threshold (high) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly

MS/UE.
Coding rules
Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2
Mandatory rules

THRESH_3G_HIGH value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).
- THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
62
30
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1387 / 1436
9.2.23 (THRESH_3G_LOW) - (THRESH_3G_LOW)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESH_3G_LOW
Logical Name
THRESH_3G_LOW
Definition
Threshold (low) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted

Coding rules
Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2
Mandatory rules

THRESH_3G_LOW value (to be checked at Network level and on a
per RAT basis).
- THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
62
30
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1388 / 1436
9.2.24 (THRESH_LTE_HIGH) - (THRESH_LTE_HIGH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Logical Name
THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Definition
Threshold (high) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly

MS/UE.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
shall be given the same THRESH_LTE_HIGH value (to be checked
- THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
62
30
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1389 / 1436
9.2.25 (THRESH_LTE_LOW) - (THRESH_LTE_LOW)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESH_LTE_LOW
Logical Name
THRESH_LTE_LOW
Definition
Threshold (low) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly

MS/UE.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
shall be given the same THRESH_LTE_LOW value (to be checked
- THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
LTE cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
62
30
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1390 / 1436
9.2.26 (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH) - (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH
Logical Name
THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH
Definition
Threshold for the serving cell that controls inter-RAT measurements.

Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.
Coding rules
step size = 3 dBm

Coded value (decimal): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC
0: -98: -98 dBm
1: -95: -95 dBm
2: -92: -92 dBm
3: -89: -89 dBm
4: -86: -86 dBm
5: -83: -83 dBm
6: -80: -80 dBm
7: -77: -77 dBm
8: -74: -74 dBm
9: -71: -71 dBm
10: -68: -68 dBm
11: -65: -65 dBm
12: -62: -62 dBm
13: -59: -59 dBm
14: -56: -56 dBm
15: -53: Always
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-98
-53
-53
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1391 / 1436
1392 / 1436
10 2G-3G Telecom Parameters
1393 / 1436
10.1 Network (CDE)

10.1.1 (CGI_3G_REQUIRED) - (CGI_3G_REQD)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
CGI_3G_REQUIRED
Logical Name
CGI_3G_REQD
Definition
Controls the format of an external 3G cell identification, sent to the

MSC on the A interface for 2G to 3G handover.
Coding rules
0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Alcatel-Lucent recommend to set the CGI_3G_REQD parameter to 1

provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_3G_REQD
parameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN
2G to 3G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is
recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any
additional Telecom outage.
Category
Network (CDE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1394 / 1436
10.2 Site (CAE)

10.2.1 (A_ECNO_HO) - (A_ECNO_HO)
Parameter Name
HMI Name
A_ECNO_HO
Logical Name
A_ECNO_HO
Definition
Window size for Ec/No level averages for 2G to 3G handover
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Samfr
31
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
Single
Umbrella
Concentric
Concentric Umbrella
Microcell
Minicell
Extended inner cell
Extended outer cell
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1395 / 1436
10.2.2 (Cell Capacity Class) - (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Cell Capacity Class
Logical Name
CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
Definition
Capacity class of the cell, measured on a linear scale, ranging from 1

to 100.
Coding rules
binary value on 8 bits
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
the Cell Capacity Class shall follow the recommended rule: "In order
to fulfill the 3GPP requirement of having a linear scale in the capacity
class, ranging from 1 to 100:
Cell Capacity Class is a linear function of the Cell capacity: value 1
shall indicate the minimum capacity class, and 100 shall indicate the
maximum capacity class. Capacity class should be measured on a
linear scale.
The default value of Cell Capacity Class should depend on the
number of available TCHs in the cell and since there may be up to
126 TCH channels in one GSM cell:
Cell_Capacity_Class = int{[(99/125) x (NTCH - 1)] + 1}
where NTCH is the number of all TCH channels in the Cell."
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1396 / 1436
10.2.3 (CI_3G) - (CI_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
CI_3G
Logical Name
CI_3G
Definition
This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external 3G (FDD

or TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401.
Coding rules
Binary value on 16 bits
Mandatory rules
(MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together

uniquely identify a 3G cell
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1397 / 1436
10.2.4 (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO) (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO
Logical Name
EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO
Definition
Allows handovers towards 3G cells for a given MS when I.E. Service

Handover is missing and the load in the serving cell is high (see
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)
Coding rules
0 : disable, 1 : enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1398 / 1436
10.2.5 (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name
EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition
Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN FDD cell reselections and

defines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.
The adjacent UARFCNs can be configured either at BSS level
(FDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell level (ARFCN_3G).
Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules
0: Disabled
1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state,
2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state.
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1.
4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while the
Mandatory rules
- EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
- FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive:
for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a
valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having,
at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both).
- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
= 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0.
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, then
Recommended rules
Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G FDD coverage.
1399 / 1436
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of

operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for
all MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated when
activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order
[NC2] message.
- If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G
search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if
Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even
when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order
[NC2] message will not be sent).
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1400 / 1436
10.2.6 (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Logical Name
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Definition
Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN TD-SCDMA cell reselections

and defines the 3G search
activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. The adjacent
UARFCNs can be configured
either at BSS level (TDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell
level (ARFCN_3G).
Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.
Coding rules
0: Disabled
ready state,
2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM
ready state.
ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1.
4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while the
1401 / 1436
Mandatory rules
- EN_2G_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at
the same time
- EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>
- TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive:
for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a valid
TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and
having, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection.
- if both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION and
- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if
EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or
Recommended rules
Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G TDD coverage.
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
1402 / 1436
External Comment
- If EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the

MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the 3G search is
the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This 3G search
EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1403 / 1436
10.2.7 (EN_3G_DIVERSITY) - (EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_3G_DIVERSITY
Logical Name
EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD)
Definition
This parameter indicates if diversity is applied for an external 3G

FDD cell.
Coding rules
1 bit:
0 diversity is not applied,
1 diversity is applied
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
- Significant only if RAT_3G is FDD.

- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on
going traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately after
modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1404 / 1436
10.2.8 (EN_3G_HO) - (EN_3G_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_3G_HO
Logical Name
EN_3G_HO
Definition
This flag enables/disables the 2G to 3G FDD handover.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
For Evolium serving cell :

Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1405 / 1436
10.2.9 (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO) (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO
Logical Name
EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO
Definition
Allows sending by the MS of Compressed Inter-RAT HO information
Coding rules
0 : disable, 1 : enable
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Shall be set to 1 only if all RNCs neighbour to this BSS support the
feature.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1406 / 1436
10.2.10 (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION) (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION
Logical Name
EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION
Definition
Defines the CPICH measurements used in the 2G to 3G cell

reselection
Coding rules
0: Only 1 CPICH measurement is used

1: CPICH Ec/No and RSCP measurements must be used
Mandatory rules
This parameter can be set on 1 only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_

RESELECTION <>0
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Flag
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1407 / 1436
10.2.11 (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION) - (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
Logical Name
EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
Definition
Enables a fast 3G/LTE (FDD or TDD) cell reselection at 2G CS call

release.
Coding rules
0:fast 3G/LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is not used.

1:only fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used.
2:only fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used.
3:fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used, 3G
otherwise.
Mandatory rules

- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
2 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 and
It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =
and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)
or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 and
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment

modification in dedicated Channel Release messages of the current
calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1408 / 1436
10.2.12 (FDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (FDD_ARFCN_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_ARFCN_LIST
Logical Name
FDD_ARFCN_LIST
Definition
List of neighbour Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G FDD neighbor cell,
adjacent to the BSS.
Up to 3 FDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for
2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method).
Coding rules
The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy value

indicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN.
Mandatory rules
- The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to -1) shall be different
from each other.
- Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized:
I) 10562-10838 and
II) 9662-9938 and
III) 1162-1513 and
IV) 1537-1738 and
V) 4357-4458 and
VI) 4387-4413 and
VII) 2237- 2563 and
VIII) 2937-3088 and
IX) 9237-9387
X) 3112-3388
XI) 3712-3812
XII) 3837- 3903
XIII) 4017-4043
XIV) 4117-4143
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
1409 / 1436
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
External Comment
- The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.

- The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on
BCCH.
- Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not
disabled
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1410 / 1436
10.2.13 (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset) - (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
Logical Name
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
Definition
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of
the neighbour GSM cells
for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection in GPRS
Coding rules
Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC

0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible
1: -28: -28 dB
2: -24: -24 dB
3: -20: -20 dB
4: -16: -16 dB
5: -12: -12 dB
6: -8: -8 dB
7: -4: -4 dB
8: 0: 0 dB
9: 4: 4 dB
10: 8: 8 dB
11: 12: 12 dB
12: 16: 16 dB
13: 20: 20 dB
14: 24: 24 dB
15: 28: 28 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-32
28
-32
External Comment
This parameter is broadcast on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated

in the serving cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1411 / 1436
10.2.14 (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) - (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
Logical Name
FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
Definition
Number of the strongest 3G cells to be reported by the MS in the

measurement report message
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
External Comment
This parameter is meaningful only if EN_3G_HO is set to enabled. If

disabled, this parameter is considered as equal to zero (the MS shall
report only 2G cells).
This parameter is broadcast on SACCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1412 / 1436
10.2.15 (FDD_Qmin) - (FDD_Qmin(BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_Qmin
Logical Name
FDD_Qmin(BSC)
Definition
Minimum threshold for Ec/Io for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.
Coding rules
0 = -20 dB
1 = -6 dB
2 = -18 dB
3 = -8dB
4 = -16dB
5 = -10dB
6 = -14dB
7 = -12dB
Mandatory rules
Equal to FDD_Qmin(MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-20
-6
-12
External Comment
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a

PBCCH allocated in the serving cell.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1413 / 1436
10.2.16 (FDD_Qmin_Offset) - (FDD_Qmin_Offset)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_Qmin_Offset
Logical Name
FDD_Qmin_Offset
Definition
Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value
Coding rules
coded on 3 bits:
0 = 0 dB,
1 = 2 dB,
2 = 4 dB,
3 = 6 dB,
4 = 8 dB,
5 = 10 dB,
6 = 12 dB,
7 = 14 dB.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
14
External Comment
Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection = 1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1414 / 1436
10.2.17 (FDD_Qoffset) - (FDD_Qoffset (BSC))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_Qoffset
Logical Name
FDD_Qoffset (BSC)
Definition
the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.
Coding rules

1: -28: -28 dB
2: -24: -24 dB
3: -20: -20 dB
4: -16: -16 dB
5: -12: -12 dB
6: -8: -8 dB
7: -4: -4 dB
8: 0: 0 dB
9: 4: 4 dB
10: 8: 8 dB
11: 12: 12 dB
12: 16: 16 dB
13: 20: 20 dB
14: 24: 24 dB
15: 28: 28 dB
Mandatory rules
Equal to FDD_Qoffset(MFS)
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-32
28
-32
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1415 / 1436
10.2.18 (FDD_RSCPmin) - (FDD_RSCPmin)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
FDD_RSCPmin
Logical Name
FDD_RSCPmin
Definition
Minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.
Coding rules
coded on 4bits:
0 = -114 dBm,
1 = -112 dBm,
2 = -110 dBm,
3 = -108 dBm,
4 = -106 dBm,
5 = -104 dBm,
6 = -102 dBm,
7 = -100 dBm,
8 = -98 dBm,
9 = -96 dBm,
10 = -94 dBm,
11 = -92 dBm,
12 = -90 dBm,
13 = -88 dBm,
14 = -86 dBm,
15 = -84 dBm.
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-114
-84
-102
External Comment
Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection=1
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1416 / 1436
10.2.19 (LAC_3G) - (LAC_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
LAC_3G
Logical Name
LAC_3G
Definition
This parameter indicates the Location Area Code of an external

3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 24.008 (in the
HANDOVER COMMAND message on A interface).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1417 / 1436
10.2.20 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell) - (MCC_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell
Logical Name
MCC_3G
Definition
Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD)

of the own or of a foreign PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- The MCC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1418 / 1436
10.2.21 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell) - (MNC_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell
Logical Name
MNC_3G
Definition
Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD)

of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN.
Coding rules
3 digits BCD
Mandatory rules
- The MNC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of the

PLMN id selected by the operator.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC.
- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together
uniquely identify a 3G cell.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Reference
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
999
None
External Comment
The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.

binary coded 1111)
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1419 / 1436
10.2.22 (Qsearch_C) - (Qsearch_C)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Qsearch_C
Logical Name
Qsearch_C
Definition
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in dedicated mode depending

whether the received signal level of the serving cell is below or above
the threshold.
Coding rules

0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In a cell where at least one 2G to 3G adjacency has been defined,

Qsearch_C =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-98
-50
-70
External Comment
This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal

level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or
above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.
This parameter is broadcast on SACCH
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1420 / 1436
10.2.23 (Qsearch_I) - (Qsearch_I)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Qsearch_I
Logical Name
Qsearch_I
Definition
Threshold for searching for 3G cells depending whether the received

level average of the
serving cell is below or above the threshold.
Coding rules

0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_I =-70, i.e.

always search for 3G neighbour cells
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-98
-50
-50
External Comment

above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1421 / 1436
10.2.24 (Qsearch_P) - (Qsearch_P)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Qsearch_P
Logical Name
Qsearch_P
Definition
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS depending whether

the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the
threshold
Coding rules

0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_P =-70, i.e.

always search for 3G neighbour cells
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-98
-50
-50
External Comment

above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold
in GPRS.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1422 / 1436
10.2.25 (Qsearch_P_PTM) - (Qsearch_P_PTM)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
Qsearch_P_PTM
Logical Name
Qsearch_P_PTM
Definition
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS packet transfer mode

depending whether the received level average of the serving cell
is below or above the threshold
Coding rules

0: -98: -98 dBm (below)
1: -94: -94 dBm (below)
2: -90: -90dBm (below)
3: -86: -86dBm (below)
4: -82: -82 dBm (below)
5: -78: -78 dBm (below)
6: -74: -74 dBm (below)
8: -78: -78 dBm (above)
9: -74: -74 dBm (above)
10: -70: -70 dBm (above)
11: -66: -66 dBm (above)
12: -62: -62 dBm (above)
13: -58: -58 dBm (above)
14: -54: -54 dBm (above)
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
MFS
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dBm
-98
-50
-50
External Comment

above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold
in GPRS packet transfer mode.
This parameter is sent in Packet Measurement Order on PACCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1423 / 1436
10.2.26 (RAT_3G) - (RAT_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RAT_3G
Logical Name
RAT_3G
Definition
This parameter defines UMTS radio access technology of an external

3G cell.
Coding rules
0: FDD
1: TDD
Mandatory rules
A 3G TDD cell can be configured for "(blind) cell reselection" only.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Enumerated
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
None
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1424 / 1436
10.2.27 (RNC_ID) - (RNC_ID_3G)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
RNC_ID
Logical Name
RNC_ID_3G
Definition
This parameter indicates the RNC Identifier or the Extended RNC

Identifier of an external 3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS
25.401 (in HO Required message sent to the MSC on A interface).
Coding rules
Binary value on 16 bits.
Mandatory rules
(MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall together

uniquely identify a 3G cel.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
65535
None
External Comment

Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1425 / 1436
10.2.28 (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G) - (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G
Logical Name
SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD
Definition
This parameter indicates the Primary Scrambling Code of an external

3G FDD cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 25.213.
Coding rules
Binary value on 9 bits.
Mandatory rules
- For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD),

SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all the
neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
511
None
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_3G is FDD

modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1426 / 1436
10.2.29 (T3121) - (T3121)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
T3121
Logical Name
T3121
Definition
This timer is started by sending an INTER SYSTEM TO UTRAN

HANDOVER message to the MS and is normally stopped when the
MS has correctly seized the UTRAN channel(s). Its purpose is to
keep the old channels sufficiently long for the MS to be able to return
to the old channels, and to release the channels if the MS is lost.
Coding rules
step size = 0.1 sec
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Timer
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSC
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
sec
25.5
14
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1427 / 1436
10.2.30 (TDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (TDD_ARFCN_LIST)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TDD_ARFCN_LIST
Logical Name
TDD_ARFCN_LIST
Definition
List of neighbour Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G TDD neighbor cell
(TD-SCDMA), adjacent to the BSS.
Up to 3 TDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for
2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method).
Coding rules
The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy value

indicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN.
Mandatory rules
- The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to 1) shall be different
from each other.
- Only following downlink TDD UARFCN ranges are standardised :
a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121
b) 9254-9546 and 9654-9946
c) 9554-9646
d) 12854-13096
e) 11504-11996
f) 9404-9596
valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
List of numbers
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
BSS
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
1428 / 1436
External Comment
- The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.

- The TDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on
BCCH.
- Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is
not disabled
current calls.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1429 / 1436
10.2.31 (TDD_Qoffset) - (TDD_Qoffset)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
TDD_Qoffset
Logical Name
TDD_Qoffset
Definition
the neighbour GSM
cells for UTRAN TDD cell re-selection.
Coding rules

1: -28: -28 dB
2: -24: -24 dB
3: -20: -20 dB
4: -16: -16 dB
5: -12: -12 dB
6: -8: -8 dB
7: -4: -4 dB
8: 0: 0 dB
9: 4: 4 dB
10: 8: 8 dB
11: 12: 12 dB
12: 16: 16 dB
13: 20: 20 dB
14: 24: 24 dB
15: 28: 28 dB
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-32
28
-32
External Comment
This parameter is broadcast on BCCH.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1430 / 1436
10.2.32 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT) (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Logical Name
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Definition
Load threshold determining whether a 3G to 2G handover request

shall be rejected in load situation; the feature is deactivated by setting
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT to its maximum value 100%.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT shall be lower than the 2G load

thresholds HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD or equal to 100%.
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
100
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1431 / 1436
10.2.33 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ) - (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ
Logical Name
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ
Definition
Load threshold on the serving cell below which handovers towards

3G cells are forbidden when I.E. Service Handover is missing
(whatever EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO value)
Coding rules
Step size = 1
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
100
External Comment
Value 0 disables the feature.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1432 / 1436
10.2.34 (THR_ECNO_HO) - (THR_ECNO_HO)

Parameter Name
HMI Name
THR_ECNO_HO
Logical Name
THR_ECNO_HO
Definition
Ec/No threshold above which a handover to UTRAN may be triggered
Coding rules
step size = 0.5 dB, coded over 6 bits

0: "HO to 3G attempted whatever the Ec/No",
1: -24.0,
2: -23.5,
3: -23,
...,
48: -0.5,
49: 0.0
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Threshold
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
dB
-24.5
-15
External Comment
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1433 / 1436
10.2.35 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(FDD))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
UARFCN
Logical Name
ARFCN_3G(FDD)
Definition
Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

(UARFCN) of an external 3G FDD cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized:

I) 10562-10838 and
II) 9662-9938 and
III) 1162-1513 and
IV) 1537-1738 and
V) 4357-4458 and
VI) 4387-4413 and
VII) 2237- 2563 and
VIII) 2937-3088 and
IX) 9237-9387
X) 3112-3388
XI) 3712-3812
XII) 3837- 3903
XIII) 4017-4043
XIV) 4117-4143
ARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for
handover (or both).
ARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target for
reselection (or both).
- For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD),
SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all the
neighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both).
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
1434 / 1436
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_3G is FDD

- The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells configured for
reselection (or both) are broadcast on BCCH.
modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1435 / 1436
10.2.36 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(TDD))

Parameter Name
HMI Name
UARFCN
Logical Name
ARFCN_3G(TDD)
Definition
Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

(UARFCN) of an external 3G TDD cell.
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
- Only the following downlink UARFCN ranges are standardized:

a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121
b) 9254- 9546 and 9654-9946
c) 9554-9646
d) 12854-13096
e) 11504-11996
f) 9404-9596
ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G TDD cells target for
reselection.
valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell where
Recommended rules
Category
Site (CAE)
Type
Number
SubSystem
BSC
Instance
3G cell
Value
Unit
Minimum
Maximum
Default
None
16383
None
External Comment
- Significant if RAT_3G is TDD

- The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.
- The TDD UARFCns of the 3G neighbour cells (configured for
reselection) are broadcast on BCCH
modification.
Cell Type Dependent
No
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1436 / 1436

Parameter B11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameter B11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel-Lucent GSM

Telecom Parameters Dictionary

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

BLANK PAGE BREAK

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

1.1 Parameter Classification

1.2 Parameter Description

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1 Site (CAE)

step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

Permanent offset to C2 criterion.

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

Flag to disable/enable the VGCS in the cell

When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

Coded over 3 bits

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

Maximum number of radio timeslots that can be used by the VGCS

MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS

127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.

Cell Type Dependent

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.30

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS

- The following rules about the upper limit are recommended :

127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.